JP7125577B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

There is a proposal for a gaming machine that displays a pending display on a display screen .

JP 2016-198442 A

Such gaming machines do not guide the number of starting memories according to the display state of the variable display game .

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of guiding the number of starting memories according to the display state of a variable display game .

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine is provided as described below. The gaming machine is capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays identification information based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning hole, and gives a game value to a player when the variable display game derives a special result. A game control means for controlling a possible special game state, and a display control means for displaying an effect display related to the variable display game in the display area of the display device. The game control means includes start storage means capable of storing start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number as the execution right of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball into the start prize winning slot, and executes the variable display game based on the start memory. and a variable display game control means. The identification information can be variably displayed in a ready-to-win mode, which is a variable display mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect display. The display control means displays a first effect display in the variable display game and a second effect display in the special game state in the display area of the display device, and displays a numerical value indicating the number of starting memories and corresponding to the number of starting memories. The image display can be displayed in the display area of the display device, and the variable display of the identification information that can be variably displayed in the reach mode and the first effect display are displayed in the first variable display area, and the image display and a first control for displaying numerical displays at predetermined positions corresponding to each; can be set within the first variable display area that does not overlap with the set, and the variable display of the identification information that can be variably displayed in the reach mode and the first effect display are displayed in the set second variable display area, and the set In the first variable display area outside the second variable display area , the variable display of the identification information that can be variably displayed in the reach mode is not displayed, and the numerical value display is displayed at a predetermined position, and the image display is not displayed. 2 control can be performed.

According to one aspect, in the gaming machine, the number of starting memories can be shown according to the display state of the variable display game .

It is a perspective view showing an example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment. It is a front view showing an example of the game board of the first embodiment. 1 is a block diagram showing an example of a control system for a gaming machine according to the first embodiment; FIG. It is a block diagram which shows an example of a structure of the production|presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the batch display apparatus of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of main processing of the first embodiment; FIG. 8 is a diagram (part 2) showing a flowchart of main processing of the first embodiment; FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a flowchart of checksum calculation processing according to the first embodiment; FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of initial value random number update processing according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the input process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the switch read-in process of 1st Embodiment. 4 is a diagram showing a flowchart of output processing according to the first embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the payout command transmission process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the random number update process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the random number update process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a prize-winning switch / state monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the dishonesty & prize-winning monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the prize-winning number counter update process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the gaming machine state check process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the payout busy signal check process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure game process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the starting opening switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a flowchart of hard random number acquisition processing according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a special figure starting entrance switch common process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure reservation information determination process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big winning a prize opening switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a special figure usual process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure usual process transition setting process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation|variation start process of 1st Embodiment. It is a diagram showing a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot flag 1 setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot flag 2 setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot determination process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit determination process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 stop design setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 stop design setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure information setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the variation pattern setting process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a change start information setting process according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of process transition setting processing (special figure 1) during a special figure fluctuation|variation of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of process transition setting processing (special figure 2) during special figure fluctuation|variation of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a process during special figure fluctuation|variation of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process during a special figure display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of a process during a special figure display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of a process during a special figure display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the frequency|count update process of high probability fluctuation|variation of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the production|presentation mode information check process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process 1 in small hit fanfare of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of fanfare/during interval processing according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process during opening of a big winning a prize opening of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process during opening of a big prize-winning opening of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big winning a prize hole remaining ball process transition setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big winning a prize hole residual ball process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing 2 according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot end process transition setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot end process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot end setting process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot end setting process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure usual process transition setting process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process during the small-hit fanfare of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of process transition setting processing during a small hit of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a process during a small hit of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit operation|movement transition setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the small hit operation|movement of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small-hit residual ball process transition setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small-hit residual ball process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit end process transition setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit completion|finish process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special-figure usual process transition setting process 3 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the production|presentation command setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the design variation control process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the blink control timer initial value table of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the distribution process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a flowchart of 2-byte allocation processing according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of normal figure game processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the gate switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the general electric prize-winning switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of normal figure normal processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process during normal figure fluctuation of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a process during normal figure fluctuation|variation of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process during the normal figure display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a process during the normal figure display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of process transition setting processing in per normal figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process during normal per figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of normal electric operation transition setting processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a diagram showing a normal electric operation timing chart of the normal variable winning device of the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal electric residual ball process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the end process transition setting process per normal figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of end processing per normal figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a flowchart of segment LED editing processing according to the first embodiment; FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a flowchart of magnet fraud monitoring processing according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the board electric wave unauthorized monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of external information editing processing according to the first embodiment; FIG. 9 is a diagram (part 2) showing a flowchart of external information editing processing according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main prize ball signal edit process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transmission timing chart of the main prize ball signal of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the starting opening signal edit process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main process in the production|presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the reception command check process in the production|presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the receiving command analysis process in the production|presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the decoration control process in the production|presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the decoration setting process in the production|presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a display screen according to the first embodiment; FIG. 2 is a diagram (2) showing an example of a display screen according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart of the execution timing of the look-ahead effect|presentation of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation pattern table of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the prefetch effect setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart of the execution timing of the look-ahead effect|presentation of the modification 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart of the execution timing of the look-ahead effect|presentation of the modification 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (1) of the display screen of the modification 3 of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example (part 2) of a display screen of modification 3 of the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the modification 4 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the modification 5 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (part 1) of the superimposition aspect of the large pattern group and a reservation memory display of the modification 6 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (part 2) of the superimposition aspect of the large pattern group and a pending|holding memory display of the modification 6 of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example (part 1) of a display screen in Modification 7 of the first embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example (part 2) of a display screen in Modification 7 of the first embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of modification 8 of the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the decorative design of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the design stop rule table classified by reach of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation flow of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation flow at the time of single reach occurrence of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation flow at the time of double reach occurrence of 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example (part 1) of a display screen displayed by the display device of the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example (part 2) of a display screen displayed by the display device of the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example (part 3) of a display screen displayed by the display device of the second embodiment; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example (part 4) of a display screen displayed by the display device of the second embodiment; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example (No. 5) of a display screen displayed by the display device of the second embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation flow at the time of double reach occurrence of the modification 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen which the display apparatus of the modification 2 to the modification 4 of 2nd Embodiment displays. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state transition of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart of the game state transition timing of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart of switching timings of a variable display pattern selection table according to the third embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of reach appearance rate and reach reliability in production mode A of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which makes a graph and shows an example of reach appearance rate and reach reliability in production mode A of a 3rd embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation display pattern selection table in the normal game state of the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation display pattern selection table which a game control apparatus uses in the normal game state of the modification 1 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation display pattern selection table which the production|presentation control apparatus uses in the normal game state of the modified example 1 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state transition of the modified example 2 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state transition of the modification 3 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state transition of the modification 4 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart of the game state transition timing of the modification 4 of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart of switching timings of a variable display pattern selection table according to modification 4 of the third embodiment; It is a front view showing an example of the game board of the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the decorative design of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the variable display screen using the decoration pattern A in the display apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a jackpot list of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of occurrence of "A bonus 1" and "A bonus 2" of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation execution procedure of "A bonus 1" of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation execution procedure of "A bonus 2" of 4th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example (part 1) of an effect display screen in "A bonus 2" of the fourth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example (part 2) of the effect display screen in the "A bonus 2" of the fourth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example (part 3) of an effect display screen in "A bonus 2" of the fourth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example (part 4) of the effect display screen in the "A bonus 2" of the fourth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example (No. 5) of the effect display screen in the "A bonus 2" of the fourth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example (No. 6) of an effect display screen in "A bonus 2" of the fourth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example (No. 7) of an effect display screen in "A bonus 2" of the fourth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example (part 8) of an effect display screen in "A bonus 2" of the fourth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example (9) of an effect display screen in "A bonus 2" of the fourth embodiment; It is a figure which shows the timing chart which becomes an example of the decorative symbol switching timing before and after the end of "A bonus 2" of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of an apparent big-hit structure in the big-hit on control of the modified example 1 of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation execution unit of a big hit of the modification 1 of 4th Embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of the execution timing of the during-bonus variable effect of the modification 2 of the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation which changes with the apparent number of big hits of the modification 3 of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the decorative design of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the pattern arrangement|sequence in a high probability state of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the pattern arrangement|sequence in the normal probability state of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (part 2) of the pattern arrangement|sequence in the normal probability state of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the privilege given to a player at the time of hit generation|occurrence|production of 5th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of the effect flow of the display effect in the normal probability state of the fifth embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen which the display apparatus of 5th Embodiment displays. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example (part 2) of a display screen displayed by the display device of the fifth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a display effect flow in a high-probability state according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example (part 3) of a display screen displayed by the display device of the fifth embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example (part 4) of a display screen displayed by the display device of the fifth embodiment; FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example (No. 5) of a display screen displayed by the display device of the fifth embodiment; A case where the ready-to-win derivation pattern is temporarily stopped on the first temporarily stopped symbol of the fifth embodiment to develop into a ready-to-win, and a case where symbols other than the ready-to-win deriving symbols temporarily stop on the first temporarily stopped symbol to develop into a ready-to-win. 4 is a timing chart showing timing; It is a figure which shows an example of the pattern arrangement|sequence in the normal probability state of the modification 1 of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen which the display apparatus of the modification 1 of 5th Embodiment displays. It is a figure which shows an example of the flowchart of the pattern arrangement|sequence setting process in the normal probability state of the modification 2 of 5th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[First Embodiment]
First, a first embodiment will be described based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an example of a gaming machine according to the first embodiment.

A game machine (pachinko machine) 10 of the first embodiment includes a front frame 12, which is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and rotatable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12 . A glass frame (transparent plate (transparent member) holding frame) 15 having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12 .

Also, on the left and right of the glass frame 15, lamps, LEDs, etc. A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing) in red) and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effects) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided on the lower portion of the front frame 12. As shown in FIG. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the details of the abnormality are notified by output sound (voice) from the speakers 19a and 19b. It should be noted that a lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15 for announcing abnormal dispensing.

In the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper tray (storage tray) 21 for supplying game balls to a batted ball shooting device (not shown) and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 are stored. An upper tray ball outlet 22 for flowing out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out when the upper tray 21 is full, and an operation section 24 for a ball shooting device are provided. Further, an option setting section 25 is provided at the upper edge of the upper tray 21 for the player to set various options. A plurality of selection button switches 25a are provided around the upper surface of the option setting section 25, and an enter button switch 25b is provided in the center of the upper surface of the option setting section 25. As shown in FIG. Note that the option setting unit 25 functions as an effect setting unit for the player to set the effect mode. In this case, the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch for selecting the effect mode, and the determination button switch 25b functions as a determination button switch for determining the effect mode. Further, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12 .

When the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch, the gaming machine 10 creates an effect in which the player's operation is intervened based on the player's operation received from the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b. can be done. For example, an effect in which a player's operation is intervened is an effect in a variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device (variable display device) 41 (see FIG. 2). The character displayed on 41 can be operated, or the identification information in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game displayed on the display device 41 can be stopped.

Also, on the right side of the option setting section 25, there is a ball lending button 27 operated by the player when receiving a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a ball lending button 27 operated to eject a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28, a balance display section (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the player rotates the operation portion 24, the ball shooting device shoots the game ball supplied from the upper tray 21 into the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. (see Figure 2). By operating the selection button switch 25a and the enter button switch 25b, the player can set the volume emitted from the speakers 19a and 19b and the brightness of the game board 30, for example. .

Next, the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the first embodiment.
A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30 . The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30 . In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 having a display device (variable display device) 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40 . That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41 and protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41 to prevent game balls from jumping into the surrounding game area 32 .

The display device 41 is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube). In the area where the image of the display screen can be displayed (display area), information related to the game such as multiple identification information (special symbols), characters that direct the special symbol fluctuation display game, and background images that enhance the performance effect are displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is performed. Also, on the display screen, an image (for example, a big win display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed based on the progress of the game.

Further, the left and right parts of the center case 40 are provided with a board effect device 44 for effecting a game by operating. This board effect device 44 can operate toward the center of the display device 41 from the state shown in FIG.

In the lower right part of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 that provides a starting condition for the normal pattern fluctuation display game. A game ball that has won the normal figure starting gate 34 is detected by a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning opening is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the normal figure start gate 34. A mouth 35 is arranged. The game balls that have entered these general winning holes 35 are detected by a winning hole switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting winning area) that provides conditions for starting the special figure variation display game. A game ball that has entered the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, immediately below the starting winning opening 36, there is provided a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a condition for starting the special figure fluctuation display game.
The normal variable winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b that can be converted into a state in which the upper end side is turned in a direction in which it falls down to the front side to open and allow game balls to easily flow in. This movable member 37b is always It maintains a closed closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which game balls cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device opens the game ball to easily flow into the normal fluctuation winning device 37. It can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). A game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, below the normal variable prize winning device 37, an out port 30a for recovering game balls that did not win a prize such as a prize winning port is provided.
Furthermore, below the center case 40 in the game area 32 and on the right side of the start winning opening 36, a special variation that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept the game ball depending on the result of the special figure variation display game A prize winning device (large prize winning opening) 38 is provided.

The special variable winning device 38 has an attacker-type open/close door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side. The closed state (state disadvantageous to the player) in which the big winning port is closed is changed to an open state (state advantageous to the player). That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an open/close door 38c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device, During the state, the closed state of the large winning opening is changed to the open state, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening, and providing a predetermined game value (prize balls) to the player. It's becoming The game balls winning these special variable winning devices 38 are detected by the big winning opening switch 38a (see FIG. 3).

In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, of the game area 32 in which game balls flow down, the area to the left of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the area to the right of the center case 40 is the right game area. It is said that Then, the player can aim to win a prize in the starting prize-winning opening 36 by adjusting the shooting force and shooting a game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed hitting), and shooting a game ball to the right-side game area (so-called By hitting to the right, it is possible to aim for winning the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38.

Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, a flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end of the center case 40 is arranged at a position corresponding to the right game area. A game ball that is shot is configured to pass through the channel formed by the channel forming member 42 . At least the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is made of a material that allows a game ball passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visible from the outside. A game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball flowing down the right game area) can be visually recognized from the front of the flow path forming member 42 through the flow path forming member 42. .

In addition, outside the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game that constitute the special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34 A collective display device 50 is provided for displaying a general pattern variation display game triggered by winning a prize and for displaying various types of information.

The collective display device 50 includes a round display unit 51 composed of an LED or the like, a special figure 1 reserved display unit 52, a special figure 1 design display unit 53, a special figure 2 design display unit 54, and a general design design display unit. 55 , a normal map reservation display section 56 and a state display section 57 .

Next, the control system of the gaming machine will be explained using FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the gaming machine control system of the first embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100 , which is a main control device (main board) for overall control of the game, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111 . a CPU (Central Processing Unit) unit 110 having an input port, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130 It consists of a data bus 140 and the like.

The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 or the like that generates a clock. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC (Direct Current) 32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400. and enabled.

The power supply device 400 includes an AC (Alternating Current)-DC converter that generates the DC32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from the DC32V voltage. a normal power supply unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage during a power failure to the RAM (Random Access Memory) inside the gaming microcomputer 111, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure to the game control device 100 and a control signal generation unit 430 for generating and outputting a control signal such as a power failure monitor signal and a reset signal for notifying the occurrence and recovery of a power failure.

In the first embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, , may be provided on the main substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal are provided on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the first embodiment. By providing the generation unit 430, the cost can be reduced by removing it from the target of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. Backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (especially built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. Control signal generating section 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by normal power supply section 410, for example, and detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112 . When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the game microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. processing is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 . A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B, and a RAM 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B nonvolatilely stores immutable information (programs, fixed data, various random number determination values, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area for the CPU 111A during game control, and a storage area for various signals and random values. used as An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable ROM) may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

Further, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the effect, the occurrence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state Tables for determining the first half variation pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) are included.

Here, reach (reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the game state becomes a game state (special game state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is set, at the stage where some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed. A display state in which a display result that is derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for becoming a special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed in a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called all-rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state when at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, if the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same The state of the identification information (excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this ready-to-win state.

This ready-to-reach state includes a plurality of ready-to-reach effects, and as ready-to-win effects with different possibilities of deriving special result modes (different expected values), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value is higher in the order of "no reach" < "normal reach" < "special 1 reach" < "special 2 reach" < "special 3 reach" < "premier reach". Further, this ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it becomes a loss). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state occurs is a state with a higher possibility of winning a big hit than the case in which the ready-to-win state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the performance control device 300, and to generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices. Control the whole. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a hit in the special figure variation display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining the jackpot pattern, and a variation pattern (various types) in the special figure variation display game. Random number generation circuit for generating variation pattern random numbers for determining reach and execution time of variation display game in variation display without reach, hit random numbers for determining hit of normal figure variation display game, etc. A clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds (ms)) for the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock for updating the random number generation circuit. I have.

In addition, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing relating to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result of the special figure variation display game (hit (big hit or small win) or loss) and the probability state of the special figure variation display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state), the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 as the current game state (time-saving operating state), the number of starting memories, etc., from among a plurality of variation pattern tables, select one variation pattern table. to get. Here, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives the payout motor of the payout unit according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to produce a prize ball. control to pay out Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the game machine 10, a starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, and a starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning apparatus 37. , the gate switch 34a in the normal start gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a, and the big winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V. An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided which receives a negative logic signal and converts it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. The proximity I/F 121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch may be illegally shorted, the sensor or switch may be disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire may be cut and floating. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as an abnormal condition, and to output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, when detecting the detection signal of the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the big winning opening switch 38a and the abnormality of the sensor or switch is input to the second input port 123 . Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal 2 output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124 . Further, the third input port 124 receives the detection signal of the fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the game machine 10 or the like, or the glass frame open detection signal provided on the glass frame 15 of the game machine 10 or the like. A detection signal from the switch 63 and a detection signal from a body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 of the game machine 10 are also input. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124 .

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 through the relay board 70 to a test fire test device (not shown). Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation. It's becoming

The data held by the second input port 123 asserts an enable signal CE (Chip Enable) 2 by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the game microcomputer 111 (changes to a valid level). can be read by doing The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device 200 is ready to accept commands), abnormal payout status signal (status signal indicating abnormal payout), shot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 (filled)), touch switch signal (input of the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided for taking in a signal based on the signal) and supplying it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 .

In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as power failure monitoring signals and reset signals from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from the signal. A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply 400 and an initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output section 130 . In addition, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test-firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus. is configured to Also, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third input ports 122 , 123 and 124 of the input section 120 . The data set to each port of the output section 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from each port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is made into the one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the production control apparatus 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a trial shooting test device of an accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, etc. via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. It should be noted that detection signals of switches that do not need to be processed, such as starting switches, output from the proximity I/F 121 are supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor 61 and board radio wave sensor 62, which cannot be directly supplied to the test-firing test device, are temporarily taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, when the game machine is used as a game signal. An error signal indicating the uncontrollable state is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-firing apparatus. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for taking in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector for relaying the signal line of the detection signal of the switch not via the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the game microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by this chip enable signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus. there is

Also, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and the large winning opening solenoid 38b for opening the opening/closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38 and the general electric solenoid 37c for opening the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 are connected. A second output port 134 is provided for outputting open/close data. The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50 , and the collective display device 50 . A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on/off data for the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as big win information to the external information terminal board 71 . The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the game parlor, and provides information on the game machine 10. can be supplied to an external device. In addition, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132 .

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a first driver (driving circuit) 138a that receives open/close data signals of the big winning opening solenoid 38b and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134 and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. , a second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135, and the current of the collective display device 50 that is output from the fourth output port 136. A third driver 138c for outputting an ON/OFF drive signal for the lead-in side digit line, and a fourth driver 138d for outputting to the external information terminal board 71 an external information signal to be supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device. is provided.

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. Also, the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50 is supplied with DC 12V. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED via a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal via a digit line. A power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500 . The photocoupler 139 is configured to allow two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. In addition, since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 in the same way as a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the first to third input ports 122, 123, and 124 are Not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the production control device of the first embodiment.
The performance control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 made up of an amusement chip (IC) like the game microcomputer 111 , and a video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 . A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for this purpose, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 includes a PROM 321 consisting of a PROM (programmable read only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and a memory content that can be retained even if power is not supplied during a power failure. A FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM) 323 and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 that constitutes timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311 . A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the content of the effect, instructs the content of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, lights the decoration lamp, and controls the motor. , solenoid drive control, performance time management, and other processing.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area, and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also stores an image ROM 325 that stores character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (Video RAM) that is used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325 . ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is entered. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like for the purpose is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling: small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313 , and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 . Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 314 . The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address bus/data bus 340 . An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311 . The performance control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier or the like for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The resulting voice is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Via this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure pending number command, decoration special figure command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are transmitted to the production control command signal (production command ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. there is

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18, etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory or the like that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address bus/data bus 340 . Note that the glass frame 15 may be provided with a frame effect device having a driving source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and may be provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Furthermore, the production control device 300 includes a selection button switch 25a and a decision button switch 25b of the option setting unit 25 provided on the glass frame 15, and a production accessory switch 47 for detecting the initial position of the motor in the board production device 44. (Production motor switch) function to detect the on / off state and input a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and detect the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the production control device 300 for the main control microcomputer A switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a desired level of DC voltage to the production control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by it, and drives a motor and a solenoid. DC 32 V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC 12 V for driving motors and LEDs, DC 5 V as power supply voltage for command I/F 331, and DC 15 V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. is configured to Furthermore, when using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC- A DC converter is provided in the performance control device 300 . Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, in the form of output from the main control microcomputer 311, it is supplied to the VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314 and amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal), and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc. and put them in the reset state. A cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the performance control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the performance control device 300 is powered on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal game starting gate 34, the random number for determining the hit of the normal game is extracted and stored in the ROM 111B. is compared with the judgment value stored in , and the process of judging the hit/loss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is performed. Then, after the identification pattern (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined period of time on the normal pattern display unit 55, processing is performed to display the normal pattern variation display game that is stopped and displayed. When the result of this normal pattern variation display game is a hit, the normal pattern display unit 55 displays a special result mode corresponding to each of the first to third hit stop symbols, and the general electric solenoid 37c. to open the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a loss, the normal pattern display unit 55 is controlled to display the result of the loss.

In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, the starting winning prize (starting memory) is stored, and based on this starting memory, the first special figure fluctuation display game A random number value for judging a big hit is extracted and compared with the judging value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process for judging a hit or miss of the first special figure variation display game is performed. In addition, a starting memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, and based on this starting memory, the second special figure variable display game is used for judging the big hit. The random value is extracted and compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of judging the hit or miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (production control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game. Then, after the identification pattern (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time in the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54, processing for displaying the special figure variation display game to be stopped and displayed is performed. In other words, the game control device 100 serves as game control means for controlling the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the starting winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37). .

Also, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs processing for displaying a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the setting of the production state, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the processing of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. In other words, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling effects related to games (such as variable display games).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode or the small win result mode in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54. is displayed, and processing for generating a special game state or a small winning game state (that is, processing for executing a special game or a small winning game) is performed. In the process of generating the special game state and the small winning game state, the CPU 111A, for example, causes the large winning opening solenoid 38b to open the opening/closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38, thereby allowing game balls to flow into the big winning opening. and control. Then, until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls enter the big winning opening or a predetermined openable time elapses after the opening of the big winning opening is achieved. is set as one round, and control (cycle game) is performed to continue (repeate) this for a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening/closing control means for controlling opening and closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is lost, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 are controlled to display the result mode of the loss.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is a state in which the probability of winning results in the special figure variation display game is higher than in the normal probability state. In addition, even if a high probability state is reached based on the result mode of either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game, the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state, general-purpose high-probability state) as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this time-saving state, the probability of winning the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern probability) is set to a high probability (normal pattern high probability state) higher than 0, which is the normal probability (normal pattern low probability state). is possible. As a result, the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 per unit time is increased more than when the normal variable winning device 37 is in the normal low probability state. Here, in the normal variable winning device 37 in this embodiment, the normal pattern probability is set to "0" so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal game state.

In addition, in the time saving state, the execution time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 ms, and the normal pattern stop time for displaying the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 ms, When the normal fluctuation display game results in a winning result and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (general electric opening time) and the number of openings (for example, 500 msec × 1 time) of the first winning stop pattern, The opening time of the second per stop pattern (general electric open time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 ms × 2 times), the opening time of the third per stop design (electrical open time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 m seconds × 3 times).

In addition, the execution time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, the normal pattern stop time, the number of times the normal pattern is opened, and the normal pattern open time are set appropriately so as to control the normal pattern fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 to the time saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (ordinary figure fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation display game to be the second fluctuation display time shorter than the first fluctuation display time. (eg 10000 ms is 1000 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal pattern stop time for displaying the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game to be a second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms 704 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation display game results in a winning result and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (general electric open time) is set to the normal state (normal low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than one opening time (eg 100 ms to 1352 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, the number of openings of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (the number of openings of the normal electric power) is greater than the first number of openings (for example, two times) for one winning result of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to set a second opening number of times (eg, four times). In addition, in the time-saving state, the probability of winning the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal pattern low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the case of the normal operation state. It can be a probability (universal high probability state, eg, 250/251).

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing one or more of the normal pattern fluctuation time, the normal pattern stop time, the normal pattern opening number of times, the normal pattern opening time, and the normal pattern probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-saving states with different things to be changed. Alternatively, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected when a win is achieved. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Moreover, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated.

Next, the configuration of the collective display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of a batch display device according to the first embodiment. The collective display device 50 has 32 LEDs from LED_00 to LED_31. The collective display device 50 displays various states by lighting modes of LED_00 to LED_31.

Collective display device 50, by allocating various status display functions from LED_00 to LED_31, round display unit 51, special figure 1 pending display unit 52, special figure 1 design display unit 53, and special figure 2 design display unit 54 , a general pattern display portion 55 , a general pattern reservation display portion 56 and a state display portion 57 . The round display unit 51 displays the number of rounds in the special figure game by the lighting modes of four LEDs, LED_00 to LED_03. The special figure 1 pending display unit 52 displays the number of reservations in the special figure 1 game by the lighting mode of the two LEDs, LED_04 and LED_05. The special figure 1 design display unit 53 displays the design in the special figure 1 game by the lighting mode of eight LEDs from LED_06 to LED_13. The special figure 2 design display unit 54 displays the design in the special figure 2 game by the lighting mode of eight LEDs from LED_14 to LED_21. The general pattern display unit 55 displays the patterns in the general pattern game by lighting modes of four LEDs, LED_24 to LED_27. The normal map reservation display unit 56 displays the number of reservations in the normal game by the lighting mode of the two LEDs, LED_28 and LED_29. The state display unit 57 displays the game state in the special figure game by the lighting modes of the two LEDs, LED_30 and LED_31. The special figure 2 pending display unit 58 displays the number of reservations in the special figure 2 game by the lighting mode of two LEDs, LED_22 and LED_23.

The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the game microcomputer 111 mainly consists of main processing shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be explained. FIG. 6 is a diagram (part 1) showing a flowchart of the main processing of the first embodiment, and FIG. 7 is a diagram (part 2) showing a flowchart of the main processing of the first embodiment. The main processing is processing executed by the CPU 111A.

Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In this main processing, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, first, processing for prohibiting interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then, when an interrupt occurs, the first address of the area where the values of registers, etc. are saved is set. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the first embodiment, the range of addresses of the RAM 111C is 0000h to 01FFh, with 00h or 01h being the higher order. In step S4, 00h at the top of the address range of the RAM 111C is set.

Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 is outputting a firing stop signal, and the shooting of game balls is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, sub-control means (for example, payout control device 200 and effect control device 300) for performing various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 forming the main control means A waiting time (eg, 3 seconds) is set to wait for the program to start successfully. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and waits for the start of the sub-control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It constitutes waiting means for setting a waiting time.

In addition, the power-on delay timer is clocked using a storage area (RAM area not subject to validity determination, registers, etc.) that is not subject to validity determination (checksum calculation) of data held in the RAM area. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, there is no need to exclude a part of the RAM area from the calculation, so control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated. can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the RAM initialization switch 112 may be operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the RAM initialization switch may be changed from power-on until the standby time has elapsed. It is necessary to continue to operate 112. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, even if you do not perform such a troublesome operation, it will be detected by performing an operation immediately after turning on the power, and the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power will be detected. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the

Next, after performing a process (step S7) of setting a power-on delay timer (for example, about 3 seconds), a process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12). do First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 is read through the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, two times) is set (step S8) to check whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. A determination is made (step S9).

If the power failure monitor signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitor signal has been on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the on state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). If the power failure monitoring signal continues to be turned on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, it waits until the game machine 10 is powered off. . In this way, by judging that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and appropriately deal with problems that occur when the power is turned on. be able to.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with troubles at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM 111C is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the memory contents at the time of the previous power shutdown are still retained. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM 111C, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if no power failure has occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by "-1" (step S11), and the value of the timer changes to "0". '' (step S12). If the timer value is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the waiting time has not expired, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the timer value is "0" (step S12; Y), that is, if the waiting time has expired, access to RWM (Read Write Memory) such as RAM 111C or EEPROM is permitted (step S12; Y). S13), output OFF data to all output ports (set to no output state) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111, in the first embodiment, used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step S15), Based on the state of the first input port 122 read earlier, it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on (step S16).

If the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S17), if normal (step S17; Y), it is determined whether or not the value of power failure inspection area 2 in RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), checksum calculation processing is performed to calculate the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM (step S19). match or not (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 (FIG. 7), and the process for the normal recovery from the power failure is performed.

Further, when it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N ), and if it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 (FIG. 7) to perform initialization. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. make a means of

In step S21 (FIG. 7), the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are the blackout inspection area, the checksum area, and the area related to error monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept commands, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is in an indeterminate state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared and set to an indeterminate state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined. After that, the area for storing the game state in the RWM is checked to determine whether or not the special figure is in the high probability state (the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state) (step S22). Here, if the special figure is not in the high probability (step S22; N), skip steps S23 and S24 and proceed to step S25. In addition, when the special figure is in the high probability (step S22; Y), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), for example, the high probability notification LED (error display) provided in the collective display device 50 device) is saved in the segment area (step S24). Then, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special game processing described later is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S25), and step S31. proceed to In the case of the first embodiment, in step S25, model designation command, special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command, screen specification command (customer waiting demo screen command if customer waiting, Otherwise, a plurality of commands such as the command for the recovery screen are sent. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, information about the number of presentations and high-probability number information is transmitted.

On the other hand, when the process proceeds from steps S16, S17, S18, and S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibition area is set to access permission (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are cleared. The RAM area is cleared to zero (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, the initial values at the time of RAM initialization are saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. And the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the production|presentation control board (production|presentation control apparatus 300) (step S30), and it transfers to step S31. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 reservation number command, a special figure 2 reservation number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (displaying a customer waiting demo screen, a predetermined A plurality of commands such as a command for notifying RAM initialization with light and sound for a period of time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, information about the number of presentations and high-probability number information is transmitted.

In step S31, processing for activating a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit)) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 ms) to the CPU 111A and a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for triggering random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC start-up process of step S31, a process of starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, the bit permutation pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generating circuit is set. The bit permutation pattern is the method of permuting the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit permutation pattern, it is possible to break the regularity of the random number and improve the secrecy of the random number. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be able to set them arbitrarily.

After that, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on is extracted, and the corresponding various initial value random numbers (in the case of the first embodiment, the winning pattern of the special figure is determined RWM as the initial value (start value) (step S33), interrupt is permitted (step S34). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the first embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time power is turned on. ), it is possible to destroy the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, making it difficult for the player to acquire illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S35) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and destroy the regularity of the random numbers. Although it is not particularly limited, in the first embodiment, random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit are used for the jackpot random numbers, jackpot pattern random numbers, small hit pattern random numbers, hit random numbers, and hit pattern random numbers. configured to generate However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock that is equal to or faster than the CPU operating clock, and the jackpot pattern random number, small hit pattern random number, winning random number, and winning pattern random number are determined by the program. It is a "low-speed counter" updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from the CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process) that has the same period as the timer interrupt process, which is the unit of processing. In addition, in the jackpot pattern random number, small hit pattern random number, hit random number, and hit pattern random number, each initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value each time the random number is cycled. ” is adopted. Note that each random number may be updated by a counter with "+1" or "-1", or may be updated by a random method in which all values within a range appear separately without duplication until one round is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the jackpot pattern random number, small hit pattern random number, hit random number, and hit pattern random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 is read via the port and data bus and the number of times (for example, 2 times) to be checked is set (step S36). It is determined whether the signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not ON (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By enabling the interrupt (step S34) before the initial value random number update process (step S35), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt processing due to the waiting by the initial value random number update processing.

As for the initial value random number update processing in step S35, there is a method of performing the initial value random number update processing in the timer interrupt processing as well as in the main processing. In order to avoid executing the initial value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable interrupts and then update to cancel the interrupts. If the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in the embodiment, but only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage of simplifying the main processing.

If the power failure monitor signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitor signal has been on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). If the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). Further, if the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, a process of once prohibiting interruption (step S39) is performed. A process of outputting OFF data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S42). Further, after performing checksum calculation processing (step S43) for calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown of the RWM and processing for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area (step S44), access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the process (step S45), the system waits for the gaming machine to be powered off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-insertion.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game overall, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to the instructions from the main control means etc.), the main control means delays the activation of the main control means at power-on and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device (game control Device 100) and power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

Also, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) , it is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) has a RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation section (RAM initialization switch 112) capable of being operated from the outside, and an initialization operation section. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the above is provided, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.
[Checksum calculation process]
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a flowchart of checksum calculation processing according to the first embodiment. This checksum calculation process is the checksum calculation process (steps S19 and S43) in the main process described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the start address of the RAM is set as the start value of the calculation address (step S101), and the number of repetitions is set (step S102). Here, the number of repetitions is the number of bytes of the RAM being used. Next, "0" is set as the calculated value (step S103).

After that, the value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step S104), the calculated address is updated by "+1" (step S105), and the number of repetitions is updated by "-1" (step S106). ), and it is determined whether or not the calculation of the checksum is completed (step S107). If the calculation has not ended (step S107; N), the process returns to step S104 and the above processing is repeated. If the calculation is finished (step S107; Y), the checksum calculation process is finished.

[Initial value random number update process]
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of initial value random number update processing according to the first embodiment. This initial value random number update process is the initial value random number update process (step S35) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number update process, first, the big hit design initial value random number is updated by "+1" (step S111), the small hit design initial value random number is updated by "+1" (step S112), and the hit initial value random number is updated by "+1". ' (step S113), and the winning design initial value random number is updated by '+1' (step S114), and the initial value random number update process is terminated. Here, the "jackpot design initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the special jackpot stop design, and the "small hit design initial value random number" is the random number that determines the small hit stop design of the special design. A random number that is the initial value of In addition, "hit initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the normal pattern fluctuation game, and "hit pattern initial value random number" is the initial value of the random number that determines the winning pattern of the normal pattern fluctuation game. It is a random number that becomes It should be noted that the small winning symbol random number does not exist in models without a small winning, and the winning symbol initial value random number may not exist depending on the model. In this way, by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main processing, the randomness of the random number can be enhanced.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing in the main processing described above will be described. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment. This timer interrupt process is an interrupt process that occurs during the period from when the interrupt is permitted until when the interrupt is prohibited (steps S34 to S39) in the main process described above. The timer interrupt processing is processing executed by the CPU 111A.

Timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and timer interrupt processing is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step S121). Switching to register bank 1 is equivalent to performing register save processing to move the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in main processing) to RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S122). In step S122, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, an input process (step S123) for reading inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, reading the state of each input port is performed. Then, output processing (step S124) for driving control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoid 38b, general electric solenoid 37c) is performed based on the output data set in various processes. When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, signal processing and the like are not performed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of launch permission viewed from the game control device 100, and a second signal (fire permission signal) indicating the state of firing permission viewed from the payout control device 200. is also generated within the payout control device 200 and output to the launch control device. In other words, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

Next, payout command transmission processing (step S125), random number update processing 1 (step S126), and random number update processing 2 (step S127) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 are performed. After that, it monitors whether there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the normal gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 38a, and monitors errors ( Winning opening switch/status monitoring processing (step S128) is performed to check whether the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is open. In addition, a special figure game process (step S129) for performing processing relating to the special figure variation display game and a general figure game processing (step S130) for performing processing relating to the normal figure variation display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S131) for driving the segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 to display the special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired content (step S131), the magnetic sensor 61 Magnet fraud monitoring processing (step S132) for checking the detection signal from the board to determine if there is any abnormality, board radio fraud monitoring processing (step S132) for checking the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 and determining if there is any abnormality Monitoring processing (step S133) is performed. Then, the external information editing process (step S134) is performed to set signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

Here, in the first embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of enabling interrupts) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) It is automatically performed at the time of return (at the end of timer interrupt processing). It should be noted that depending on the CPU used, there are game machines that require a command to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input processing (step S123) in the timer interrupt processing described above will be described. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of input processing according to the first embodiment.

In this input process, first, the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S141). If there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S142), and the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S142). S143). Next, prepare the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 (step S144), prepare the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM (step S145), prepare unused bit data (step S146). Unused bit data and inverted bit data are prepared for each input port. Next, bit data to be inverted is prepared (step S147), and switch reading processing (step S148) is performed. Here, "preparation" in the first embodiment means setting a value in a register, but it is not limited to this, and values may be set in RWM or other memories.

Next, prepare the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 (step S149), prepare the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM (step S150), prepare unused bit data ( Step S151), bit data to be inverted is prepared (step S152). Then, switch reading processing (step S153) is performed, and the input processing ends.

The switches monitored by the first input port 122 include, as shown in FIG. There are a power failure monitor signal (handled as unused in this process) generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply 400, a payout abnormality status signal, a shot ball burnout switch signal, an overflow switch signal, and a touch switch. The switches to be monitored at the second input port 123 include the starting port 1 switch 36a (“starting port 1 winning signal”), the starting port 2 switch 37a (by pattern branching, “starting port 2 winning signal”, “ordinary electric accessory 1 Also output as winning signal 1"), winning opening switch 35a ("normal winning opening winning signal"), big winning opening switch 38a ("special electric accessory 1 winning signal") and gate switch 34a ("normal symbol 1 There is a gate passing signal 1''). The switches monitored by the third input port 124 include the board radio wave sensor 62, the switch abnormality detection signal, the magnetic sensor 61, the illegal frame radio wave signal, and the payout busy signal.

[Switch read processing]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps S148 and S153) in the above-described input process will be described. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of switch reading processing according to the first embodiment. In this switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S161). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S162), and after inverting the bit that needs to be inverted (step S163), the port input state 1 of the target switch control area is changed. (step S164). After that, it waits until the delay time (about 100 μs) until the second reading elapses (step S165).

After the delay time (approximately 100 μs) has elapsed, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read a second time (step S166). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S167), and after inverting the bit that needs to be reversed (step S168), the port input state 2 of the target switch control area is obtained. (step S169). After that, in the first and second readings, a definite bit pattern is created in which bits with the same state are set to 1 and bits with different states are set to 0 (step S170). It is set as a fixed bit (step S171).

Next, an undetermined bit pattern is generated in which bits with the same state are set to 0 and bits with different states are set to 1 in the first and second readings (step S172). The product is taken and used as the previous holding bit (step S173). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to switch chattering or the like is removed. Then, the current defined bit and the previously held bit are synthesized and saved as the current defined state (step S174), the exclusive OR of the previous and current defined states is taken, and the result is saved as a rising edge (step S175). End switch read processing.

If the cycle of the timer interrupt is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed once for each interrupt processing and compared with the result of the previous reading to change the signal. Although there is a method for determining whether or not the switch has been processed, there is a possibility that correct determination cannot be made if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing. On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, it is possible to avoid the above problem by performing switch read processing twice in one interrupt processing with a predetermined time difference. Become.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S124) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of output processing according to the first embodiment. In this output process, first, OFF data is output (reset) to the third output port 135 (see FIG. 3) for outputting segment data of the collective display device 50 (step S181). Next, the data output to the second output port 134 that outputs the data of the general electric solenoid 37c and the big winning opening solenoid 38b is synthesized and output (step S182).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device 50 is updated by "+1" within the range of "0" to "3" (step S183), and the digit of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is displayed. Line output data is obtained (step S184). Here, as an example of dynamically lighting the LED_00 to LED_31 of the collective display device 50, the round display, the special figure 1 reserved display, the special figure 1 pattern display, the special figure 2 pattern display, the general pattern display, the general pattern reservation display, and There is a state display (game state display such as time saving state and high probability state).

Next, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S185), and the combined data is output to the fourth output port 136 for digit output and the fifth output port 137 for external information output (step S186). The external information synthesized in step S185 is "door/frame open" and "security signal".

After that, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S187), and the loaded data is output to the third output port 135 for segment output (step S188).

Subsequently, various output data of external information to be output to the external information terminal board 71 are loaded and synthesized (step S189). The external information synthesized here includes "big win signal 1", "big win signal 2", "big win signal 3", "big win signal 4", "symbol determination number signal", "starting opening signal", and "main prize ball." signal”, etc. Next, the combined data and the output data for launch permission are combined (step S190), and the combined data is output to the fifth output port 137 for outputting external information and firing permission signal (step S191).

Next, the data to be output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (step S192). After that, the data to be output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S193).

Next, the data to be output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (step S194). Furthermore, the data to be output to the test signal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( step S195). Then, the data to be output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S196), and the output process ends.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S125) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of payout command transmission processing of the first embodiment. In this figure, the left column is processing for updating (increasing) the output count of the main prize ball signal, and the right column is processing for transmitting the payout command.

In the payout command transmission process, first, among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls (for example, 3 winning balls, 10 winning balls, 14 winning balls), each , 255 wins, it is determined whether or not there is a count number other than "0" in the win count counter area 2 (step S201). If there is no count (step S201; N), the address of the winning prize counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S202), and whether or not the check of the count numbers of all winning prize counter areas is completed. is determined (step S203).

In step S201, if it is determined that there is a count number (step S201; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is subtracted ("-1" update) (step S204), and the winning number counter area 2 The number of payouts corresponding to the address is obtained (step S205). Next, the value of the remaining number of prize balls area and the number of payouts are added (step S206), the addition result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S207), 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S208), and the It is determined whether the subtraction result is "0" or more (step S209). In step S209, if it is determined that the subtraction result is "0" or more (step S209; Y), the main prize ball signal output count is updated by "+1" (step S210), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area. (step S211). Here, as a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal), 1 pulse is output for every 10 payout schedules from the main board (game control device 100), and 10 payouts are issued from the payout board (payout control device 200). One pulse is output every time.

Next, in step S203, it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S203; Y), or in step S209, it is determined that the subtraction result is not greater than or equal to "0" (step S209; N). In this case, if the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0", the value of the payout command transmission timer is updated by "-1" (step S212). If this payout command transmission process is the first timer interrupt process, the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" because the initial value set in the last step S221 of this payout command transmission process is not set. , no subtraction will be performed. In this way, the payout command is sent after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, rather than at each timer interrupt. In addition, the transmission of the payout command is also conditional on the payout control board being in a state where the prize balls can be paid out.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213), and if it is determined that the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213; Y), It is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is busy (step S214). Whether or not the payout busy signal is busy is determined by referring to the payout busy signal flag, not by referring to the state of the port. Here, the conditions for the payout busy signal to turn on (busy) are: "during payout operation", "during ball lending operation", "shot ball running out error", "overflow error", "framing radio wave illegal occurrence Medium", "Abnormality in payout ball detection switch (switch to monitor paid out balls)", "Insufficient payout error", "Excess payout error", "Award to be paid out in the memory of the payout control board When there is a count of the number of balls (the number of unpaid prize balls=the number of acquired game balls remaining) (=not 0).

Next, if the payout busy signal is not busy (step S214; N), it is determined whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215), and if there is no counting in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215 ;N), update the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked (step S216), and determine whether or not all areas have been checked (step S217). If the check of all areas has not been completed (step S217; N), the process returns to step S215.

In step S215, if there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215; Y), the target winning number counter is updated by "-1" (step S218), and the number of payouts corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 1 A command is acquired (step S219), and the acquired command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S220). Then, the initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S221).

If it is determined in step S213 that the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S213; N), if it is determined in step S214 that the payout busy signal is busy (step S214; Y) , When it is determined in step S217 that all areas have been checked (step S217; Y), or when the process of step S221 ends, this payout command transmission process ends.

[Random Number Update Processing 1]
Next, the random number update process 1 (step S126) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of random number update processing 1 according to the first embodiment. This random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial values (start values) of the big win symbol random numbers, small win symbol random numbers, winning random numbers, and winning symbol random numbers that are targets of the initial value random number updating process.

In this random number update process 1, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol random number of the normal pattern is waiting for the next initial value (start value) to be set (step S231). When the jackpot pattern random number of the normal pattern is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S231; N), it is determined whether the small hitting pattern random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S234). In addition, when the jackpot pattern random number of the general pattern is waiting for the initial value setting (step S231; Y), the jackpot pattern initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S232), and the next time of the loaded jackpot pattern random number of the general pattern is loaded. is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S233). After that, it is determined whether or not the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S234).

If the small winning design random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S234; N), it is determined whether the winning random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S237). Also, when the small-hit design random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S234; Y), the small-hit design initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S235), and the next initial value of the loaded small-hit design random number. is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S236). After that, it is determined whether or not the winning random number is waiting for setting of the next initial value (start value) (step S237).

If the winning random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S237; N), it is determined whether or not the winning design random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S240). If the winning random number is waiting for initial value setting (step S237; Y), the winning initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S238), and the next initial value of the loaded winning random number is set to the corresponding random number counter ( random number area) is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value (step S239). After that, it is determined whether or not the winning symbol random number is waiting for setting of the next initial value (start value) (step S240).

If the winning symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S240; N), the random number update process 1 is terminated. When the winning symbol random number is waiting for initial value setting (step S240; Y), the winning symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S241), and the next initial value of the loaded winning symbol random number is used. The start value of the random number counter (random number area) is set in a register (start value setting register) (step S242), and the random number update process 1 ends.

[Random Number Update Processing 2]
Next, the random number update process 2 (step S127) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of random number update processing 2 according to the first embodiment. This random number update process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display games of special figures 1 and 2 . In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (fluctuation pattern random number 1) as fluctuation pattern random numbers. is to be updated, and the update target is switched each time an interrupt occurs. Moreover, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, update processing is performed at different interrupt times for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (random number for reach fluctuation mode determination) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. is configured as follows.

In this random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be subjected to the current update process is set to a number from "0" to "3". The range is updated (step S251). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S252). Then, the upper limit determination value of the random number is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S253). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit judgment value for each type of random number, that is, a value for judging whether or not the random numbers have made a round.

Subsequently, for example, a random counter such as a counter (hereinafter referred to as an M1 counter) used for refreshing the DRAM provided in the Z80 series microcomputer used as the game microcomputer 111 in the first embodiment. A counter value is loaded (step S254). Randomness can be imparted to random numbers by using the value of the M1 counter. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired to mask the value of the M1 counter (step S255). The mask value has a different number of bits depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter, is set in the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter, and when updating the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower order of the M1 counter Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

Next, it is determined whether or not the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256). If the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256; Y), the value remaining after masking the value of the M1 counter by masking the upper 1 byte as the addition value (hereinafter referred to as the mask "1" is added to the mask update value, the lower 1 byte is set to "0" (step S257), and the process proceeds to step S259. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256; N), the upper 1 byte is set to "0" as the addition value, and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value (step S258). ), and the process proceeds to step S259. The reason for adding "1" to the masked value is to avoid the fact that the masked value may become "0", and if "0" is added afterward, the value before addition will not change. be.

Then, it is determined whether or not the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S259). Step S260), and the process proceeds to step S262. If the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S259; N), "0" is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number value, and the value of the random number area to be updated (1 byte) is set as the lower 1 byte of the random number value. is set (step S261), and the process proceeds to step S262.

In step S262, a value obtained by adding the additional value determined in step S257 or S258 to the random value is set as a new random value, and it is determined whether or not this new random value is greater than the upper limit determination value obtained in step S253. (Step S263). If the new random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (step S263; N), the new random number is saved in the lower random number area of the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S265). If the new random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step S263; Y), the value obtained by subtracting the upper limit judgment value from the new random number is used again as a new random number (step S264). The random number or 2-byte random number is saved in the lower random number area (step S265).

Next, it is determined whether or not the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step S266), and if it is not a 2-byte random number (step S266; N), the random number update process 2 ends. If it is a 2-byte random number (step S266; Y), a new random number (if a new random number is calculated again, that value) is saved in the upper random number area of the 2-byte random number (step S267). , the random number update process 2 ends.

Thus, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the special figure 1 and special figure 2 variation display games. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting area of the start winning port 36 or the normal variation winning device 37. Random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for

[Winning gate switch/state monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step S128) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the winning opening switch/state monitoring process of the first embodiment. In this winning hole switch/state monitoring process, first, a winning hole monitoring table (for example, a port to which a detection signal from a count switch is input) corresponding to the big winning hole switch 38a in the big winning hole (special variable winning device 38) and data indicating the bit position in the port of the signal) is prepared (step S271). Next, a fraud & winning monitoring process (step S272) is executed to monitor whether there is fraudulent winning of a prize (unauthorized winning) even though the winning opening is not open, and to detect normal winning. .

After that, a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other big winning opening switch 38a in the big winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S273), to monitor whether there is an illegal winning or not, and to detect a normal winning. Detected fraud & winning monitoring process (step S274) is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the general electrical system is prepared (step S275), and fraud & winning monitoring processing ( Step S276) is executed.

Next, a winning opening monitoring table for winning opening switches (starting opening 1 switch 36a, winning opening switch 35a of general winning opening 35 in this case) that does not require fraud monitoring processing is prepared (step S277), and the number of winnings is updated. A number counter update process (step S278) is performed.

Next, the value of the state scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored for the error state of the gaming machine 10 is to be monitored this time is set to "0". to "3" (step S279). After that, depending on the value of the state scan counter, any of the switch abnormality 1 error output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector, the shot ball failure error from the payout control device 200, the overflow error from the overflow switch, and the payout abnormality error A gaming machine status monitoring table 1 is prepared for setting the monitoring of errors based on this (step S280). Then, gaming machine state check processing (step S281) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed.

Next, a gaming machine state monitoring table 2 is prepared for setting an error monitoring target based on one of glass frame opening, main body frame opening, frame radio wave fraud, and touch switch according to the value of the state scan counter. (Step S282). Then, gaming machine state check processing (step S283) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the state scan counter is "0" (step S284). End the process. In this case, there is no gaming machine status monitoring target in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the state scan counter is "0" (step S284; Y), the game machine state based on the switch abnormality 2 error output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector, etc., according to the value of the state scan counter. A gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared for setting the monitoring of the game machine (step S285). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S286) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed, a payout busy signal check process (step S287) is performed, and the winning opening switch/status monitoring process is terminated. Note that the payout busy signal check process is not performed every time, but is performed once every four times, and the remaining three times are passed, so that the monitoring period is 16 ms.

[Fraud & Winning Monitoring Process]
Next, the cheating & winning monitoring process (steps S272, S274, S276) in the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (see FIG. 17) will be described. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of fraud & winning monitoring processing according to the first embodiment. Each winning slot monitoring table prepared in the winning slot switch/error monitoring process contains "data for determining whether there is an input (monitoring switch bit)", "lower address of fraud monitoring information", "fraudulent winning number area lower address", "Illegal winning error notification command", "Illegal winning number upper limit (number of illegal occurrence determination)", "Winning gate switch table address" and "Notification timer update information (permit/update)" Information shall be defined.

This fraud & winning monitoring process is a process performed on the big winning opening switch 38 a of the special variable winning device 38 and the starting opening 2 switch 37 a of the normal variable winning device 37 . With regard to the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) and general electric power (normal variable winning device 37), it is easy to forcibly open the opening and closing member, insert the game ball, and pay out the prize ball. In addition to monitoring fraud.

In the fraud & winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning opening switch to be monitored for the gaming machine state is checked (step S291), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is in progress (step S292). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than the special game state in which the special variable winning device 38 is opened when the winning opening switch to be monitored for the state of the gaming machine is the big winning opening switch 38a. In addition, when the winning opening switch to be monitored for the state of the gaming machine is the starting opening 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 is executed based on the normal hit.

Then, if it is the fraud monitoring period (step S292; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S293). If there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S293; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S302). Also, if there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S293; Y), the number of target fraudulent winnings is updated by "+1" (step S294), and the number of fraudulent winnings after addition is the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations to be monitored ( For example, 5) or more (step S295).

The reason why the determination number is set to 5 is that, for example, when the large winning opening in the open state is changed to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the big winning opening, and the game ball is caught in the valid period of the count switch. This is to avoid immediately judging that the game is fraudulent when a prize is won after the time period or when noise is added to the signal. As a result, it is possible to prevent the user from easily judging that the transaction is fraudulent even if it is not necessarily fraudulent.

If the number is less than the judgment number (step S295; N), a winning monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S300). If the number is equal to or greater than the judgment number (step S295; Y), the fraudulent prize winning number is kept at the fraud occurrence judgment number (step S296), and the initial value is saved in the target fraudulent prize winning notification timer area (step S297). Next, a target fraudulent occurrence command is prepared (step S298), a fraudulent winning occurrence flag is prepared as a fraudulent flag (step S299), and the prepared fraudulent flag is compared with the value of the target fraudulent flag area (step S310). ).

On the other hand, if it is not the fraud monitoring period (step S292; N), a winning monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S300), and winning number counter update processing (step S301) for setting winning balls is performed. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S302), and it is determined whether or not update of the notification timer is permitted (step S303). Then, if updating of the notification timer is not permitted (step S303; N), this fraud & prize-winning monitoring process ends. Information for which update of the notification timer is not permitted includes the big winning opening switch 38a. This is because two switches are used to monitor one big winning slot. If the timer is updated by monitoring both switches, the timer will be updated at double speed, and as a result, the illegal timer will time out in half the specified time. In order to avoid such a timer update, updating at the timing of the big winning opening switch, which performs the monitoring process first, is prohibited. In addition, when the update of the notification timer is permitted as in the large winning opening switch and the starting opening 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37 which perform monitoring processing later (step S303; Y), the target notification timer is "0". If not, it is updated by "-1" (step S304). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to "0".

Updating of the notification timer is permitted when the game machine state monitoring target winning prize opening switch is one large winning prize opening switch 38a, and when the game machine state monitoring target winning prize opening switch is the other large winning prize opening switch 38a. is not allowed. As a result, the update of the notification timer is doubled in regards to the fraudulent notification of the special variable winning device 38, preventing time-up in half the specified time (eg 60000ms). In addition, when the winning opening switch to be monitored for the state of the gaming machine is the big winning opening switch 38a or the starting opening 2 switch 37a, updating of the notification timer is always permitted.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the notification timer is "0" (step S305). End the process. Also, if the value is "0" (step S305; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, a target fraud cancellation command is prepared (step S306), and an illegal winning cancellation flag is used as the fraud flag. is prepared (step S307). Then, the CPU 111A determines whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes "0" (step S308).

When the value of the notification timer becomes "0" (step S308; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes "0" in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, the target number of fraudulent winnings is It is cleared (step S309), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S310). Also, if the value of the notification timer does not become "0" (step S308; N), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes "0" in the previous fraud & winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S310).

Then, when the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S310; Y), the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area do not match (step S310; N), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step S311), and effect command setting processing is performed ( Step S312), the cheating & winning monitoring process is terminated. By the above processing, a fraud notification command is transmitted to the production control device 300 with the occurrence of fraud, and a fraudulent award fraud cancellation command is transmitted to the production control device 300 with the cancellation of the fraud, and the start and end of the fraud notification are set. It will be done.

[Processing for updating winning number counter]
Next, the winning number counter updating process (steps S278, S301) in the above winning opening switch/state monitoring process and fraud & winning monitoring process will be described. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flow chart of winning number counter update processing according to the first embodiment. Note that the winning table of the winning opening monitoring tables prepared in the winning opening switch/state monitoring process contains information on the number of repetitions and data for determining whether or not there is an input defined for each switch. (monitoring switch bit)", "lower address of winning number counter area 1" and "lower address of winning number counter area 2" are defined.

In this winning number counter update process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is obtained from the winning opening monitoring table (step S321), and whether or not there is an input (exactly, a change in input) to the target winning opening switch. (step S322).

If there is no input (step S322; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S331). Also, if there is an input (step S322; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S323), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step S324), and it is determined whether or not overflow occurs. (Step S325). Then, if no overflow has occurred (step S325; N), the updated value is saved in winning number counter area 1 (step S326). As a result, the prize number counter for prize balls (payout command transmission) is updated. The counter size at this time is 2 bytes, and is updated within the range from "0" to "65535". If overflow occurs (step S325; Y), the process of step S326 is passed.

Next, the value of target win number counter area 2 is loaded (step S327), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step S328), and it is determined whether or not there is an overflow (step S329). If no overflow has occurred (step S329; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S330). As a result, the win number counter for the main prize ball signal is updated. The counter size at this time is 1 byte, and is updated in the range from "0" to "255". If overflow occurs (step S329; Y), the process of step S330 is skipped.

When the table address is updated to the address of the next record in step S331, it is determined whether or not monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S332). If the monitoring of all switches has not been completed (step S332; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S322). Also, when the monitoring of all the switches is finished (step S332; Y), the win number counter update process is finished. Through the above processing, prize balls are set according to the winning.

[Game machine status check processing]
Next, the gaming machine state check processing (step S286) in the above-described winning hole switch/state monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of gaming machine state check processing according to the first embodiment. Each gaming machine status monitoring table prepared in the winning slot switch/status monitoring process contains "lower address of top address of status monitoring area", "port of switch control area where target signal information is stored" lower address of input state area", "mask data for extracting only bits of the target signal", "signal ON determination data", "state OFF command (in the case of an error system, the meaning of the error notification end command)", Information of "status ON command (meaning error notification start command in case of error system)", "status OFF monitoring timer comparison value" and "status ON monitoring timer comparison value" are defined respectively.

In this gaming machine state check processing, first, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is acquired (step S341), and whether or not the signal to be monitored is on, that is, whether or not the state indicates an error is determined. Determine (step S342). In addition, when the signal to be monitored is not on, it means a normal state without an error with respect to the error system, and means a non-touched state with respect to the touch switch. In addition, when the signal to be monitored is on, it means an error (abnormal, illegal) state with respect to the error system, and it means a touched state with respect to the touch switch.

In step S342, if the signal is not ON (step S342; N), a state OFF flag is prepared as a state flag (step S343), and the target state OFF command is obtained and prepared (step S344). Thereafter, the target state OFF monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S345), and the value of the target signal control region and the current signal state are compared (step S349).

On the other hand, if the signal is ON (step S342; Y), a state ON flag is prepared as a state flag (step S346), and a target state ON command is obtained and prepared (step S347). After that, the target state ON monitoring timer comparison value is obtained (step S348), and the value of the target signal control region and the current signal state are compared (step S349).

If the value of the target signal control region matches the current signal state (step S349; Y), that is, if the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S352 ), it is determined whether or not the value of the target state monitoring timer is greater than or equal to the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353). If the value of the target signal control region and the current signal state do not match (step S349; N), that is, if the signal state has changed, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control region. (step S350). Then, the target state monitoring timer is cleared (step S351), the target state monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S352), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value. (step S353).

If the target state monitoring timer value has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353; N), this gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the target state monitoring timer value is greater than or equal to the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353; Y), the state monitoring timer is updated by "-1" to remain at the value of "comparison value -1" (step S354). ), the prepared status flag is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step S355).

Then, when the prepared state flag matches the value of the target state flag area (step S355; Y), this gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area do not match (step S355; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S356), and the prepared state is turned off. An effect command setting process for transmitting either a command or a state ON command is performed (step S357), and the gaming machine state check process is terminated.

[Payment busy signal check processing]
Next, the payout busy signal check process (step S287) in the winning hole switch/state monitoring process described above will be described. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flow chart of payout busy signal check processing according to the first embodiment.

In this payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is on (step S361), and if the payout busy signal is not on (step S361; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag ( Step S362), and set the off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (step S363). For example, 32 ms is set as the OFF determination monitoring timer comparison value set here.

In step S361, when the payout busy signal is ON (step S361; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S364), and an ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value is set (step S365). For example, 32 ms is set as the ON determination monitoring timer comparison value set here.

Next, the value of the busy signal state field is compared with the current signal state (step S366). If the value of the busy signal state area matches the current signal state (step S366; Y), that is, if the signal state has not changed, the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S369), It is determined whether or not the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is greater than or equal to the timer comparison value (step S370). If the value of the busy signal state area and the current signal state do not match (step S366; N), that is, if the signal state has changed, the current signal state is saved in the busy signal state area ( step S367). Then, the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to zero (step S368), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S369), and it is determined whether or not the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (step S370). ).

If the value of the busy signal monitoring timer has not reached the timer comparison value (step S370; N), this payout busy signal check process is terminated. Further, when the value of the busy signal monitoring timer becomes equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (step S370; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by "-1" and held at the value of "comparison value -1" (step S371). , the prepared status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S372), and this payout busy signal check process is terminated.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (step S129) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of special figure game processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure game processing, monitoring of the input of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, control of the entire processing relating to the special figure variation display game, and setting of the display of the special figure are performed. In the special figure game process, first, a starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is performed. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins in the starting winning opening 36 forming the first starting winning opening and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (such as a jackpot random number) are extracted. Then, before the start of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the winning, the game result preliminary determination is performed to determine the game result based on the winning in advance.

Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this big winning hole switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the big winning hole switch 38a (big winning hole switch 1, big winning hole switch 2) provided in the special variable winning device 38 is performed.

Next, if the special game processing timer is not "0", it is updated by "-1" (step A3). In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game processing timer is "0" (step A4). If the value of the special game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already timed up, refer to branch to the processing corresponding to the special game processing number A special figure game sequence branch table is set in a register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special game processing number (step A7).

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure variation display game is monitored, the setting of the variation start of the special figure variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special figure variation A special figure normal process (step A8) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.

At step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "1", the setting of the special figure stop display time, the setting of the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, etc. (Step A9) is performed.

At step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big win, fanfare commands are set according to the kind of big win, and a big winning opening for each big win is made. Setting of fanfare time according to the opening pattern, processing during special figure display (step A10) for setting information necessary for performing processing during fanfare/interval, etc. is performed.

At step A7, if the special game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the big winning gate, the update of the number of openings, and the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning gate are performed. A fanfare/interval process (step A11) is performed.

At step A7, if the special game processing number is "4", if the jackpot round is not the final round, an interval command is set, and if it is the final round, an ending command is set; A process (step A12) during the opening of the big prize winning opening, which performs a process of setting information necessary for ball processing, etc., is performed.

At step A7, if the special game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is not the final round, the fanfare/interval processing is performed. A large winning hole remaining ball processing (step A13) is performed to set the time for the remaining balls in the big winning hole to be discharged, and to set the information necessary for performing the big win ending process.

At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "6", a jackpot end process (step A14) for setting information necessary for carrying out the special figure normal processing is performed.
At step A7, if the special game processing number is "7", the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small win occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the processing during the small win are performed. Processing (step A15) during a small winning fanfare for setting necessary information and the like is performed.

At step A7, if the special game processing number is "8", the setting of the command for the transition process during the small hit, the command for the end screen of the small hit, the setting of the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, etc. Perform small hit middle processing (step A16).

At step A7, if the special game process number is "9", small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting information necessary for performing small hit end processing is performed.
At step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "10", small winning end processing (step A18) for setting information necessary for carrying out special figure normal processing, etc. is performed.

Then, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 (step A19), symbol variation control processing related to the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 (step A20) is performed. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 (step A21), the symbol variation control process (step A22) related to the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is performed, and the special figure game process exit. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step A19, and the subsequent processes are executed. Do.

Incidentally, a small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of a conditional device, and a big win is a special result that accompanies the operation of a conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit pattern). It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable prize winning device 38 is set (the character product continuous operating device is operated). The fact that the conditional device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small prize lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on and off. In addition, "conditional device" is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of electric accessories, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term with a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start switch monitoring process (step A1) in the special game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the starting port switch monitoring process of the first embodiment.

In the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, a winning monitoring table for starting opening 1 (starting opening winning opening 36) is prepared (step A101), hardware random number acquisition processing (step A102) is performed, and whether or not there is a winning for starting opening 1. It is determined whether or not (step A103).

At step A103, when it is determined that there is no winning to the starting port 1 (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A103, if it is determined that there is a winning prize to the starting port 1 (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not during special figure time saving (during general electricity support) (step A104) . It should be noted that the determination in step A104 is based on whether or not the gaming state is in the general electricity support mode, and does not include the level of the probability state.

At step A104, when it is determined that it is not in the special figure time saving (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A104, when it is determined that it is in the special figure time saving (step A104; Y), prepare a right-handed instruction notification command (step A105), and perform production command setting processing (step A106) . That is, if it is a time-saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, a prize is not won unless the starting port 1 (starting prize winning port 36) is hit to the left, and a prize is not won to the normal variable prize winning device 37 if the player is hit to the right. Therefore, the time-saving state is a game state in which right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting. is configured to transmit a right-handed instruction notification command to the production control device 300 and perform a notification (warning) instructing to hit right by the production control device 300.

Next, after preparing a table for setting information on suspension by the starting port 1 (starting winning port 36) (step A107), special figure starting port switch common processing (step A108) is performed.

Next, start gate 2 (ordinary variable prize winning device 37) win monitoring table is prepared (step A109), hard random number acquisition processing (step A110) is performed, and it is determined whether or not there is a prize for start gate 2. (Step A111).

When it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning to the starting port 2 (step A111; N), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step A111, when it is determined that there is a prize to the starting port 2 (step A111; Y), the normal electric accessory (normal variable winning device 37) is in operation, that is, the normal variable winning It is determined whether or not the device 37 is in an open state in which the game ball can win a prize (step A112), and when it is determined that the normal electric accessory is in operation (step A112; Y), step A114. , and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, in step A112, when it is determined that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not normal electric fraud is occurring (step A113).

In determining whether or not fraud is occurring, it is determined that fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable prize winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). The normal variable winning device 37 cannot win a game ball when it is closed, and can win a game ball only when it is open. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent wins. Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (upper limit value) for determination of fraud occurrence, it is determined that fraud is occurring.

At step A113, if it is determined that the general electric fraud is not occurring (step A113; N), after preparing a table for setting the information of the suspension by the starting port 2 (normal fluctuation winning device 37) (step A114), special figure Starter switch common processing (step A115) is performed, and the starter switch monitoring processing is terminated. Further, when it is determined in step A113 that the electric power irregularity is occurring (step A113; Y), the starting port switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second starting memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, the details of the hardware random number acquisition process (steps A102 and A110) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of hard random number acquisition processing according to the first embodiment.

In the hardware random number acquisition process, first, out of the starting gate 1 (starting winning gate 36) and the starting gate 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37), the non-winning information of the starting gate to be monitored is set (step A121), It is determined whether or not there is an input to the monitored starter switch of the starter 1 switch 36a and the starter 2 switch 37a (step A122). If there is no input to the starting switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is an input to the starting switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether or not there is latch data in the random number latch register to be monitored (step A122; Y). A124).

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the extracted jackpot random number is loaded into the monitored hard random number latch register and prepared (step A125). Then, out of the starting gate 1 (starting winning gate 36) and the starting gate 2 (normal variable prize winning device 37), the winning information of the starting gate to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hardware random number acquisition process is terminated. .

[Common process for special figure start switch]
Next, the details of the special figure starting opening switch common processing (steps A108, A115) in the starting opening switch monitoring processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure start opening switch common processing of the first embodiment.

Special figure starting mouth switch common processing, when there is an input of the starting mouth 1 switch 36a and the starting mouth 2 switch 37a, is a process that is performed in common for each input.
In the special figure starting opening switch common processing, first, of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, information regarding the number of winnings to the starting opening switch to be monitored is sent to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. The number of output times of the starting signal is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step A132), and it is determined whether or not the number of output times overflows (step A133). If the output count does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM starting signal output count area (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, if the number of times of output overflows (step A133; Y), step A134 is skipped and the process proceeds to step A135. In the first embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting signal output frequency area. If the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" when updated by "+1", and it is determined that the output count overflows.

Next, of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, it is determined whether or not the update target special figure holding (starting memory) number corresponding to the monitored starting port switch is less than the upper limit value ( step A135). When the special figure reservation number to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A135; N), the special figure start opening switch common processing is terminated. If the special figure pending number to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the special figure pending number to be updated (special figure 1 pending number or special figure 2 pending number) is updated by "+1" ( Step A136), save the start gate winning flag to be monitored (step A137). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number is calculated (step A138), and the jackpot random number prepared at step A125 is saved in the RWM jackpot random number storage area ( Step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not it is a win to the starting port 1 (starting winning port 36) (step A142).
At step A142, when it is determined that the prize is not awarded to the starting port 1 (step A142; N), the process proceeds to step A145.

On the other hand, in step A142, when it is determined that the winning to the starting port 1 (step A142; Y), extract the small winning design random number, prepare (step A143), RWM small winning design random number Save in the storage area (step A144).

Next, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding RWM variation pattern random number storage area (step A145), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) is performed.

Next, prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number (step A147), perform the effect command setting process (step A148), and perform the special figure starting opening switch common processing finish.

Here, the RAM 111C of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning port 36 or the starting winning region of the normal variable winning device 37, and extracts a special figure variable display game. A starting winning memory means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a starting memory that is the right to execute. In addition, the start winning memory means (RAM 111C) stores various random values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the start opening 1 (start winning opening 36) as a first start memory up to a predetermined number. Various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the mouth 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number as the upper limit.

[Special Figure Reservation Information Judgment Process]
Next, the details of the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) in the above-described starting opening switch common process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a flowchart of special figure reservation information determination processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

In the special figure reservation information determination process, first, the start opening winning flag saved at step A137 is checked to determine whether or not the winning is to the starting opening 1 (start winning opening 36) (step A151).

At step A151, when it is determined that the prize is not awarded to the starting gate 1 (step A151; N), the process proceeds to step A154 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A151, when it is determined that the winning to the starting port 1 (step A151; Y), it is determined whether or not during the special figure time reduction (step A152).

In step A152, when it determines with it being in special figure time saving (step A152; Y), it complete|finishes special figure reservation information determination processing.
On the other hand, at step A152, when it is determined that it is not during the special figure time saving (step A152; N), it is determined whether it is during the big hit or the small hit (step A153).

In step A153, when it determines with it being during a big hit or a small hit (step A153; Y), it complete|finishes special figure reservation information determination processing.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A153 that the big hit is not in progress or the small hit is not in progress (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit is a big hit based on whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value. Big hit determination processing (step A154) is performed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the big hit determination process is a big hit (step A155). If the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), a big hit pattern random number check table corresponding to the target starting switch is set (step A156), and the big hit pattern random number prepared in step A140 is checked. The stop symbol information is acquired (step A157), the process proceeds to step A164, and the subsequent processes are performed.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), it is determined whether or not the winning is to the starting port 1 (starting winning port 36) (step A158).
At step A158, when it is determined that the starting gate 1 is not won (step A158; N), set stop symbol information (step A163), shift to the processing of step A164, and thereafter. process.

On the other hand, in step A158, when it is determined that the winning to the starting port 1 (step A158; Y), whether or not the big hit random number coincides with the small hit determination value determines whether or not it is a small hit. A small hit determination process (step A159) for determining is performed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step A160). Then, if the judgment result is not a small hit (step A160; N), stop symbol information for losing is set (step A163), the process proceeds to step A164, and the subsequent processes are performed.

On the other hand, when the judgment result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a small hit design random number check table is set (step A161), and stop design information corresponding to the small hit design random number prepared in step A143 is displayed. It acquires (step A162), moves to the process of step A164, and performs the subsequent processes.

Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and effect command setting processing (step A165) is performed. Next, a special figure information setting process (step A166) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed, and a variation pattern setting process (step A167) for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game. do

After that, prepare a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game (step A168), production command setting processing (step A169) is performed, and the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. In addition, the special figure information setting process in step A166 and the variation pattern setting process in step A167 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process.

By the above processing, a look-ahead pattern command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory of the look-ahead target and a look-ahead variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. and transmitted to the effect control device 300 . As a result, the judgment result (read-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is produced before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to inform the device 300, especially by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, etc., to the player before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the starting memory in the starting winning memory means (RAM 111C) before executing the variable display game based on the starting memory (for example, whether or not there will be a special result, etc.). Judgment) constitutes a preliminary judgment means. The random number value stored in correspondence with the starting memory is judged in advance not only when the starting memory is generated, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is performed. good.

[Large winning opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the special game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening switch monitoring process of the first embodiment.

In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is being opened, that is, whether or not it is in a special game state (step A201). If the process is in progress during the opening of the big winning opening (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to step A205 and the subsequent processes are performed. If the large winning opening opening process is not being performed (step A201; N), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (step A202).

If the large winning hole remaining balls are being processed (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. When the big winning hole residual ball processing is not being performed (step A202; N), it is determined whether or not processing is being performed during the small winning (during the small winning game state) (step A203).

When it is in process during small hit (step A203; Y), it transfers to the process of step A205. If it is not during small hit processing (step A203; N), it is determined whether or not small hit remaining ball processing is being performed (step A204).

When the small hit remaining ball processing is not being performed (step A204; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring processing is terminated. When the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205.

In addition, since the value of the special game processing number does not move until the special game processing timer reaches "0", the progress state of the game can be checked by checking the value of the special game processing number. can be checked. Therefore, the value of the special game processing number is checked to determine whether or not the big winning opening is being processed, the remaining balls of the big winning opening are being processed, the small winning balls are being processed, and the remaining small winning balls are being processed. do it.

Then, "0" is set in the winning counter for counting the number of winnings to the big winning opening to be added in this big winning opening switch monitoring process (step A205), and whether there is an input to the big winning opening switch 1. is determined (step A206).

If there is no input to the big winning opening switch 1 (step A206; N), the process proceeds to step A210 and the subsequent processes are performed. If there is an input to the large winning slot switch 1 (step A206; Y), a large winning slot count command is prepared (step A207), effect command setting processing (step A208) is performed, and the value of the winning counter is set to " +1” (step A209).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the big winning slot switch 2 (step A210), and if there is no input to the big winning slot switch 2 (step A210; N), the process proceeds to step A214, Perform subsequent processing. If there is an input to the big winning slot switch 2 (step A210; Y), a big winning slot count command is prepared (step A211), effect command setting processing (step A212) is performed, and the winning counter value is set to " +1” update (step A213).

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214), and if the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214; Y), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is executed. finish. If the value of the winning counter is not "0" (step A214; N), it is determined whether or not processing for the remaining balls in the big winning opening is in progress (step A215). At step A215; Y), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

If it is not during the big winning opening remaining ball processing (step A215; N), it is determined whether or not the small winning remaining ball processing is being performed (step A216), and if it is during the small winning remaining ball processing (step A216; At Y), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

If the small hit remaining balls are not being processed (step A216; N), the value of the winning counter ("1" or "2") is added to the big winning opening count (step A217), and the big winning opening count is It is determined whether or not it is equal to or greater than the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round (9)) (step A218).

If the large winning opening count number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A218; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If the large winning opening count is equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A218; Y), the large winning opening count is kept at the upper limit (step A219), and the information in the special game processing timer area is cleared to zero (step A220 ), it is determined whether or not during small hit processing (step A221).

If it is not during the small winning process (step A221; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. When the small winning process is in progress (step A221; Y), the value for ending the small winning opening operation is saved in the big winning opening control pointer area (step A222), and the big winning opening switch monitoring process ends. As a result, the big winning opening is closed and one round ends.

[Special normal processing]
Next, details of the special figure normal processing (step A8) in the special figure game processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a flowchart of special figure normal processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure usual process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 reservation number (second start memory number) is "0" (step A301). When it is determined that the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 reservation number (first start memory number) is "0" (step A306). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 pending number is "0" (step A306; Y), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has started (step A311), and if the customer waiting demonstration has not started (Step A311; N) sets a customer waiting demonstration flag in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step A312).

Subsequently, prepare a customer waiting demo command (step A313), perform production command setting processing (step A314), perform special figure normal processing transition setting processing 1 (step A315), and end the special figure normal processing . On the other hand, at step A311, if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (step A311; Y), the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure normal processing is terminated.

Also, in step A301, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not "0" (step A301; N), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A302) is performed, and the decoration special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number A pending number command is prepared (step A303), and effect command setting processing (step A304) is performed. Then, the processing shift setting process (step A305) during the special figure fluctuation of the special figure 2 is performed, and the special figure usual processing is ended.

Also, in step A306, if the special figure 1 reserved number is not "0" (step A306; N), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A307) is performed, and the decoration special figure corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number A pending number command is prepared (step A308), and effect command setting processing (step A309) is performed. Then, the processing transition setting processing (step A310) during the special figure fluctuation of the special figure 1 is performed, and the special figure normal processing is ended.

In this way, by performing the check of the special figure 2 reservation number before the special figure 1 reservation number check, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not "0" special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A302) will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is preferentially executed over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the second start memory means (game control device 100) has the second start memory, the game control device 100 changes the variable display game based on the second start memory to the variable display game based on the first start memory. It constitutes a priority control means for executing with priority over the game.

[Special figure normal process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing shift setting process 1 (step A315) in the above-described special figure normal processing will be described using FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1, first, "0", which is the processing number related to the special figure normal processing, is set as the processing number (step A321), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A322).

Then, the information in the fluctuating pattern discrimination flag area is cleared (step A323), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A324), and the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 is completed. do.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A307) in the special figure normal processing described above will be described using FIG. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A331), and the first special A big win flag 1 setting process (step A332) is performed to set the deviation information and the big win information to the big win flag 1 for determining whether or not the figure variation display game is a big win.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop design setting process (step A333) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop design (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern Information setting processing (step A334) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game is set. (Step A335). After that, a variation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting information on the start of variation of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A337) is performed to end the special figure 1 fluctuation start process.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A302) in the special figure normal processing described above will be described using FIG. Figure 31 is the figure which shows the flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of 1st execution form.

The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 30 is performed for the second start memory. It is done as

In the special figure 2 variation start process, first, the special figure 2 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here special figure 2) is saved in the variation pattern discrimination flag area (step A341), and the second special A big win flag 2 setting process (step A342) is performed for setting deviation information and big win information to the big win flag 2 for determining whether or not the figure variation display game is a big win.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure to set the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern Information setting processing (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game is set. (Step A345). After that, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and variation start information setting process for setting information on the start of variation of the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed to end the special figure 2 fluctuation start process.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A332) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot flag 1 setting process of the first embodiment.

In the big-hit flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the small-hit flag area (step A351), and deviation information is saved in the big-hit flag 1 area (step A352). Next, load the jackpot random number from the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) of RWM, prepare (step A353), and store the information of the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) "0" is cleared (step A354). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here the first among the special figures 1). After that, according to whether or not the prepared big-hit random number coincides with the big-hit judgment value, big-hit judgment processing (step A355) for judging whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and whether the judgment result of the big-hit judgment processing is a big hit. It is determined whether or not (step SA356).

Then, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A355) is a big hit (step A356; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A352 (step A357 ), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A355) is not a big hit (step A356; N), whether or not the prepared big hit random number matches the small hit determination value is a small hit or not. A small hit determination process (step A358) is performed to determine whether or not the judgment result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step SA359).

Then, when the judgment result of the small hit determination process (step A358) is a small hit (step A359; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag area where the loss information is saved in step A351. (Step A360), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the small hit determination process (step A358) is not a small hit (step A359; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed while saving the loss information in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. finish. Thus, in the first embodiment, the result of the first special figure variation display game is one of "big win", "minor win", and "lose".

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big hit flag 2 setting process of the first embodiment.

In the big-hit flag 2 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the big-hit flag 2 area (step A371). Next, load the jackpot random number from the RWM special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1), prepare (step A372), and store the information of the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number 1 reservation) "0" is cleared (step A373). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here, the first among the special figures 2). After that, according to whether or not the prepared big-hit random number coincides with the big-hit judgment value, a big-hit judgment processing (step A374) is performed to judge whether or not the big-hit is a big hit, and whether the judgment result of the big-hit judgment processing is a big hit or not. It is determined whether or not (step SA375).

Then, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A374) is a big hit (step A375; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the losing information was saved in step A371 (step A376 ), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the big-hit judgment process (step A374) is not a big-hit (step A375; N), the big-hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big-hit flag 2. Thus, in the first embodiment, the result of the second special figure variation display game is either "big hit" or "loss".

[Jackpot determination process]
Next, details of the jackpot determination processing (steps A154, A355, A374) in the above-described special figure reservation information determination processing, jackpot flag 1 setting processing and jackpot flag 2 setting processing will be described using FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big hit determination process of the first embodiment.

In the jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit decision value of the jackpot decision value is set (step A381), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit decision value (step A382). A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A382; Y), set a loss as the judgment result (step A387), and end the jackpot judgment processing. Specifically, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A355) in the big hit flag 1 setting process, if the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), Since it is a small hit or a loss, "other than a big hit (small hit or loss)" is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, if the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, if the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), it is a loss. Therefore, "other than big win (lost)" is set as the determination result (step A387).

Also, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step A382; N), it is determined whether or not the probability is high (the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state) (step A383). .

Then, if it is in the high probability (step A383; Y), set the upper limit judgment value in the high probability (step A384), and determine whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value ( Step A386). Also, if it is not a high probability state (step A383; N), set the upper limit judgment value in the low probability (step A385), determine whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A386).

If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A386; Y), the judgment result is set to be lost (step A387), and the jackpot judgment processing is terminated. Specifically, when the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A355) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, if the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), a small Since it is a hit or a loss, "other than a big win (minor win or loss)" is set as the judgment result (step A387). On the other hand, if the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A374) in the jackpot flag 2 setting process, and if the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), it is a loss. , "Other than a big hit (lost)" is set as a judgment result (step A387).

If the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A386; N), that is, if the game is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the judgment result (step A388), and the jackpot judgment process ends.

[Small hit determination process]
Next, details of the small hit determination processing (steps A159, A358) in the special figure reservation information determination processing and the big hit flag 1 setting processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a flowchart of small hit determination processing of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 35, in the small hit determination process, first, a small hit lower limit judgment value is set, and it is determined whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391). In addition, the same random number (big hit random number) as the big hit determination is used to perform the small hit determination. That is, the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit, which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit. Of course, the range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value are set so as not to overlap each other.

If the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391; Y), that is, if it is a loss, a loss is set as the judgment result (step A393), and the small hit judgment process is terminated.

Also, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391; N), set the small hit upper limit judgment value, and check whether the target jackpot random number value is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value. Determine (step A392).

If the value of the big hit random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A392; Y), that is, if it is a loss, the judgment result is set to be a loss (step A393), and the small hit judgment process is terminated.

Also, if the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A392; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the judgment result (step A394), and the small hit judgment process is terminated. do.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop design setting process (step A333) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 stop design setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401). 1) to load a jackpot pattern random number (step A402). Next, a special figure 1 jackpot design table is set (step A403), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded jackpot design random number is acquired, and saved in a special figure 1 stop design number area (step A404). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the special figure 1 jackpot stop design information table is set (step A405), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and saved in the stop design pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting the stop symbol on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the stop symbol on the display device 41 . Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A407), time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and time reduction determination is made. It is saved in the data area (step A408), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A409). These pieces of information are for setting the mode of execution of the special game state and the effect mode after the special game state ends. In the case of the first embodiment, the performance mode shifts with the winning as a trigger, and the shift destination of the performance mode after the winning is changed according to the type of the winning pattern (the type of the big winning pattern or the small winning pattern). In addition, if it becomes a specific jackpot pattern (for example, 4R probability variation pattern) among the jackpots in special figure 1, depending on whether the game state is in probability variation, the production mode of the transition destination is dedicated to confirmation of probability variation It is determined whether to shift to a production mode in which it is difficult to distinguish whether it is a probability variation or not. Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is a small hit (step A410), and if it is a small hit (step A410; Y), the special figure 1 A small-hit design random number is loaded from the small-hit design random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) (step A411). Next, a special figure 1 small hit design table is set (step A412), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded small hit design random number is acquired, and saved in a special figure 1 stop design number area (step A413).

After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A414), and the presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A415). Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

Also, if the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A410; N), the stop pattern number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop pattern number area (step A416), and the losing stop design pattern is saved in the stop design pattern area. Save (step A417) and prepare a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A418). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A419), and production command setting processing (step A420) is performed. This decoration special figure command is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A421), and the information in the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) is cleared to "0" (step A422). , Clear the information in the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) to "0" (step A423), and end the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop design setting process (step A343) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 stop design setting process of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 stop design setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431), and if it is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure 2 big hit pattern random number storage area ( A jackpot pattern random number is loaded from (for reserved number 1) (step A432). Next, a special figure 2 jackpot design table is set (step A433), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded jackpot design random number is acquired, and saved in a special figure 2 stop design number area (step A434). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop design information table is set (step A435), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and saved in the stop design pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting the stop symbol on the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 and the stop symbol on the display device 41 . Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A437), time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and time reduction determination is made. It is saved in the data area (step A438), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A439). These pieces of information are for setting the mode of execution of the special game state and the effect mode after the special game state ends. Further, in the case of the first embodiment, in the big hit in the special figure 2, the production mode of the transition destination becomes a special production mode in which the probability variation is determined regardless of which jackpot pattern. Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442).

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A431; N), the stop pattern number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop pattern number area (step A440), and the losing stop pattern pattern is saved in the stop pattern pattern area. Then (step A441), a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A443), and production command setting processing (step A444) is performed. This decoration special figure command is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 later. Then, the pattern data corresponding to the stop pattern number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A445), and the information in the special figure 2 jackpot pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is cleared to "0" (step A446 ), to end the special figure 2 stop design setting process.

That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the starting port 1 (starting winning port 36), and executes the first variable display game at the starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37). A variable display game executing means for executing a second variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball. Also, the game control device 100 serves as variable display game execution control means for controlling execution of the variable display game based on the determination result of the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting process (steps A166, A334, A344) in the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination process, special figure 1 variation start process and special figure 2 variation start process will be described using FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a flowchart of special figure information setting processing of the first embodiment.

In the case of the first embodiment, the probability state (low/high probability, with/without time saving) does not affect the distribution of fluctuations, but the production mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of fluctuations. One production mode is set from a plurality of production modes according to the probability state, the presence or absence of the time saving state, the progress of the special figure fluctuation display game, and the like.

In the special figure information setting process, first, the first half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A452).

Next, the first half variation group selection offset table is set (step A453), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure reservation number and the stop design pattern are acquired (step A454).

Next, the first half fluctuation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A455), and the value obtained by the addition is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area (step A456). As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area, the fluctuation distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the presentation mode is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is used for selecting a fluctuation group later. However, although it depends on the specifications of the model, when the number of holds is large, the fluctuation time is shortened only in the case of loss, so in cases other than loss, the number of holds does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation. A variation group includes multiple variation patterns, and when determining a variation pattern, first select a variation group, and then select one variation pattern from this variation group. ing.

Next, the second half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A457), and the second half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A458).

Next, the second half variation group selection offset table is set (step A459), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure reservation number and the stop design pattern are acquired (step A460).

Next, the second half variation group selection pointer and offset data are added (step A461), the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 2 area (step A462), and the special figure information setting process ends. As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area, the fluctuation distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the effect mode is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing fluctuations in the second half (types of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, only in the case of loss, the rate of reach changes according to the number of holds (the rate of reach is lower when the number of holds is large), so in cases other than losses, the number of holds is distributed in the second half as a result. does not affect

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination processing, special figure 1 variation start processing, and variation pattern setting processing (steps A167, A336, A346) in the special figure 2 variation start will be described using FIG. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a flowchart of variation pattern setting processing according to the first embodiment.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern is the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation, which is the fluctuation form from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half variation pattern is set, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

In the fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group address table is set (step A471), the address of the second half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step A472), and the target fluctuation pattern The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the random number 1 storage area (for reserved number 1) and prepared (step A473). In the first embodiment, the structure of the second half variation group table is different for winning and losing. Specifically, the size is 1 byte for winning, and 2 bytes for losing. Since the probability of winning is lower than the probability of losing, and even 1 byte is sufficient, the size of the winning is 1 byte from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity. Therefore, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used at the time of winning. In addition, since the probability of losing is higher than the probability of winning, and it is desired to produce more diverse effects, the size for losing is set to 2 bytes.

Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure variation display game is a loss (step A474), and if it is a loss (step A474; Y), 2-byte distribution processing (step A475) is performed, and step It shifts to the processing of A477 and performs the subsequent processing. If it is not lost (step A474; N), sorting processing (step A476) is performed, the process proceeds to step A477, and subsequent processing is performed.

Then, the address of the second half variation selection table obtained as a result of the sorting is obtained and prepared (step A477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the reserved number 1), Prepare (step A478). Then, the allocation process (step A479) is performed, the second half variation number obtained as a result of the allocation is acquired, and saved in the second half variation number area (step A480). Through this processing, the second half variation pattern is set.

Next, a first half fluctuation group table is set (step A481), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (step A482). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is obtained and prepared (step A483), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of reservations 1), and prepared. (step A484). After that, sorting processing (step A485) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of sorting is acquired, and saved in the first half variation number area (step A486), and the variation pattern setting processing ends. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from among a plurality of variations.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting process (steps A337, A347) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a change start information setting process according to the first embodiment.

In the fluctuation start information setting process, first, the information in the random number storage area for the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step A491). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the second half fluctuation time value table is set (step A494), and the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is obtained (step A495).

Then, the first half variable time value and the second half variable time value are added (step A496), and the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A497). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step A498), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step A499), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A500 ). Next, the special figure reservation number corresponding to the variable design discrimination flag is updated by "-1" (step A501), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable design discrimination flag is set (step A502). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A503), the information on the free area after the shift is cleared (step A504), and the fluctuation start information setting process is terminated.

Information about the start of the special figure variation display game is set by the above processing. In other words, the game control device 100 serves as determination means for determining various random values stored in the starting storage means (RAM 111C). Also, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information in the starting memory.

Then, the information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games is later transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 receives the information on the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, and according to the determined fluctuation pattern. Set the detailed production contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information on the stop pattern, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game A variation command containing information about a pattern and a stop information command containing information about extension of stop time are mentioned, and a command is transmitted to production control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command earlier than the variation command, the processing in the production control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special figure fluctuation process transition setting process (special figure 1)]
Next, the details of the processing transition setting process during special figure fluctuation (special figure 1) (step A310) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described using FIG. 41 . FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure fluctuation process shift setting process (special figure 1) of the first embodiment.

In the special figure fluctuation processing transition setting process (special figure 1), first, "1", which is the processing number related to the special figure fluctuation processing, is set as the processing number (step A511), and processed in the special figure game processing number area Save the number (step A512).

Then, the information in the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A513), and the signal regarding the start of fluctuation of special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A514). In addition, the signal regarding the start of fluctuation of special figure 1 is a signal for turning on the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal. After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A515), and the initial value of the flashing control timer in the special figure 1 flashing control timer area (the flashing cycle timer of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53) (For example, 100 ms) is saved (set) (step A516), and the processing shift setting process (special figure 1) during special figure fluctuation is terminated.

[Special figure fluctuation process transition setting process (special figure 2)]
Next, the details of the processing shift setting process during special figure fluctuation (special figure 2) (step A305) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described with reference to FIG. 42 . FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure fluctuation process transition setting process (special figure 2) of the first embodiment.

In the special figure fluctuation processing transition setting process (special figure 2), first, "1", which is the processing number related to the special figure fluctuation processing, is set as the processing number (step A521), and processed in the special figure game processing number area Save the number (step A522).

Then, the information in the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A523), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol 2 (turning on the signal during special symbol 2 fluctuation) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A524). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A525), and the initial value of the flashing control timer in the special figure 2 flashing control timer area (the flashing cycle timer of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54) Save (set) (step A526), and end the special figure fluctuation process transition setting process (special figure 2).

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing during special figure fluctuation of the first embodiment.

In the special figure fluctuating process, first, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A601), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A602). In the case of the first embodiment, the display time is set to 600 ms when the stop symbol pattern is the winning symbol pattern, and the display time is set to 600 ms when the stop symbol pattern is the jackpot symbol pattern, and the stop symbol is set. When the pattern is a small winning symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time. In the case of the first embodiment, the same display time is set for the stop symbol pattern, the big-hit symbol pattern, and the small-hit symbol pattern, but different display times may be set for each.

Next, the process shift setting process (step A603) during special figure display is performed, and the process during special figure display is completed. That is, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Special figure display transition setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure displaying process transition setting process (step A603) in the special figure changing process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing shift setting processing during special figure display of the first embodiment.

In the special figure display process transition setting process, first, "2", which is the process number related to the special figure display process, is set as the process number (step A611), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area ( Step A612).

Next, the signal regarding the special figure 1 fluctuation end is saved in the test signal output data area (step A613), and the signal regarding the special figure 2 fluctuation end is saved in the test signal output data area (step A614). In addition, the signal regarding the special figure 1 fluctuation end is a signal that turns off the signal during special symbol 1 fluctuation. In addition, the signal regarding the special figure 2 fluctuation end is the signal which turns off the signal during special design 2 fluctuation.

Then, the initial value of the control timer (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the control timer area of the pattern fixed number of times signal related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game for output to the external information terminal (step A615). After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variation display game in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area ( Step A616), as information for controlling the special figure 2 variation display game in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, save the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 in the special figure 2 variation control flag area Then (step A617), the process transition setting process during special figure display is terminated.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure displaying process (step A10) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 45 is a diagram (Part 1) showing a flowchart of processing during special figure display according to the first embodiment. FIG. 46 is a diagram (part 2) showing a flowchart of processing during special figure display according to the first embodiment.

In the special figure display process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and the information of the small hit flag area of RWM is cleared ( Step A702).

Then, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process are loaded. (Step A703), clear the information of the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of RWM (step A704). Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A705), and if it is determined to be a big hit (step A705; Y), the second special figure fluctuation display game big hit (special figure 2 A signal relating to the start of the jackpot) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708), and a round number upper limit table is set (step A709). In addition, the signal related to the start of the special figure 2 jackpot is a signal that turns on the condition device operating signal, a signal that turns on the continuous action device operating signal, and a signal that turns on the special symbol 2 winning signal. include.

On the other hand, in step A705, as a result of checking the jackpot flag 2, if it is determined that there is no jackpot (step A705; N), it is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A706). (Step A706; Y), the test signal related to the start of the first special figure variation display game jackpot (special figure 1 jackpot) is saved in the test signal output data area of RWM, (step A707), round A number upper limit table is set (step A709). In addition, the signal related to the start of the special figure 1 jackpot is a signal to turn on the condition device operating signal, a signal to turn on the character continuous operation device operating signal, and a signal to turn on the special symbol 1 winning signal. include.

Next, after setting the round number upper limit table (step A709), obtain the round number upper limit value ("16" or "4" in the case of the first embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information, It is saved in the round number upper limit area of RWM (step A710). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

Next, the decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decoration special figure command area of RWM, prepared (step A712), and effect command setting processing (step A713) is performed. After that, prepare a probability information command related to the information to set the probability of winning results in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) (step A714), and effect command setting processing (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process (step A717).

Next, the big winning hole opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning results in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A718, the big win 2 signal and the big win 3 signal are saved as the signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. It should be noted that each ON/OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is ON when a jackpot with balls (the jackpot opening information is other than the jackpot opening information 1), and a jackpot without balls (so-called definite jackpot, etc., jackpot opening). When the information is the big winning opening opening information 1), it is turned on at the time of the big hit in the time saving state, and is turned off at other times. In addition, the big win 3 signal is turned on when the big win is with balls, and is turned off when the big win is with no balls.

After that, set the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms, or 300 ms) corresponding to the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game, and the big winning opening opening information. (Step A719), the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag save area (step A721). This stores the information of the probability state of the special figure and the time saving state when the special result occurs. Then, based on the information stored later, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined.

Then, the information of the large winning slot illegal winning number area of the big winning slot (special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the big winning slot opening information is cleared (step A722), and the large winning slot corresponding to the big winning slot opening information is cleared. A flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the area of the flag for the fraud monitoring period for the big winning opening (step A723). Thereafter, the fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A724) is performed, and the processing during special figure display ends.

On the other hand, at step A706, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A706; N), it is determined whether or not the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).

At step A725, when it is determined that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A725; Y), high probability fluctuation number update processing (step A726), production mode information check processing (step A727 ) is performed to determine whether or not the special figure high probability is in progress (the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state) (step A728).

At step A728, if it is determined that it is not in the special figure high probability (step A728; N), the decoration special figure command is loaded from the decoration special figure command area, prepared (step A729), and the production command setting process (Step A730) is performed. Next, a small winning fanfare command is prepared (step A731), effect command setting processing (step A732) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733 to perform subsequent processing.

Also, in step A728, when it is determined that it is in the special figure high probability (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733 and the subsequent processes are performed. Thus, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the occurrence of a small win opens the big winning opening, but the occurrence of a small win. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed in order not to make the player aware of the above.

Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag save area (step A733). After that, the process transition setting process 1 (step A734) during small hit fanfare is performed, and the process during special figure display is completed.

On the other hand, in step A725, when it is determined that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), the high probability fluctuation number update process (step A735), the production mode information check process regarding the setting of the production mode (step A736) is performed, the switching preparation remaining rotation speed corresponding to the production mode number is set (step A737), and it is determined whether or not the production remaining rotation speed matches the switching preparation remaining rotation speed (step A738). In addition, the switching preparation remaining number of rotations is a different value in all of the plurality of presentation modes (number of rotations: for example, mode A is 4 times, mode B is 3 times, mode C is 8 times, etc.). It may be the same value (number of rotations) in any one of the plurality of production modes, or the same value (number of rotations) in all production modes of the plurality of production modes. ).

In step A738, when it is determined that the number of rotations remaining in the production and the number of rotations remaining in switching preparation do not match (step A738; N), the special figure normal processing transition setting processing 1 (step A741) is performed, and the special figure display. Terminate intermediate processing.

On the other hand, in step A738, if it is determined that the number of rotations remaining in the production and the number of rotations in preparation for switching match (step A738; Y), the production mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A739), and the production command is set. After performing the process (step A740), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed, and the process during special figure display ends. The production mode switching preparation command is a command for not performing a look-ahead production from several rotations before the production mode switches, and by transmitting the production mode switching preparation command to the production control device 300, the production is performed across the modes. It is possible to prevent contradiction etc. from occurring in

[High-probability fluctuation frequency update process]
Next, the details of the high probability fluctuation frequency update process (steps A726, A735) in the process during special figure display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a flowchart of high-probability variation count update processing according to the first embodiment.

In the high probability fluctuation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not in the special figure high probability (step A751), if not in the special figure high probability (step A751; N), high probability fluctuation number update process exit.

If it is in the special figure high probability (step A751; Y), the number of high probability fluctuations managing the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game to be in a high probability state is updated by "-1" (step A752), high It is determined whether or not the number of probability fluctuations is "0" (step A753).

If the number of high-probability fluctuations is not "0" (step A753; N), the high-probability fluctuation number update process is terminated. If the number of high-probability fluctuations is "0" (step A753; Y), the information in the high-probability notification flag area is cleared (step A754), and the signal regarding the high-probability end is saved in the external information output data area ( Step A755). It should be noted that the signal relating to the high-probability end is a signal that turns off the big win 2 signal.

And the signal regarding the end of high probability & time saving (high probability & no time saving or high probability & time saving) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A756). In addition, the signal related to the end of high probability & time reduction is a signal to turn off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal to turn off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal to turn off A signal to turn off, a signal to turn off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and a signal to turn off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal. Also, even in the special figure high probability, since only the probability state changes in the general figure, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always turned off.

Then, the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step A757), and the general pattern low probability flag is saved in the general pattern game mode flag area (step A758).
Then, the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A759), and the signal related to the left hitting instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A760). It should be noted that the signal relating to the instruction to hit left is a signal that turns off the firing position designation signal 1 . Then, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the left-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A761), and the high-probability variation count update process is terminated.

[Production mode information check process]
Next, details of the effect mode information check process (steps A727 and A736) in the process during special figure display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect mode information check processing of the first embodiment.

In the presentation mode information check process, first, it is determined whether or not the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A771), and if the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A771; Y), The production mode information check process is ended. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of times the special figure variation display game has been executed, for example, the effect mode that continues until the next big hit is selected in a high probability state. is.

If the next mode transition information is not an update no code (step A771; N), the effect remaining rotation number which is the executable number of the special figure fluctuation display game until the change of the effect mode is updated by "-1" (step A772 ), and it is determined whether or not the number of rotations remaining for the effect is "0" (step A773). The processing of step A772 serves as counting means for counting the number of executions of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game.

If the number of rotations remaining for effect is not "0" (step A773; N), the effect mode information check process is terminated. If the number of rotations remaining in the production is "0" (step A773; Y), that is, in the case of changing the production mode from the next special figure variation display game, the production mode information address table is set (step A774), The address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is obtained (step A775).

The production mode number of the production mode to be shifted is acquired and saved in the production mode number area (step A776), and the production remaining rotation number of the production mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the production remaining rotation number area (step A777). The production mode to be transferred (the production mode of the transfer destination) can be known from the next mode transfer information already saved before step A776. The next mode transition information about the next performance mode of the performance mode to be shifted is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A778). It should be noted that the process of step A776, production mode execution control means for performing execution control of one of a plurality of production modes (game mode) production mode (game mode) corresponding to the counting result by the counting means (step A772) (game mode execution control means).

A probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number acquired in step A776 is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether or not the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A780). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure recovery time transmission command area, that is, if the state of the probability does not change (step A780; Y), the command is not sent to the production control device 300 production mode End the information check process. If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area when power is restored (step A780; N), save the prepared probability information command in the transmission command area when power is restored (step A781), and set the effect command. Processing (step A782) is performed.

Then, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed acquired in step A777 is prepared (step A783), and effect command setting processing (step A784) is performed. Then, prepare a high-probability fluctuation count command corresponding to the high-probability fluctuation count (step A785), perform production command setting processing (step A786), and determine whether or not the new production mode is a left-handed mode. (Step A787).

If the new effect mode is not the left-handed mode (step A787; N), the effect mode information check process is terminated. When the new production mode is a mode for hitting left (step A787; Y), a left hitting instruction notification command is prepared (step A788), production command setting processing (step A789) is performed, and production mode information is checked. End the process.

[Fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing 1 (step A724) in the processing during special figure display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fanfare/interval process transition setting process according to the first embodiment.

In the fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1, first, "3", which is the process number related to the fanfare/interval process, is set as the process number (step A791), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area. (Step A792).

Next, a signal relating to the start of a big hit (special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step A793). The signals relating to the start of the big win include, for example, a signal to turn on the big win 1 signal (output with the big win + small win) and a signal to turn on the big win 4 signal (output with the big win).

Next, the signal regarding the end of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step A794). Signals related to the end of high probability & time reduction are, for example, a signal to turn off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal to turn off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal to turn off A signal to turn off, a signal to turn off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and a signal to turn off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal.

After that, clear the information in the round number area that manages the number of rounds executed in the special game state (step A795), save the number without time reduction in the game state display number area (step A796), and the normal game mode flag Save the normal pattern low probability flag in the area (step A797).

Then, to clear the information of the variable pattern discrimination flag area (step A798), clear the information of the high probability notification flag area in order to turn off the gaming state display LED related to the display of the high probability state (step A799), Save the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, save the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the production control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A801), special figure fluctuation that can be executed in a high probability state Clear the information in the high-probability fluctuation count area that manages the number of times of display games (step A802). This ends the high probability state and the time saving state, and becomes the normal probability state and normal state.

After that, the number of the production mode 1 is saved in the production mode number area (step A803), and since the game control device 100 manages the production mode, the information of the production remaining rotation number area is cleared (step A804). , the non-updated code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A805). Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (turning on the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806). The number in the state is saved (step A807), and the fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1 is terminated. As a result, the information of the effect mode is once cleared along with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the process transition setting process 1 (step A734) during small hit fanfare in the process during special figure display described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a flow chart of processing transition setting processing 1 during small winning fanfare of the first embodiment.

In the small-win fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1, first, "7", which is the process number relating to the small-win fanfare mid-process, is set as the process number (step A811), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area. (Step A812). Then, the small winning fanfare time (for example, 300 ms) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A813), and the signal regarding the start of the small winning is saved in the external information output data area (step A814). The signal relating to the start of the small win is, for example, a signal that turns on the 1 big win signal (outputs the big win + the small win).

Then, the signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step A815). The signal relating to the start of the small win is, for example, a signal that turns on the special symbol 1 small win signal.

Then, the information in the large winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step A816), and the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A817). Then, the signal relating to the instruction to hit to the right is saved in the test signal output data area (step A818). The signal related to the instruction to hit to the right is, for example, a signal that turns on firing position designation signal 1 .

Then, in order to turn on the right-handed display LED, the right-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A819), and the setting processing 1 for transition to processing during small win fanfare is completed.

[Fanfare/interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare/interval process (step A11) in the special game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fanfare/during-interval processing of the first embodiment.

In the fanfare/interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by "+1" (step A901), a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state is prepared (step A902), and effect command setting processing is performed. (Step A903) is performed.

After that, a large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A904), an open switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired (step A905), and the number of rounds in the special game state is the acquired open switching determination. It is determined whether or not it is greater than the value (step A906).

If the number of rounds is greater than the open switching determination value (step A906; Y), the opening time of the large winning opening for short opening (0.2 s in the case of the first embodiment) is set to the special game processing timer area. Save (step A907), perform processing transition setting processing during large winning opening opening (step A909) to open the large winning opening, and end fanfare/interval processing.

Also, if the number of rounds is not greater than the open switching judgment value (step A906; N), the opening time of the large winning opening for long opening (29 s in the case of the first embodiment) is set to the special game processing timer area. (step A908), the processing transition setting processing during the opening of the large winning opening (step A909) is performed to open the large winning opening, and the fanfare/interval processing ends.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the jackpot pattern, (1) 4R, big winning mouth opening information 1 (all short open), (2) 16R, big winning mouth opening information 2 (all long open), ( 3) 16R, big prize opening information 3 (1 to 4R long open, 5 to 16R short open), (4) 4R, big prize opening information 4 (all long open), (5) 16R, big prize Mouth open information 5 (all long open), (6) 16R, big winning mouth open information 6 (1 to 8R long open, 9 to 16R short open), (7) 16R, big winning mouth open information 7 (1 ~4R is long open, 5~16R is short open) is set.

Therefore, in the big winning gate operation determination table, the big winning gate opening information 1 data and the opening switching determination value "0" are stored, and the big winning gate opening information 2 data and the opening switching determination value "16" are stored. The opening information 3 data and the opening switching judgment value "4", the big winning opening opening information 4 data and the opening switching judgment value "4", the big winning opening opening information 5 data and the opening switching judgment value "16" , big winning opening opening information 6 data and opening switching judgment value "8", and big winning opening opening information 7 data and opening switching judgment value "4" are stored in association with each other. When the number of rounds is equal to or less than the open switching determination value, long opening is performed, and when the number of rounds exceeds the open switching determination value, short opening is performed.

[Processing transition setting processing during opening of the big winning gate]
Next, the details of the process transition setting process (step A909) during the opening of the big winning opening in the fanfare/interval process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the process transition setting process during the opening of the big winning opening of the first embodiment.

In the processing transition setting process during the opening of the big winning opening, first, "4", which is the processing number related to the processing during the opening of the big winning opening, is set as the processing number (step A911), and the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area. (step A912). After that, a signal relating to the opening start of the big winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A913). The signal relating to the start of opening the big winning opening is, for example, a signal that turns on the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 .

Next, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings to the large winning opening is cleared (step A914). Then, the ON data of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A915), and the processing transition setting processing during the opening of the large winning opening is completed.

[Processing during the opening of the big winning mouth]
Next, the details of the process during opening of the big winning opening (step A12) in the special game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the process during opening of the big winning opening of the first embodiment.

In the process during the opening of the big winning opening, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit area of RWM to determine whether or not the current round is the final round. is determined (step A1001).

If it is the final round (step A1001; Y), the remaining ball processing time for the final (for example, 1.9 s) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1008), and an ending command is prepared (step A1009), the process proceeds to step A1010, and the subsequent processes are performed.

If it is not the final round (step A1001; N), a large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1002), an open switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired (step A1003), and the number of rounds is It is determined whether or not the open switching determination value is exceeded (A1004).

When the number of rounds exceeds the open switching determination value (step A1004; Y), the remaining ball processing time for short closing (for example, 1.4 s) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1005). , an interval command is prepared (step A1007), the process proceeds to step A1010, and the subsequent processes are performed.

When the number of rounds does not exceed the open switching judgment value (step A1004; N), the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 s) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1006). , an interval command is prepared (step A1007), the process proceeds to step A1010, and the subsequent processes are performed.

After that, effect command setting processing (step A1010) is performed, large winning hole remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011) is performed, and processing during the large winning hole opening is completed.
[Large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the large winning hole remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A1011) in the above-described large winning hole open process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the big winning hole remaining ball process transition setting process of the first embodiment.

In the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process, first, "5", which is the processing number related to the large winning opening remaining ball processing, is set as the processing number (step A1021), and the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area. (step A1022). Then, the OFF data of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1023), and the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process is completed.

[Large prize mouth residual ball processing]
Next, the details of the large winning opening remaining ball processing (step A13) in the special game processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning hole remaining ball processing of the first embodiment.

In the big winning hole remaining ball processing, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit area of RWM to determine whether the current round is the final round. is determined (step A1101).

If it is the final round (step A1101; Y), the flag is loaded from the special game mode flag save area (step A1111), the loaded flag, the big winning opening information, the ending time corresponding to the stop pattern pattern ( For example, 1.9s) is set (step A1112). Then, the ending time is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1113), the jackpot end processing transition setting processing (step A1114) is performed, and the big winning opening remaining ball processing is completed.

If it is not the final round (step A1101; N), a large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1102), and an opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is obtained (step A1103). Then, a normal interval time (for example, 0.1 s) is set (step A1104), it is determined whether or not the number of rounds is greater than the open switching determination value (step A1105), and the number of rounds is greater than the open switching determination value. If so (step A1105; Y), the process proceeds to step A1109 and the subsequent processes are performed.

When the number of rounds is not greater than the opening switching value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening information is a value of the rank down production system (step A1106), and the large winning opening opening information is If the value is not a rank-down effect type value (step A1106; N), the process proceeds to step A1109 and the subsequent processes are performed.

If the big winning opening opening information is a rank down effect system value (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether the number of rounds is a special effect round value (for example, 2R, 4R, 8R) ( Step A1107), if the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A1107; N), the process proceeds to step A1109 and the subsequent processes are performed.

When the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (step A1107; Y), the interval time for the rank down effect (for example, 3.6 s) is set (step A1108), and the process proceeds to step A1109. , the subsequent processing is performed.

Then, the interval time is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1109), fanfare/in-interval processing transition setting processing 2 (step A1110) is performed, and the big winning hole remaining ball processing ends.

[Fanfare/In-interval process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the fanfare/interval process transition setting process 2 (step A1110) in the above-described large winning hole remaining ball process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fanfare/in-interval process transition setting process 2 according to the first embodiment.

In the fanfare/interval process transition setting process 2, first, "3", which is the process number related to the fanfare/interval process, is set as the process number (step A1121), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area. (Step A1122). Then, a signal relating to the end of opening the big winning hole (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1123). It should be noted that the signal relating to the end of the opening of the big winning opening is, for example, a signal that turns off the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 .

Then, the fanfare/in-interval process transition setting process 2 ends.
[Jackpot end processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot ending process transition setting process (step A1114) in the above-described big winning hole remaining ball process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot ending process transition setting process of the first embodiment.

In the jackpot end processing transition setting processing, first, "6", which is the processing number related to the jackpot end processing, is set as the processing number (step A1131), and the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area (step A1132).

Then, a signal relating to the end of opening the big winning hole (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1133). It should be noted that the signal relating to the end of the opening of the big winning opening is, for example, a signal that turns off the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 .

Next, the information in the big winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings to the big winning opening is cleared (step A1134), and the information in the round number area for storing the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step A1135). . Then, the information of the round number upper limit area storing the upper limit of the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step A1136), and the information of the round number upper limit information area storing the flag for determining the upper limit of the number of rounds is cleared. Clear (step A1137). Then, the information in the big winning opening opening information area for storing the flag for determining the opening information of the big winning opening is cleared (step A1138), and the big winning end transition setting process is finished.

[Jackpot end processing]
Next, details of the jackpot ending process (step A14) in the special game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a flowchart of jackpot end processing of the first embodiment.

In this jackpot end processing, first, it is determined whether or not the time reduction determination data is the time reduction operation data (step A1201). When it is not time saving operation data (step A1201; N), big hit end setting processing 1 (step A1202) is performed, and when it is time saving operation data (step A1201; Y), big hit end setting processing 2 (step A1203) is performed. .

Then, the effect mode information address table is set (step A1204), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the time of start of fluctuation (at the time of setting the stop symbol) is acquired (step A1205).

Next, as a process of saving information necessary for management of the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area. (step A1206). Furthermore, the production remaining rotation number of the production mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired, saved in the production remaining rotation number area (step A1207), and the next mode of the production mode set after the special game state is completed. The transition information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A1208).

After that, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1209), the command is saved in the command area for power failure restoration (step A1210), and effect command setting processing (step A1211) is performed.

In addition, as the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands in which the information of the production mode is included in either "with high probability/time saving" or "high probability/no time saving". In the case of the first embodiment, when the jackpot ends, it will always be in a variable state (so-called ST state). Mode B", "high probability, time saving, production mode C", "high probability, no time saving, production mode A", which are not used in this process, but also "low probability, no time saving, production mode A ”, “low probability, no time saving, production mode B”, and “low probability, no time saving, production mode C”.

Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed is prepared (step A1212), and effect command setting processing (step A1213) is performed.
Next, prepare a high probability variation count command corresponding to the high probability variation count (step A1214), perform the effect command setting process (step A1215), and determine whether or not a time saving state occurs after the end of the big hit (step A1216).

When the time-saving state occurs after the end of the big hit (step A1216; Y), the special figure normal processing transition setting process 2 (step A1219) is performed, and the end of the big hit ends.
Also, if the time saving state does not occur after the end of the big hit (step A1216; N), prepare a left-handed instruction notification command (step A1217), perform the production command setting process (step A1218), and then move to the special figure normal process Setting processing 2 (step A1219) is performed, and the jackpot end processing is terminated.

[Jackpot end setting process 1]
Next, details of the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A1202) in the jackpot end process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot end setting process 1 of the first embodiment.

In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal related to no time saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step A1221). The signal related to no time saving state is, for example, a signal that turns off the jackpot 2 signal.

Next, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and no time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1222). In addition, the signal regarding the start of the high probability state and no time saving state is, for example, a signal to turn on the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal to turn on the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a special symbol 1 fluctuation time It includes a signal to turn off the shortened state signal, a signal to turn off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and a signal to turn off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal.

Next, save the number without time saving state in the gaming state display number area (step A1223), save the general figure low probability flag in the general figure game mode flag area (step A1224), to the special figure game mode flag area To save the special figure high probability & no time saving flag (step A1225). After that, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high-probability variation count area (step A1226), and the signal regarding the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1227). It should be noted that the signal relating to the instruction to hit left is, for example, a signal that turns off firing position designation signal 1 .

Next, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the left-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A1228), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is finished.
[Jackpot end setting process 2]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A1203) in the jackpot end process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot end setting process 2 of the first embodiment.

In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal regarding the start of the time saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step A1231). The signal regarding the start of the time saving state is, for example, a signal that turns on the jackpot 2 signal. Since the signal regarding the start of the time-saving state is output from the jackpot, it is continuously saved in the external information output data area.

Next, the signals relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state are saved in the test signal output data area (step A1232). Signals related to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state are, for example, a signal to turn on the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal to turn on the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal , a signal to turn on the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and a signal to turn on the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal.

Next, save the number with a time saving state in the game state display number area (step A1233), save the general figure high probability flag in the general figure game mode flag area (step A1234), and save it in the special figure game mode flag area There is a special figure high probability & time saving flag is saved (step A1235). After that, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high-probability fluctuation count area (step A1236), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended. In the case of the first embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the time-saving state, but since the right-handed mode is set during the big win, the right-handed hitting is not set in the big win end setting process 2.

[Special figure normal processing transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step A1219) in the above-described jackpot end process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure normal processing transition setting process 2, first, "0" which is the processing number related to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A1241), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1242).

After that, a signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step A1243). The signals relating to the end of the jackpot include, for example, a signal to turn off the jackpot 1 signal, a signal to turn off the jackpot 3 signal, and a signal to turn off the jackpot 4 signal.

Next, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1244). Signals relating to the end of the jackpot are a signal to turn off the conditional device operating signal, a signal to turn off the character continuous operating device operating signal, a signal to turn off the special pattern 1 hit signal, and a special pattern 2 hit signal. Contains a signal to turn off the signal.

Subsequently, the information in the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A1245), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A1246), and the information in the presentation mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A1247). Then, clear the information in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1248), save the fraud monitoring period flag in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1249), special figure normal processing transition setting processing 2 exit.

[Processing during small win fanfare]
Next, the details of the process during small winning fanfare (step A15) in the special game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing during the small winning fanfare of the first embodiment.

In the small-hit fanfare mid-process, a small-hit mid-process transition setting process (step A1301) is performed, and the small-hit fanfare mid-process is completed.
[Small hit middle process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the process shift setting process (step A1301) during the small hit in the process during the small hit fanfare described above will be described with reference to FIG. Drawing 63 is a figure showing the flow chart of processing shift setting processing during a small hit of a 1st embodiment.

In the small hit middle process transition setting process, first, "8", which is the process number related to the small hit middle process, is set as the process number (step A1311), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1312 ).

Then, the small hit opening time (for example, 0.2s) is set in the special game processing timer area (step A1313), and the signal regarding the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1314). The signal regarding the start of the small hit operation is, for example, a signal that turns on the special electric accessory 1 operating signal.

Then, save the ON data of the big winning opening (special variable winning device 38) in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1315), and save the information of the big winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings to the big winning opening. Clear (step A1316).

Then, the small hit operation initial value (for example, "0") is saved in the small hit middle control pointer area (step A1317), and the small hit middle process transition setting process is terminated.
[Small hit middle processing]
Next, the details of the small hit middle process (step A16) in the special game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. Drawing 64 is a figure showing a flow chart of processing during a small hit of a 1st embodiment.

In the small hit middle processing, first, the small hit middle control pointer is loaded from the small hit middle control pointer area (step A1401), and the value of the loaded small hit middle control pointer is the small hit operation end value (for example, "6"). It is determined whether or not the above is satisfied (step A1402).

When the value of the loaded small hit control pointer is not equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; N), the value of the small hit medium control pointer in the small hit medium control pointer area is updated by "+1" (step A1403 ), the small hit operation transition setting process (step A1404) is performed, and the process during the small hit ends. If the value of the loaded small hit control pointer is greater than or equal to the small hit operation end value (step A1402; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1405), and the loaded flag is special. It is determined whether or not the probability is high (step A1406). In addition, determination in step A1406 makes a probability state into determination object, and does not make working hours reduction state into determination object.

When the loaded flag is in the special figure high probability (step A1406; Y), it moves to the processing of step A1409 and performs the subsequent processing. If the loaded flag is not in the special figure high probability (step A1406; N), prepare a command for the small hit end screen (step A1407), and perform effect command setting processing (step A1408). Then, a small hit remaining ball processing shift setting process (step 1409) is performed, and the small hit middle process is terminated.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, details of the small-hit operation shift setting process (step A1404) in the above-described small-hit middle process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a small hit operation transition setting process of the first embodiment.

In the small hit operation transition setting process, first, the value of the control pointer during the small hit loaded at step A1401 is determined (step A1411). If the value of the control pointer during the small hit loaded in step A1401 is "0", "2", "4" (step A1411; pointer = 0, 2, 4), the value of the control pointer during the small hit The corresponding wait time (1500 ms) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1412). Then, the OFF data of the big winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1413), and the small winning operation transition setting process is terminated.

If the value of the control pointer during the small hit loaded in step A1401 is "1", "3", "5" (step A1411; pointer = 1, 3, 5), the value of the control pointer during the small hit The opening time (200 ms) of the corresponding big winning opening is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1414). Then, the ON data of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1415), and the small winning operation transition setting process is terminated.

Here, the small hit operation will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a timing chart of the small hit operation of the first embodiment. The numbers inside the squares in the drawing indicate the values of the control pointers.

The small winning operation is a small winning fanfare time (300 ms), a large winning opening opening time (200 ms), a waiting time (1500 ms), a large winning opening opening time (200 ms), and a waiting time. time (1500 ms), then the opening time of the big winning opening (200 ms), the waiting time after that (1500 ms), the opening time of the big winning opening (200 ms), and the remaining ball processing time (1900 ms) after that, It is a series of operations of a total of 7600ms consisting of a small hit ending time (100ms).

In the case of a small winning operation, the value of the control pointer becomes "0" after the first time the big winning opening is opened, and the value of the control pointer changes from "0" to "5". The value of the control pointer becomes "6". In this way, in the case of the small winning operation, the small winning remaining ball processing is performed after the opening operation of the special variable winning device 38 is performed four times. In the small hit operation, by setting the small hit ending time after the remaining ball processing time, the apparent ending time is 2000 ms, which is obtained by adding the remaining ball processing time of 1900 ms to the small winning ending time of 100 ms for control.

During the small winning fanfare time, the waiting time, the remaining ball processing time, and the small winning ending time, the special variable winning device 38 is closed by the OFF control of the big winning opening solenoid 38b. Also, during the large winning opening opening time, the special variable winning device 38 is opened by ON control of the large winning opening solenoid 38b.

[Small hit remaining ball processing transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small-hit remaining ball processing shift setting process (step A1409) in the above-described small-hit middle processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a flow chart of a small hit remaining ball process transition setting process of the first embodiment.

In the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting process, first, "9", which is the processing number related to the small hit remaining ball processing, is set as the processing number (step A1421), and the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area ( Step A1422).

Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 s) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1423), and the big winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is turned off in the big winning opening solenoid output data area. The data is saved (step A1424), and the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing is terminated.

[Small hit remaining ball processing]
Next, details of the small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) in the special game processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a flowchart of small hit remaining ball processing of the first embodiment.

In the small hit remaining ball processing, a small hit end processing shift setting process (step A1501) is performed, and the small hitting remaining ball processing ends.
[Small hit end process transition setting process]
Next, details of the small-hit end processing shift setting process (step A1501) in the above-described small-hit remaining ball processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a flow chart of a small hit end process transition setting process of the first embodiment.

In the small hit end processing transition setting processing, first, "10", which is the processing number related to the small hit end processing, is set as the processing number (step A1511), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1512 ).

Then, the small winning ending time (for example, 0.1 s) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1513), and the signal regarding the end of the small hitting operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1514). In addition, the signal regarding the end of the small hit operation is, for example, a signal that turns off the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 .

Then, clear the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening (step A1515), clear the information in the small winning medium control pointer area to zero (step A1516), and perform small winning end transition setting processing. exit.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the small hit end process (step A18) in the special game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a flow chart of small hit end processing of the first embodiment.

In the small hit end process, first, the flag related to the probability state is loaded from the special game mode flag saving area (step A1601), and it is determined whether the flag loaded in step A1601 is in the special figure high probability (step A1602). If the flag loaded in step A1601 is in the special figure high probability (step A1602; Y), it moves to the processing of step A1619 and performs the subsequent processing.

If the flag loaded in step A1601 is not in the special figure high probability (step A1602; N), the effect mode information address table is set (step A1603), and the effect set at the time of start of fluctuation (at the time of setting the stop pattern) The address of the table corresponding to the mode transition information is acquired (step A1604).

Then, the effect mode number is obtained and saved in the effect mode number area (step A1605), the effect remaining rotation speed is obtained and saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A1606), and the next mode transition information is obtained. Save in the next mode transition information area (step A1607).

Then, prepare the probability information command corresponding to the production mode number obtained in step A1606 (step A1608), determine whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609) .

If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619 and the subsequent processes are performed. If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609; N), the probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1610), and the effect command setting process (step A1611) is performed.

Then, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed acquired in step A1606 is prepared (step A1612), and effect command setting processing (step A1613) is performed. In addition, a high probability variation count command corresponding to the high probability variation count is prepared (step A1614), effect command setting processing (step A1615) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the new effect mode is a left-handed mode. (Step A1616).

When the new effect mode is not the left-handed mode (step A1616; N), the process proceeds to step A1619. When the new production mode is the left-handed mode (step A1616; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A1617), and production command setting processing (step A1618) is performed.

Then, load the flag related to the time saving state from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1619), and determine whether the flag loaded in step A1619 is during the special figure time saving (step A1620). When the flag loaded at step A1619 is during special figure time saving (step A1620; Y), special figure normal processing transition setting processing 3 (step A1623) is performed, and small hit end processing is terminated.

If the flag loaded in step A1619 is not in the special figure time saving (step A1620; N), the signal regarding the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1621). It should be noted that the signal relating to the instruction to hit left is, for example, a signal that turns off firing position designation signal 1 .

Then, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, save the number in the left-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (step A1622), perform special figure normal processing transition setting processing 3 (step A1623), End the winning end process.

[Special figure normal process transition setting process 3]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process shift setting process 3 (step A1623) in the small hit end process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure normal processing transition setting process 3, first, "0" which is the processing number related to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A1631), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1632).

Then, the signal regarding the end of the small win is saved in the external information output data area (step A1633), and the signal regarding the end of the small win is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1634). The signal regarding the end of the small win is, for example, a signal that turns off the big win 1 signal. Further, the signal relating to the end of the small win is, for example, a signal that turns off the one special symbol small win signal.

Then, the information in the fluctuating design determination flag area is cleared (step A1635), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1636). Then, clear the information in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1637), save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1638), and perform the special figure normal processing transition setting process 3 finish.

[Production command setting process]
Next, details of the effect command setting process in the subroutine of the special game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a flow chart of effect command setting processing according to the first embodiment.

In the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A1701), and it is determined whether or not the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1702). If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1702; Y), the process returns to step A1701. If the performance serial transmission buffer is not full (step A1702; N), the command data (MODE) is written in the performance serial transmission buffer (step A1703).

As a result, the effect command (MODE) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100 . In the case of this flowchart, the commands are transmitted in a two-byte configuration such as "MODE" and "ACTION" like the production commands, but they may be transmitted in a more byte configuration. In those cases, the flow chart should correspond to the multi-byte configuration.

Then, the status of the performance serial transmission buffer is read (step A1704), and it is determined whether or not the performance serial transmission buffer is full (step A1705).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1705; Y), the process returns to step A1704. If the performance serial transmission buffer is not full (step A1705; N), the command data (ACTION) is written in the performance serial transmission buffer (step A1706), and the performance command setting process is terminated.

By writing the command data (ACTION) in the effect serial transmission buffer, the effect command (ACTION) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100. will be

Thus, an effect command (MODE) and an effect command (ACTION) are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication. The effect control device 300 receives these commands and controls the effect on the screen of the display device 41 or the like. Since serial communication is performed using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100, there is an advantage that the configuration is simple.

[Symbol variation control process]
Next, the details of the symbol variation control process (step A22) in the special game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a flowchart of symbol variation control processing of the first embodiment.

In the symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether the target variation control flag is set and the symbol is varying (step A1801). .

If it is in fluctuation (step A1802; Y), the symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the target symbol is acquired (step A1803). Then, the flashing control timer for measuring the fluctuation time of the target pattern is updated by "-1" (step A1804), and it is determined whether or not the flashing control timer is "0" (step A1805).

If the flashing control timer is "0" (step A1805; Y), the flashing control timer initial value corresponding to the target pattern and state is acquired (step A1806), and the flashing control timer initial value is set to the target pattern. Save in the flashing control timer area (step A1807). The flashing control timer initial value will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, the variable pattern number of the target pattern is updated by "+1" (step A1808), and the process proceeds to step A1809. If the flashing control timer is not "0" (step A1805; N), the process proceeds to step A1809.

Then, the display data corresponding to the value of the variable pattern number area of the target symbol is acquired (step A1809), the acquired display data is saved in the segment area of the target symbol (step A1812), and the symbol variation control process is terminated. do.

At step A1802, if it is not fluctuating (step A1802; N), the symbol display table (for stoppage) corresponding to the target symbol is acquired (step A1810). Then, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area of the target symbol is acquired (step A1811), the acquired display data is saved in the segment area of the target symbol (step A1812), and the symbol variation control process is terminated. do.

In addition, on the variation control table prepared in the special game process, the information of the lower address of the variation control area, the address of the display table 2 (for stop) and the address of the display table 1 (for variation) is defined. there is

[Flashing control timer initial value table]
Next, the details of the flashing control timer initial value (step A1806) acquired in the symbol variation control process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is an example of the flashing control timer initial value table of the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows.

Flashing control timer initial value is set for each of the target pattern (special figure 1, special figure 2, general figure) and its state (state 1, state 2).
Flashing control timer initial value is 80 ms when special figure 1 is state 1, and 60 ms when special figure 1 is state 2. In addition, the flashing control timer initial value is 80 ms when Special Figure 2 is in state 1, and is 60 ms when Special Figure 2 is in state 2. In addition, the blinking control timer initial value is 160 ms when the normal map is in state 1, and is 120 ms when the normal map is in state 2.

Note that the blink control timer initial value is smaller in state 2 than in state 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. The flashing control timer initial value may be larger in state 2 than in state 1 . For example, the flashing control timer initial value is 60 ms when Special Figure 1 is in state 1, 80 ms when Special Figure 1 is in state 2, and 60 ms when Special Figure 2 is in state 1. , It may be 80 ms when the special figure 2 is in state 2, 120 ms when the general figure is in state 1, and 160 ms when the general figure is in state 2.

The state 2 is a game state more advantageous to the player than the state 1, and a specific game state can be set for each gaming machine. For example, the gaming machine of the first embodiment corresponds to state 1 when special figure 1 or special figure 2 is not in the probability fluctuation state, and when special figure 1 or special figure 2 is in the probability fluctuation state, it is in state 2 Equivalent to.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can play the game of the gaming machine 10 with the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the general symbol display unit 55 in addition to the state display unit 57 in the collective display device 50. Status can be displayed.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 can display the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 with a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, a special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and a normal figure symbol display unit 55 instead of the state display unit 57 in the collective display device 50. can also be displayed. For example, the gaming machine 10 performs the first state display in the first period in the state display section 57, performs the second state display in the state display section 57 in the subsequent second period, and displays the special figure 1 symbol. The first state display can be performed by the part 53, the special figure 2 symbol display part 54, and the normal figure symbol display part 55. More specifically, the gaming machine 10 notifies the game state transition (trigger notification) in the state display unit 57 when the game state transitions from the normal state to the probability variation state or the like. In addition, the game machine 10 is in the game state in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the general symbol display unit 55 when the game state such as the normal state or the probability fluctuation state is the steady state. is in a steady state (regular notification). In addition, the gaming machine 10 does not necessarily need to notify the game state with the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53, the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54, and the normal figure symbol display portion 55. The game machine 10 may notify the game state by one or two of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the general figure symbol display unit 55. In addition, the game machine 10 may notify a more complicated game state by combining the display modes of the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53, the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54, and the general figure symbol display portion 55. . Furthermore, the game machine 10 notifies a more complicated game state by combining the display modes of the state display portion 57, the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53, the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54, and the normal symbol display portion 55. may be Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can notify the progress of the game that is easy for the player to understand.

[Distribution process]
Next, the details of the sorting process (steps A476, A479, A485) in the fluctuation pattern setting process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a flowchart of distribution processing according to the first embodiment.

In the sorting process, the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game is selected from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1, and the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) is selected based on the variation pattern random number 2. Processing for selecting the second half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game, or selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation selection table (first half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 3 is.

In the sorting process, first, the data at the top of the prepared second half fluctuation group table (selection table), second half fluctuation selection table (selection table), and first half fluctuation selection table (selection table) is a no-sort code (that is, "0"). ) (step A1901), and as a result of the check, it is determined whether or not the leading data is a code without sorting (step A1902). Here, the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table store predetermined distribution values in association with at least one second half fluctuation pattern group, second half fluctuation pattern, and first half fluctuation pattern. In the case of a selection table that does not require a sorting value "0", that is, a code for no sorting is specified at the head.

Then, if the leading data of the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, or the first half fluctuation selection table is a code without sorting (step A1902; Y), update to the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result ( Step A1907), the sorting process ends. On the other hand, if the top data of the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, or the first half fluctuation selection table is not a code without sorting (step A1902; N), the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, or the first half fluctuation selection table First, one prescribed distribution value is obtained (step A1903).

Subsequently, the distribution value obtained in step A1903 from the random values (values of fluctuation pattern random number 1, fluctuation pattern random number 2, and fluctuation pattern random number 3) loaded in steps A473, A478, and A484 of the fluctuation pattern setting process After calculating a new random number value by subtraction (step A1904), it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A1905). If the new random number is not smaller than "0" (step A1905; N), the address of the next sorting value is updated (step A1906), and the process returns to step A1903.

That is, in step A1903, after acquiring the sorting value specified next in the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table, in step A1905, the determined random value is used as a new random value. The distribution value is subtracted, and a new random number is calculated (step A1904). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A1905). The above processing is performed until it is determined in step A1905 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A1905; Y). As a result, at least one of the second half fluctuation selection table, the second half fluctuation pattern, and the first half fluctuation pattern specified in the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table, or the second half fluctuation selection table or the second half Select a variable number or a first half variable number. If it is determined in step A1905 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (step A1905; Y), the data address corresponding to the sorting result is updated (step A1907), and the sorting process ends. do.

[2-byte distribution processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte allocation process (step A475) in the variation pattern setting process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a flowchart of 2-byte allocation processing according to the first embodiment.

The 2-byte allocation process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1. As shown in FIG. 76, in the 2-byte distribution process, first, whether the leading data of the second half fluctuation group table (selection table) prepared in the fluctuation pattern setting process is a code without distribution (that is, "0") is checked (step A2001), and as a result of the check, it is determined whether or not the leading data is a code without sorting (step A2002). Here, the second half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation pattern group, but the second half that defines only the second half fluctuation pattern group in which the second half fluctuation pattern is "no reach" Since there is no need for sorting in the variation group table (for example, some variation group tables when the result is lost), the sorting value "0", that is, the code for no sorting is specified at the top. .

If the data at the top of the second half variation group table is a code without sorting (step A2002; Y), the data address corresponding to the sorting result is updated (step A2007), and the 2-byte sorting process ends. do. On the other hand, if the top data in the second half fluctuation group table is not a code without sorting (step A2002; N), one sorting value first specified in the second half fluctuation group table is obtained (step A2003).

Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the sorting value obtained in step A2003 from the random value (value of variation pattern random number 1) loaded in step A473 of the variation pattern setting process (step A2004). , whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2005). If the new random number is not smaller than "0" (step A2005; N), the address of the next sorting value is updated (step A2006), and the process returns to step A2003. That is, in step A2003, after acquiring the distribution value specified next in the variation group selection table, in step A2005, the determined random value is used as a new random value, and the distribution value is subtracted. A numerical value is calculated (step A2004). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2005).

The above processing is performed until it is determined in step A2005 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2005; Y). As a result, any one second half variation selection table is selected from at least one second half variation selection table defined in the second half variation group table. Then, if it is determined in step A2005 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (step A2005; Y), the data address corresponding to the sorting result is updated (step A2007), and 2-byte sorting processing is performed. exit.

[General map game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game process (step S130) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the general-purpose game process of the first embodiment. In the general-purpose game processing, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the overall processing related to the general-purpose variation display game is controlled, and the display of the general-purpose pattern is set.

In this normal game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and a normal electric winning prize switch monitoring process (step B2) for monitoring an input from the start port 2 switch 37a. do Next, if the general pattern game processing timer is not "0", it is updated by "-1" (step B3). In addition, the minimum value of the general-purpose game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the general-purpose game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

When the value of the normal game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has expired or has already timed up, the processing corresponding to the normal game processing number is branched. Perform processing (step B5) to set the general-purpose game sequence branch table to be referenced in the register, and perform processing (step B6) to acquire the branch destination address of the processing corresponding to the general-purpose game processing number using the table. . Then, a subroutine call (step B7) is performed by the game process number.

At step B7, if the game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the normal pattern variation display game is monitored, the start of variation of the normal pattern variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the processing during normal pattern variation are performed. Normal figure normal processing (step B8) for setting necessary information etc. is performed. In step B7, if the game processing number is "1", a normal pattern change process (step B9) is performed to set information necessary for performing the normal pattern display process.

Further, in step B7, if the game processing number is "2", if the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a hit, the normal electric power opening time is set according to whether or not the time saving state is in effect. A general pattern display process (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the process during the drawing hit is performed. Further, in step B7, if the game processing number is "3", the normal game winning process (step B11) is performed.

In step B7, if the game processing number is "4", a normal electric remaining ball process (step B12) is performed to set information necessary for performing a normal game winning end process. Also, in step B7, if the game processing number is "5", a normal game per end process (step B13) for setting information necessary for performing the normal game process (step B8) is performed.

After that, prepare a normal pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the normal pattern fluctuation by the normal pattern display device (step B14), and design fluctuation control processing related to the control of the normal pattern fluctuation by the general pattern display device (step B15) is performed, and the general-purpose game processing ends. On the other hand, at step B4, if the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is not 0 (step B4; N), that is, if it is determined that the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step B14 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described normal game process will be described. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a flowchart of gate switch monitoring processing according to the first embodiment. In this gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). Then, if there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether or not the game state is for hitting to the right (step B102). Here, the right-handed gaming state is during a big hit, during a small hit, or during a special time reduction (during general electric support). If the game state is to hit to the right (step B102; Y), the process proceeds to step B105. If it is not a game state to hit right (step B102; N), prepare a left hitting instruction command (step B103), perform production command setting processing (step B104), acquire the normal pattern reservation number and obtain the normal pattern reservation number is less than the upper limit (for example, "4") (step B105).

If the number of reserved general patterns is less than the upper limit (step B105; Y), the number of reserved general patterns is updated by "+1" (step B106), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved normal patterns after the update. Calculate (step B107). Then, the winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (step B108), the winning design random number is extracted and saved in the winning design random number storage area (step B109), and the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

Also, if it is determined that there is no input to the gate switch 34a at step B101 (step B101; N), or if it is determined that the number of normal pattern reservations is not less than the upper limit at step B105 (step B105; N) , the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[General electric winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the normal electric winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above normal game process will be described. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a flow chart of general electric winning switch monitoring processing of the first embodiment. In this normal electrical winning switch monitoring process, first, whether or not the normal pattern winning is in progress, that is, whether or not the normal variable winning prize device 37 is executing a predetermined number of opening operations when the normal pattern variation display game is in a winning state. is determined (step B111). Then, when the normal game is in progress (step B111; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B112), and it is determined that there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B112; Y). If determined, the count number of the general electric counter is updated by "+1" (step B113).

Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the general electric counter after updating has reached the upper limit value (for example, "6") (step B114), and if the count number has reached the upper limit value (step B114; Y) If it is determined, based on the count number of the general electricity counter reaching the upper limit, as a process for closing the general electricity, save the value (for example, "4") of hitting operation end in the control pointer area during the general pattern hit ( Step B115), the general-purpose game processing timer is cleared to zero (step B116), and the general-purpose electric winning switch monitoring processing is terminated. In other words, if there is a general electric winning prize of more than the upper limit value during the normal state, save the value of the end of the hit in the normal state during the processing control pointer area at that time, and the normal state is in the middle let it finish.

Also, if it is determined in step B111 that the normal game is not in progress (step B111; N), if it is determined in step B112 that there is no input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B112; N) or step B114. If it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit value (step B114; N), this general electric prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose normal processing (step B8) in the above-described general-purpose game processing will be described. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the normal pattern normal processing of the first embodiment. In this general pattern normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the general pattern reservation number is "0" (step B121), and if the general pattern reservation number is "0" (step B121; Y), The figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B141) is performed, and the normal figure normal process ends. Also, when the normal pattern reservation number is not "0" (step B121; N), the random number is loaded from the winning random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) and the winning pattern random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) (step B122) , the winning random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) and the winning design random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) are cleared to zero (step B123).

Next, it is determined whether the normal pattern high probability that the probability of winning results in the normal pattern variation display game is higher than usual, that is, whether it is a time saving state (step B124). If not in the normal pattern high probability (step B124; N), set the low probability lower limit judgment value (step B125), if in the normal pattern high probability (step B124; Y), the high probability lower limit decision value Set (step B126). Note that the low-probability upper limit judgment value and the high-probability upper limit judgment value are a common value (for example, "251"). In addition, the low-probability lower limit judgment value and the high-probability lower-limit judgment value are different values (for example, the low-probability lower-limit judgment value is “251” and the high-probability lower-limit judgment value is “1”). By comparison, the high probability lower limit judgment value is a small value. As a result, the hit probability is greater at high probability than at low probability, for example, 0/251 at low probability and 250/251 at high probability.

Next, it is determined whether or not the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit judgment value (step B127). (step B128). In step B127, if the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit judgment value (step B127; Y) or in steps B127 and B128, if the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step B127; N, step B128; Y), In the case of a loss, save the loss information in the winning flag area (step B129), set the losing stop pattern number (step B130), and save the losing pattern information in the normal pattern stop pattern information area (step B131). Also, in steps B127 and B128, if the hit random number is less than the upper limit judgment value and equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, that is, in the case of a hit (step B127; N, step B128; N), the win information is saved in the hit flag area ( Step B132), a winning stop pattern number corresponding to the loaded winning pattern random number is set (step B133), and stop design information corresponding to the stop design number is saved in the general pattern stop design information area (step B134). In addition, in the first embodiment, there are three types of winning symbols.

Next, the stop design number is saved in the normal design stop design area (step B135), and the stop design number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B136). After that, shift the random number storage area per general pattern (step B137), clear the empty area after the shift to zero (step B138), and update the general pattern reservation number by "-1" (step B139). That is, with the execution of the normal pattern fluctuation display game related to the oldest normal pattern reservation number 1, the order of the normal pattern reservation numbers "2" to "4" that are reserved after the normal pattern reservation number "1" is incremented one by one. By this process, the values for the general pattern holding number 2 to the general pattern holding number 4 in the general pattern random number storage area are moved from the general pattern holding number 1 to the general pattern holding number 3 in the general pattern random number storage area. It will be done. Then, the value for the general pattern reservation number 4 in the general pattern per random number storage area is cleared, and the general pattern reservation number is decremented by "1".

Then, the process shift setting process (step B140) during normal pattern fluctuation is performed, and this normal pattern normal process is terminated.
[General figure normal process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the normal pattern normal process transition setting process 1 (step B141) in the normal normal pattern process described above will be described. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a flow chart of normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 of the first embodiment. In this general pattern normal processing transition setting process 1, first, "0" is set as a processing number for transitioning to general pattern normal processing (step B151), and the processing number is saved in the general pattern game processing number area (step B151). B152). After that, the during fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the general electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B153), and the normal diagram normal process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Normal figure fluctuation process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the processing shift setting process (step B140) during normal pattern fluctuation in the normal pattern normal processing described above will be described. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process shift setting process during normal figure fluctuation in the first embodiment. In this normal pattern fluctuation process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the processing number for transitioning to the normal pattern fluctuation process (step B161), and the processing number is saved in the normal pattern game processing number area ( Step B162), the general pattern fluctuation time (common to low probability and high probability (for example, 500 ms)) is saved in the general pattern game processing timer area (step B163). Thereafter, a signal relating to the start of the normal pattern variation display game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B164). In addition, the signal regarding the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a signal for turning on the signal during normal pattern 1 fluctuation.

Next, a variable flag indicating that the normal pattern fluctuation display game is in the process of being changed is saved in the normal pattern fluctuation control flag area (step B165). Then, save the flashing control timer initial value (for example, 100 ms), which is the initial value of the timer for the flashing period of the normal pattern display, in the normal pattern flashing control timer area (step B166), and perform the normal pattern fluctuation process transition setting process. finish.

[Normal map fluctuation process]
Next, the processing during normal pattern fluctuation (step B9) in the normal pattern game processing described above will be described. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing during normal pattern fluctuation in the first embodiment. In this normal pattern fluctuation process, a normal pattern display process transition setting process (step B171) is performed, and the normal pattern fluctuation process is terminated.

[Processing setting process during normal map display]
Next, the details of the process shift setting process (step B171) during normal diagram display in the above normal diagram fluctuation process will be described. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the process transition setting process during normal diagram display according to the first embodiment. In this process transition setting process during normal map display, first, the process number is set to "2" as a setting process for shifting to the process during normal map display (step B181), and the process number is set in the normal game process number area. Save (step B182). After that, the general pattern display time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the general pattern game processing timer area (step B183). Furthermore, the signal regarding the end of fluctuation of the normal pattern is saved in the test signal output data area (step B184). In addition, the signal regarding the end of fluctuation of the normal pattern is a signal that turns off the signal during normal pattern 1 fluctuation.

Next, a stop flag indicating that the normal pattern fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the normal pattern fluctuation control flag area (step B185), and the process transition setting process during normal pattern display is completed.
[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the general-purpose map displaying process (step B10) in the above-described general-purpose map game processing will be described. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a flow chart of processing during normal map display according to the first embodiment. In this general pattern display process, first, the hit flag (hit information or loss information) set in the normal pattern normal process is loaded (step B191), and the information in the RWM hit flag area is cleared (step B192 ), it is determined whether or not the loaded winning flag is winning information (step B193).

If the hit flag is not hit information (step B193; N), the normal pattern normal processing transition setting processing 1 (step B198) for shifting to the normal pattern normal processing is performed, and the normal pattern displaying process is terminated. This normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 is the process shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the hit flag is the hit information (step B193; Y), a process setting table during the hit is set (step B194).

Then, the hit start pointer value (control pointer "0", "2", "4") corresponding to the normal pattern stop symbol information is acquired, and saved in the normal pattern per middle control pointer area (step B195), The general electric open time (500 ms or 1700 ms) corresponding to the general pattern stop symbol information is obtained and saved in the general pattern game processing timer area (step B196). As a result, the mode of opening the normal variable prize winning device 37 in the time saving state is set, and it is possible to open it four times, for example. After that, per normal pattern middle processing shift setting processing (step B197) is performed, and processing during normal pattern display is completed.

[Regular figure per middle process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the process transition setting process (step B197) during the normal figure hit in the process during the normal figure display described above will be described. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing transition setting processing during normal per figure of the first embodiment. In this general pattern per middle process transition setting process, first, "3" is set as a processing number for transitioning to the general pattern per middle process (step B201), and the processing number is saved in the general pattern game processing number area. (Step B202). Thereafter, a signal relating to the start of winning in the normal pattern variation display game (a signal relating to winning in the normal pattern variation display game) and a signal relating to the start of normal electric operation are saved in the test signal output data area (step B203). It should be noted that the signal relating to the start of winning in the normal pattern variation display game is a signal that turns on the normal symbol 1 winning signal, and the signal relating to the normal operation start is a signal that turns on the signal during normal electric accessory 1 operation. is.

Next, in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the common solenoid, ON data is saved in the common solenoid output data area (step B204).
Furthermore, the information in the electric count area for storing the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B205), and the electric fraud to store the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 during the electric power fraud monitoring period The information in the winning number area is cleared (step B206). Then, the flag that defines the non-fraud monitoring period of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is saved in the general/electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B207), and the process transition setting process for the normal per figure is completed.

[Medium processing per normal figure]
Next, the details of the processing (step B11) during the normal pattern hit in the normal pattern game processing described above will be described. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing during normal per pattern according to the first embodiment. In this general pattern per middle process, first, the normal pattern per middle control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B211), and the value of the normal pattern per middle control pointer is the value of the normal pattern per middle control pointer upper limit value area. It is determined whether or not (the value of the end of the hit) has been reached (step B212).

Then, when the value of the control pointer during the normal per pattern has not reached the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal per pattern (step B212; N), the control pointer during the normal per pattern is updated by "+1" (step B213). , Normal electric operation transition setting processing (step B214) is performed, and the processing during the normal pattern hit ends. In addition, when the value of the control pointer in the normal pattern hit reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area in the normal pattern hit (the value of the end of the hit) (step B212; Y), step B213 is passed and the normal electric operation transition setting The process (step B214) is performed, and the process during the general pattern is terminated.

[General electric operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the general electric operation transition setting process (step B214) in the above-described general pattern per middle process will be described. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal electric operation transition setting processing according to the first embodiment. This general electric operation transition setting process is a process for controlling the driving of the general electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 37, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer. In this general electric operation transition setting process, first, a branch process is performed according to the value of the control pointer (step B221).

If the value of the control pointer is either "0" or "2", the process proceeds to step B222. That is, in order to control the closing of the normal variable winning device 37, the wait time (for example, 200 ms) after blocking of the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B222), In order to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c, the OFF data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B223), and the general electric operation transition setting process is terminated.

If the value of the control pointer is either "1" or "3", the process proceeds to step B224. That is, in order to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, the normal variable winning device 37 opening time (for example, 1700 ms), which is the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer, is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B224), the on-data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area to turn on the general electric solenoid 37c (step B225), and the general electric operation transition setting process is terminated.

Also, if the value of the control pointer is "4", the process proceeds to step B226. That is, in order to end the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 and perform the normal electric remaining ball process (step B12), "4" is set as the process number (step B226). Then, this processing number is saved in the normal game processing number area (step B227), and the normal electric remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B228). After that, in order to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c, the OFF data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B229), and the general electric operation transition setting process is terminated.

Next, normal electric operation in the normal variable winning device 37 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a normal electric operation timing chart of the normal variable winning device of the first embodiment. The numbers inside the squares in the drawing indicate the values of the control pointers.

The general electric operation in the case of winning pattern 1 in the normal variable winning device 37 is a total of 1200 ms consisting of the general pattern display time (600 ms), the general electric open time (500 ms), and the remaining ball processing time (600 ms). is a series of actions. In the case of the winning symbol 1, the value of the control pointer becomes "4" after the normal electric open time elapses, and the normal electric remaining ball processing is performed after the normal variable winning device 37 is opened once.

In addition, the normal electric operation in the case of the winning pattern 2 in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is the normal symbol display time (600 ms), the subsequent normal electric open time (1700 ms), the subsequent wait time (200 ms), and the subsequent It is a series of operations for a total of 4800 ms, consisting of the normal electric release time (1700 ms) and the subsequent remaining ball processing time (600 ms). In the case of the winning pattern 2, the value of the control pointer becomes "2" after the lapse of the first electric power opening time, and the control pointer values are "2" and "3". The value of the pointer becomes "4". In this way, in the case of the winning symbol 2, the normal electric remaining ball processing is performed after the normal variable winning device 37 has been opened twice.

In addition, the normal electric operation in the case of the winning pattern 3 in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is the normal symbol display time (600 ms), the subsequent normal electric open time (1700 ms), the subsequent wait time (200 ms), and the subsequent It is a series of operations for a total of 6700 ms, consisting of the normal voltage release time (1700 ms), the subsequent wait time (200 ms), the subsequent normal voltage release time (1700 ms), and the subsequent residual ball processing time (600 ms). In the case of winning pattern 3, the value of the control pointer becomes "0" after the lapse of the first electric power open time, and the value of the control pointer corresponds to "0", "1", "2", and "3". After each process, the value of the control pointer becomes "4". In this way, in the case of the winning symbol 3, the normal electric remaining ball processing is performed after the normal variable winning device 37 has been opened three times.

In addition, between the normal map display time, the wait time, and the remaining ball processing time, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is closed by the OFF control of the normal electric solenoid 37c. Further, during the general electric open time, the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 is opened by ON control of the general electric solenoid 37c.

[Public electric residual bulb treatment]
Next, the general electric remaining ball processing (step B12) in the above general electric game processing will be described. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal electric residual bulb processing according to the first embodiment. In this normal electric remaining ball processing, a normal electric remaining ball per end processing transition setting process (step B231) is performed, and the normal electric remaining ball processing ends.

[Regular figure per end process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the end processing transition setting processing (step B231) per normal pattern in the above-described normal electric remaining ball processing will be described. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a flowchart of per-normal figure per end process transition setting process of the first embodiment. In this general pattern per end processing transition setting processing, first, the processing number "5" related to the general pattern per end processing is set (step B241), and the processing number is saved in the general pattern game processing number area (step B242 ).

Thereafter, the normal game ending time (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B243), and the signal regarding the end of operation of the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the test signal output data area (step B244). In addition, the signal regarding the end of the operation of the normal variable prize winning device 37 is a signal that turns off the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal.

Next, the information in the general electrical count area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B245). Then, the value of the control pointer area in the per normal pattern is cleared (step B246), and the normal per pattern end processing transition setting process is terminated.

[End processing per normal pattern]
Next, the end processing (step B13) per normal pattern in the normal pattern game processing described above will be described. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a flowchart of per-universal pattern end processing of the first embodiment. In this general pattern per end process, the general pattern per normal process transition setting process 2 (step B251) is performed, and the general pattern per end process is terminated.

[General figure normal process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the normal pattern normal process transition setting process 2 (step B251) in the normal pattern per end process described above will be described. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a flow chart of normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 of the first embodiment. In this general pattern normal processing transition setting process 2, first, the processing number "0" relating to general pattern normal processing is set (step B261), and the processing number is saved in the general pattern game processing number area (step B262). .

Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of winning in the normal pattern variation game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B263). It should be noted that the signal relating to the end of the normal pattern variation game is a signal that turns off the signal during normal symbol 1 variation.

After that, the flag that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (fraud monitoring period flag) is saved in the general electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B264), and the normal pattern normal process transition setting process 2 is completed. .

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, details of the segment LED editing process (step S131) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a flowchart of segment LED editing processing according to the first embodiment. In the segment LED editing process, round display unit 51 provided in the collective display device 50, special figure 1 reservation display unit 52, normal figure reservation display unit 56, setting related to driving of LEDs constituting the state display unit 57, etc. do

In the segment LED editing process, first, the blinking control timer is updated by adding "1" (step C11). The blink control timer is, for example, an 8-bit counter timer.
Next, determine the output on timing of the general pattern hold display (step C12), if it is the output on timing (step C12; Y), set the general pattern hold number display table 1 (step C13), output on timing If not (step C12; N), set the normal pattern pending number display table 2 (step C14). In addition, the determination of the output ON timing of the normal map hold display can be performed by referring to the specific bit of the timer. For example, by referring to the 5th bit of the timer that is incremented by 1 every 4 ms, a blink period of 128 ms can be set.

After that, the display data corresponding to the number of reserved normal patterns is acquired from the set display table 1 of reserved normal patterns or the display table 2 of reserved normal patterns, and saved in the segment area (step C15). The segment area is a storage area for storing display data of LED_00 to LED_31.

For example, the general pattern reservation number display table 1 and the general pattern reservation number display table 2 have the same value for the general pattern reservation number "0" to "2", and the normal pattern reservation number "3" and "4" are different values is. As a result, in the general figure reservation display unit 56, the LED corresponding to the general figure reservation number "0" is turned off, the LED corresponding to the general figure reservation number "1", "2" is lit, and the general figure reservation number "3" , "4" realizes blinking of the corresponding LED.

Next, the output on timing of the special figure 1 pending display is determined (step C16), and if it is the output on timing (step C16; Y), the special figure 1 pending number display table 1 is set (step C17), output If it is not on-timing (step C16; N), set the special figure 1 pending number display table 2 (step C18). It should be noted that the determination of the output-on timing of the special figure 1 pending display can also be the same as the determination of the output-on timing of the normal figure pending display. At this time, for example, by differentiating the reference bit of the timer that is incremented by 1 every 4 ms from the normal diagram reservation display, a blinking cycle different from the normal diagram reservation display can be set.

After that, the display data corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is acquired from the set special figure 1 reservation number display table 1 or the special figure 1 reservation number display table 2 and saved in the segment area (step C19). It should be noted that the special figure 1 reservation display unit 52 is also similar to the general figure reservation display unit 56 to achieve the lighting mode of the LED.

Next, determine the output on timing of the special figure 2 pending display (step C20), if it is the output on timing (step C20; Y) set the special figure 2 pending number display table 1 (step C21), output If it is not on-timing (step C20; N), set the special figure 2 pending number display table 2 (step C22). It should be noted that the determination of the output-on timing of the special figure 2 pending display can also be the same as the determination of the output-on timing of the general figure pending display. At this time, for example, by differentiating the reference bit of the timer that is incremented by 1 every 4 ms from the normal diagram reservation display, a blinking cycle different from the normal diagram reservation display can be set.

After that, the display data corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number is acquired from the set special figure 2 reservation number display table 1 or the special figure 2 reservation number display table 2 and saved in the segment area (step C23). It should be noted that, also for the special figure 2 reservation display unit 58, in the same manner as the general figure reservation display unit 56 to achieve the lighting mode of the LED.

Further, a round display LED display table that defines the display mode of the round display unit 51 is set (step C24), display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer is acquired, and saved in the segment area (step C25). .

Next, the game state display table 1 is set (step C26), the display data corresponding to the game state display number 1 is obtained, and saved in the segment area (step C27).
In addition, the game state display table 1 indicates whether the game state of the special figure game is during time saving (under general electric support), in other words, whether it is one of the game states advantageous to the player. A display mode for notification by the display unit 57 is defined. For example, when the LED_29 of the state display unit 57 is turned off, "normal" is notified, and when the LED_29 is lit, "special figure time saving (during general electricity support)" is notified.

After that, the game state display table 2 is set (step C28), the display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area (step C29), and the segment LED editing process is finished.

The game state display table 2 indicates whether or not the game state of the special figure game is a right-handed game state, in other words, whether or not it is another game state advantageous to the player. Defines the display mode for notification. For example, when the LED_30 of the state display section 57 is turned off, "normal hitting (left hitting)" is reported, and when the LED_30 is lit, "right hitting" is reported. It should be noted that the period for announcing "right-handed" includes periods corresponding to game states such as during a big win, during a small win, and during general electric support.

As a result, the segment LED editing process can notify the player of the progress of the game in the set display mode. Therefore, the round display unit 51, the special figure 1 reservation display unit 52, the special figure 2 reservation display unit 58, the general figure reservation display unit 56, and the state display unit, which are the setting targets of the display mode by the segment LED editing process 57 has a function as a game progress notification unit.

Next, magnet fraud monitoring processing and board radio fraud monitoring processing for monitoring fraud will be described. For a gaming machine that provides a predetermined game value to a player according to the result of a game, there are cases where fraudulent acts to illegally obtain a game value are committed. Among such fraudulent acts, gaming machines having a mechanism for detecting fraudulent acts using magnets have been conventionally known. There are various types of fraudulent acts, and detection methods and conditions corresponding to each type are required. However, it was not possible to accurately detect the occurrence of abnormal conditions.

In particular, erroneously judging that an abnormal state has occurred even though no abnormal state leading to fraudulent behavior has occurred, and issuing a notification, etc., will cause distrust of the player and may be a factor to avoid playing on the gaming machine. Therefore, it is important to avoid erroneous detection of such an abnormal state.

Therefore, the game machine 10 accurately detects the occurrence of an abnormal state based on the magnetic detector that detects abnormal magnetism, the radio wave detector that detects abnormal radio waves, and the detection results of the magnetic detector and the radio wave detector. For the purpose of preventing erroneous detection of an abnormal state, for example, the following magnet fraud monitoring processing and board radio fraud monitoring processing are performed.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
First, the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a flowchart of magnet fraud monitoring processing according to the first embodiment. In the magnet tampering monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, which functions as a magnetism detector for detecting abnormal magnetism, and the start and end of tampering notification are set. Since the magnetic detector functions as a magnet detector that detects the approach of a magnet, the magnetic sensor can be rephrased as a magnet sensor.

In the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3), it is determined whether the magnetic sensor is on, that is, whether abnormal magnetism is detected. It is determined whether or not (step C31). If the magnetic sensor is on (step C31; Y), that is, if an abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer that counts the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by adding "1" (step C32). ), it is determined whether or not the magnet fraud monitoring timer has timed out (step C33).

When the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step C33; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected continuously for a certain period of time (for example, 32 ms), abnormality is determined. When an abnormality is determined, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C34), and the magnet fraud alert timer initial value (eg, 60000 ms) is saved in the magnet fraud alert timer area (step C35). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step C36), a magnet fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step C37), and whether or not the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area is determined. Determine (step C43).

That is, the game control device 100 has a function as abnormal state detection control means for detecting an abnormal state based on the detection result of the magnetic sensor. Then, the game control device 100 determines that an abnormal state has occurred when the magnetic sensor continuously detects abnormal magnetism over a predetermined period.

On the other hand, if the magnetic sensor is not on (step C31; N), that is, if no abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C38), and the magnet fraud notification that specifies the magnet fraud notification time. If the timer is not "0", it is updated by subtracting "1" from the magnet fraud notification timer (step C39). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is "0" (step C40). If the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed out (step C33; N), the process proceeds to step C39.

If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not "0" (step C40; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is "0" (step C40; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, and the period of the fraud notification has expired, or when If no tampering information has been issued since then, a command for ending magnet tampering notification is prepared (step C41). Furthermore, a magnet fraud cancellation flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step C42), and it is determined whether or not the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step C43).

If the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step C43; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step C43; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step C44), effect command setting processing is performed (step C45), and magnet fraud monitoring processing is terminated. do.

[Processing for monitoring radio wave fraud]
Next, the details of the board radio wave unauthorized monitoring process (step S133) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a flow chart of radio wave unauthorized monitoring processing according to the first embodiment. In the board radio fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 serving as a radio wave detector for detecting abnormal radio waves, and the start and end of fraud notification are set.

In the board radio wave unauthorized monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the board radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I/F 121, the board radio wave sensor is turned on, That is, it is determined whether or not an abnormal radio wave is detected (step C51). If the board radio wave sensor is ON (step C51; Y), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is detected, the initial value of the radio wave tampering alarm timer (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the radio wave tampering alarm area (step C52).

Then, a command for notifying radio wave fraud is prepared (step C53), and a radio wave fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a radio wave fraud flag (step C54). It is determined whether they match (step C59). That is, in the case of radio fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

That is, the game control device 100 has a function as an abnormal state detection control means for detecting the occurrence of an abnormal state based on the detection result of the board radio wave sensor. Then, the game control device 100 determines that an abnormal state has occurred when the board radio wave sensor detects an abnormal radio wave only once.

On the other hand, if the board radio wave sensor is not ON (step C51; N), that is, if no abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave tampering alarm timer that defines the radio wave tampering notification time is not "0". It is updated by subtracting "1" from the timer (step C55). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave tampering alarm timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the radio irregularity notification timer is "0" (step C56).

If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not "0" (step C56; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. Also, if the value of the radio tampering alarm timer is "0" (step C56; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired and the period of the tampering alarm has expired, or if If no unauthorized information has been issued since then, a command for ending the radio wave fraud notification is prepared (step C57), a radio wave fraud cancellation flag is prepared as a flag of radio wave fraud (step C58), and the prepared radio wave fraud is It is determined whether or not the flag matches the value of the radio wave irregularity flag area (step C59).

Then, if the prepared radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the radio wave fraud flag area (step C59; Y), the radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step C59; N), the prepared radio wave fraud flag is saved in the radio wave fraud flag area (step C60), effect command setting processing is performed (step C61), and radio wave fraud monitoring is performed. End the process.

By performing the magnet fraud monitoring process and the board radio fraud monitoring process as described above, it is possible to accurately detect the occurrence of an abnormal state. In other words, game machines are equipped with components that generate magnetism, such as solenoids. It is possible to avoid erroneously detecting an occurrence as an abnormal condition. On the other hand, since the game machine is not equipped with parts that emit radio waves, damage can be minimized by immediately determining that an abnormal radio wave is detected as an abnormal state.

In the first embodiment, the abnormal magnetism is simply detected in the state of detecting magnetism. A state in which magnetism is detected may be regarded as abnormal. In addition, in the first embodiment, abnormal radio waves are simply detected in the state of receiving radio waves. It may be in a state of receiving radio waves of a frequency that does not exist. Further, a state in which a radio wave whose intensity is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value or a radio wave of a specific frequency is detected may be regarded as abnormal. When thresholds are set according to magnetic intensity, radio wave intensity, and frequency, the magnetic sensor 61 or board radio wave sensor 62 may output a signal when the threshold is exceeded, or the controller may set the threshold. You may make it monitor whether it exceeded.

From the above, the magnetic detector (magnetic sensor 61) that detects abnormal magnetism, the radio wave detector (board radio wave sensor 62) that detects abnormal radio waves, and the detection results of the magnetic detector and the radio wave detector Based on the abnormal state detection control means (game control device 100) for detecting the occurrence of an abnormal state, the abnormal state detection control means, in the case of the magnetic detector, continuously over a predetermined period of time detected the abnormal magnetism However, in the case of a radio wave detector, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred only once an abnormal radio wave is detected.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S134) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. 97 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of external information editing processing according to the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 98 is a diagram (part 2) showing a flowchart of external information editing processing according to the first embodiment.

In the external information editing process, payout command transmission process (step S125), winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step S128), magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132) and board radio fraud monitoring process (step S133) Based on this, information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal, amusement center internal management device, or a test firing test device is created and a process of setting it in an output buffer is performed.

In the external information editing process, first, a process of setting information according to the error state and security state is performed. In the process of setting information according to the error state and security state, when a glass frame open error is occurring (step C71; Y) and a body frame open error is occurring (step C72; Y), the door/frame The ON data of the release signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C73), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C74). That is, the occurrence of the glass frame open error and the body frame open error are output as external information and test signals.

On the other hand, if neither the glass frame open error nor the body frame open error has occurred (steps C71 to C72; N), the OFF data of the door/frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C75), the security signal OFF data is saved in the external information output data area (step C76).

Next, if the security signal control timer, which counts a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like, is updated to "-1" if it is not "0". (step C77). Note that the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step C78).

If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step C78; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step C79). On the other hand, if the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step C78; Y), that is, if the time is up, the process of step C79 is passed. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information until the security signal control timer times out.

Magnet fraud is occurring (step C80; Y), board radio fraud is occurring (step C81; Y), frame radio fraud is occurring (step C82; Y), electrical fraud is occurring (step C83; Y), or big win When fraud is occurring (step C84; Y), the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step C85), and the gaming machine error state signal ON data is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step C86).

On the other hand, if none of magnet fraud, board radio fraud, frame radio fraud, general electrical fraud, or big winning gate fraud has occurred (steps C80 to C84; N), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is tested. Save in the signal output data area (step C87).

Next, in the external information editing process, a main prize ball signal editing process (step C88) for setting information about the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a starting signal editing process (step C89) for editing the winning signal of the starting point. do Next, if the pattern determination count control timer for controlling the output time of the information relating to the execution count of the special figure variation display game is not "0", it is updated by "-1" (step C90). In addition, the minimum value of the pattern determination count control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the pattern fixing number control timer is "0" (step C91).

If the value of the pattern confirmation count control timer is "0" (step C91; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the OFF data of the pattern confirmation count signal is stored in the external information output data area. Save (step C92) and terminate the external information editing process. Also, if the value of the design determination count control timer is not "0" (step C91; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the ON data of the design determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C93), the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step C88) in the external information editing process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main prize ball signal editing process of the first embodiment. The main prize ball signal editing process is a main prize ball signal generated each time the number of prize balls (scheduled number of payouts, planned number of game media payouts) generated by winning a prize in a prize opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). is output to an external device.

In the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0", it is updated by "-1" (step C101). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step C102). If the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step C102; Y), it is determined whether or not the main prize ball signal output count is "0" (step C103).

Then, if the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is not "0" (step C103; N), the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is updated to "-1" (step C104), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area is stored. The initial value of the prize ball signal output control timer is saved (step C105). This main prize ball signal output control timer initial value is obtained by adding the time (for example, 128 ms) in the ON state (for example, high level) and the time (for example, 64 ms) for the OFF state (for example, low level) of the main prize ball signal. time (for example, 192 ms). Thereafter, ON data for turning on the main prize signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C107), and the main prize signal editing process is terminated. Also, if the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is 0 (step C103; Y), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C108), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step C102; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step C106). It should be noted that the fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step C106; Y), the process proceeds to step C107. In addition, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output ON period (step C106; N), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step C108), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

Through the above process, the information regarding the planned number of game media to be paid out is transmitted to the outside. After the payout condition based on the winning of the game ball is satisfied, it is faster to generate and transmit the main prize ball signal than to operate the payout device to complete the payout of the game ball. During the period from when the payout condition is satisfied until the game media of the payout number are paid out, information regarding the planned number of game media to be paid out, which is the number of game media to be paid out, is output to the outside.

That is, the game control device 100 is capable of outputting to the outside information regarding the planned number of game media to be paid out, which is the number of game media to be paid out, after the payout condition is satisfied and before the number of game media to be paid out is paid out. form an external output means.

However, if the number of generated prize balls is small and even if it is added to the value of the remaining number of prize balls, it does not reach a predetermined number (for example, 10), information on the planned number of game media to be paid out will be displayed after the actual payout is completed. is sometimes output. By reducing the unit of the number of game media to be paid out corresponding to one main prize ball signal (for example, "1"), the time from when the payout condition is satisfied to when the number of game media to be paid out is always paid out is reduced. In the meantime, it is also possible to output information about the number of game media to be paid out, which is the number of game media to be paid out, to the outside.

From the above, a payout device (payout unit) that can pay out game media and a control means (game control) that controls the payout device to pay out a predetermined number of game media based on the establishment of a predetermined payout condition. In a gaming machine comprising a device 100 and a payout control device 200, the control means determines the number of game media to be paid out after the payout condition is established until the game media of the payout number are paid out. It is provided with an external output means (game control device 100) capable of outputting information on the planned number of game media to be paid out to the outside. It should be noted that this configuration can also be applied to a slot machine using game media as medals.

In addition, the external output means (game control device 100) is provided with a storage means (game control device 100) having a game medium storage area for storing the expected number of game media to be paid out which has not been output to the outside, and based on the establishment of the payout condition, addition means (game control device 100) for adding a planned game medium payout number corresponding to the established payout condition to a game medium storage area; Based on this, transmitting means (game control device 100) for transmitting the predetermined number of scheduled game medium payouts to the outside, and subtracting the predetermined number of scheduled game medium payouts transmitted by the transmitting means from the game medium storage area. Subtracting means (game control device 100).

Here, the transmission timing of the main prize ball signal will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a transmission timing chart of the main prize ball signal of the first embodiment.
For example, the game control device 100 outputs one pulse (main prize ball signal) each time a predetermined unit number (for example, 10) of game media is scheduled to be paid out. The output signal of the main prize ball signal rises from "OFF" to "ON" when the value of the output control timer is "48", and from "ON" to "OFF" when the value of the output control timer is "16". , and remains "OFF" until the value of the output control timer reaches "0". That is, the output signal of the main prize signal is a pulse signal of 192 ms consisting of an "ON" time of 128 ms and an "OFF" time of 64 ms.

Note that, unlike the game control device 100, the payout control device 200 outputs one pulse (prize ball signal) each time a predetermined unit number (for example, 10) of game media is paid out. As a result, the gaming machine 10 allows the external device to confirm the match between the game medium payout schedule and the game medium payout result, and can deal with illegal payouts.

Also, in the winning during the jackpot period, if the payout of the game media is delayed due to running out of balls or the like, and the game media are paid out after the jackpot ends, the external device will not be able to receive the prize ball signal output by the payout control device 200. It was not possible to determine whether or not the payout was based on winning during the jackpot period. However, the game control device 100 outputs the main prize ball signal so that an external device (for example, a hall computer) can accurately collect information (determine).

[Starting port signal editing process]
Next, the details of the start signal editing process (step C89) in the external information editing process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the starting point signal editing process of the first embodiment. The starting port signal editing process is a process commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.

In the starting point signal editing process, first, if the starting point signal output control timer is not "0", it is updated by "-1" (step C111). Note that the minimum value of the starting signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the start signal output control timer is "0" (step C112). If the value of the starting signal output control timer is "0" (step C112; Y), it is determined whether or not the starting signal output count is "0" (step C113).

If the starting signal output count is not "0" (step C113; N), the starting signal output count is updated to "-1" (step C114), and the starting signal is output to the starting signal output control timer area. The control timer initial value is saved (step C115). The starting signal output control timer initial value is the time (eg, 128 ms) in which the starting signal is on (eg, high level) plus the time (eg, 64 ms) during which it is off (eg, low level). For example, 192 ms). After that, ON data for turning on the starting signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C117), and the starting signal editing process ends. If the number of times the starting signal is output is "0" (step C113; Y), the OFF data for turning off the starting signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C113; Y). C118), ending the starting point signal editing process.

On the other hand, if the value of the starting signal output control timer is not "0" (step C112; N), it is determined whether or not the starting signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step C116). Note that the fact that the starting signal output control timer is in the output ON section means that the value of the starting signal output control timer is equal to or greater than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the starting port signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step C116; Y), the process proceeds to step C117. If the starting signal output control timer is not in the output ON period (step C116; N), the OFF data for turning off the starting signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( Step C118), the starting point signal editing process is terminated.

Next, control of the production control device 300 will be described. In addition, the special figure controlled by the production control device 300 is a special figure for production displayed on the display device 41, and the special figure in the description of the control processing of the production control device 300 below is the special figure for this production. It means (decorative pattern that is not a special pattern).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing of the production control device 300 will be explained using FIG. FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a flowchart of main processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment.

The main process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 when power supply to the gaming machine 10 is started.
[Step D11] The controller prohibits interrupts.

[Step D<b>12 ] The controller initializes the CPU 311 .
[Step D<b>13 ] The controller initializes the VDP 312 .
[Step D14] The controller permits an interrupt.

[Step D15] The controller permits generation of display data. That is, the control unit permits the display circuit (not shown) in the VDP 312 to access the VRAM (not shown) in the VDP 312 and generate display data.

[Step D16] The controller sets a random number seed. This is a process of setting a pseudo-random number generation sequence using, for example, the srand function. Here, the control unit may use a fixed value such as 0 (zero) as an argument given to the srand function, or use a value created based on the ID value of the CPU etc. so that it differs for each gaming machine. You may

[Step D17] The control unit initializes an area to be initialized in the RWM (for example, RAM 322) of the effect control device 300 (for example, a flag area for effect (storage area used as various flags described later in the control processing of the effect control device 300) ) to save the initial values at power-on.

[Step D18] The controller clears WDT.
[Step D19] The control unit executes effect button input processing. The effect button input process is a process of editing when the effect buttons (the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b) are operated when enabled. Since the effect button does not turn on and off at high speed, the control unit may perform processing for sensing the input of the effect button within the effect button input process, or may be performed within a short cycle timer interrupt (not shown). good.

[Step D20] The control section executes hall/player setting mode processing. The hall/player setting mode process is a process of setting the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LEDs and the display device 41, and receiving an operation by the player to change the brightness and volume of the LEDs and the display device 41, and the like.

[Step D21] The control unit executes random number update processing. The random number update process is, for example, a process of updating a pseudorandom number at least once in each control cycle of the main process using a rand function. Since the rand function generates a random number based on the designated generation sequence each time recalculation is performed, the control unit can obtain the random number simply by executing the rand function. A counter that increments by "1" like the main board (game control device 100) may be used as the random number.

[Step D22] The controller executes a received command check process. The received command check processing will be described later with reference to FIG.
[Step D22A] The controller executes power saving control processing. The power saving control process is switching control between a normal control state (non power saving control state) in which the power consumption of the power saving control target device 3000 is not suppressed and a power saving control state in which the power consumption of the power saving control target device 3000 is suppressed. This is the process of performing

[Step D23] The control unit executes effect display editing processing. The effect display editing process is a process of setting various commands and their parameters for instructing the VDP 312 about the content of drawing on the display device 41 . For example, the control unit sets commands in a table in the effect display editing process.

[Step D24] The control unit executes drawing command preparation end setting. The drawing command preparation end setting is a process of setting that preparation of all commands to the VDP 312 set in the effect display editing process is completed.

[Step D25] The controller determines whether or not it is time to switch frames. If it is time to switch frames, the process proceeds to step D26. If it is time to switch frames, it waits for the time to switch frames. Here, the frame switching timing is a time corresponding to a processing cycle (eg, 1/30 sec ≈ 33.333 ms) created based on the cycle (eg, 1/60 sec) of V blank interrupt (also called V sync interrupt). It is the timing that arrives at the target interval. Note that the V blank interrupt occurs each time the VDP 312 completes one scan of the entire screen for drawing. The period of generation of this V blank interrupt is, for example, 1/60 second as described above. In this embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and the V blank interrupt occurs twice, the frame is switched, and the cycle of the frame switching timing is twice the cycle of the V blank interrupt (for example, 1/60 second). (for example, 1/30 second≈33.33 ms). However, the frame switching timing is not limited to this mode, and the frame switching timing can be changed arbitrarily. Frame switching may be performed periodically.

By the frame switching timing determination process, subsequent processes (steps D26 to D30 and subsequent steps D18 to D24) are executed at the frame switching timing for each processing cycle. Note that the time management that needs to be synchronized with the effect content is performed in units of frames (that is, in units of processing cycles). If the processing period is 1/30 second, for example, 3 frames will be 100 ms. This is the same as that the main board (game control device) manages the time value in units of 4ms of the timer interrupt period.

[Step D26] The controller instructs the VDP 312 to draw the screen according to the command set in step D23. For example, the control unit sequentially transmits commands set in a table to instruct the VDP 312 to draw the screen.

[Step D27] The controller executes sound control processing. The sound control processing is processing related to volume control of sounds from the speakers (the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b).

[Step D28] The controller executes decoration control processing. The decoration control process is a process for controlling various LEDs of the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the like.
[Step D29] The controller executes a movable body control process. The movable body control process is a process of controlling a movable body (for example, board effect device 44) including various motors and SOL (solenoid).

[Step D30] The control section executes a firing information control process. The launch information control process sets the launch-related information based on the launch status flag, and the special figure rotation state (the number of special figure fluctuations per game for a predetermined amount of money (that is, the predetermined number of rental balls)). This is a process for correcting the mode of production.

After executing step D30, the control unit returns to step D18, and thereafter repeats the processing of steps D18 to D30. That is, steps D18 to D30 constitute a loop process (called main loop process in some cases) that is repeatedly executed at the above process cycle after the effect control device 300 is activated.

Note that the control unit executes the processing of steps D27 to D29 in the main loop processing in order to match the screen effects. A signal for driving control, etc.) is actually output to the port in a short cycle timer interrupt (not shown). However, when an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there are cases in which signals, etc., are not output by timer interrupts, just by giving instructions through serial communication or the like.

[Receive command check processing]
Next, reception command check processing will be described using FIG. Figure 103 is the figure which shows the flowchart of the reception command check processing in the production control control equipment of 1st execution form. The received command check process is a process executed by the control unit in step D22 of the main process.

In addition, the received command (effect command) has a configuration including MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte), and the effect command from the game control device (main board) 100 to the effect control device 300 are sent sequentially. Such data constituting a command is hereinafter referred to as command data or command data.

Processing for receiving commands from the main substrate is performed by "command reception interrupt processing" (not shown). That is, in the serial communication of this example, transmission and reception are automatically performed by the hardware (by the function of the CPU itself), and when the command reception is completed, an interrupt (command reception interrupt) is generated to notify the user. It is sufficient to just retrieve it from the buffer, but in the above "command reception interrupt processing", each time there is a command reception interrupt, the command is loaded from the serial reception buffer, and after checking whether there is an error in the loaded command data, the command is processed. Data (MODE and ACTION data) is stored in the command buffer, and the value of the command reception counter is incremented by "1" for the stored amount. In the description of the control process, simply "storing" means storing and storing in a readable manner in a predetermined storage area for later use in the control process (the same applies hereinafter). Also, the command buffer is, for example, a ring buffer. This command buffer is configured by a storage area in the RAM 311a (or RAM 322) of the CPU 311, for example. The capacity of the command buffer should be equal to or greater than the number of commands that can be transmitted from the main board in the system control period (the processing period described above; for example, 1/30 second).

[Step D41] The controller loads the value of the command reception counter as the command reception count. The command reception counter is set in the RWM (RAM 322 or RAM 311a). Since the command reception counter is cleared to "0" in principle at step D43, it stores the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 second) (time for one period of the processing period described above).

[Step D42] The control section determines whether or not the number of received commands is "0 (zero)". If so, terminate the received command check process. In the present application, "loading" data in the control process as in step D41 means taking out data from the RAM (RAM 322 or RAM 311a in the effect control device 300 of this example).

[Step D43] The controller decrements the contents of the command reception counter area (that is, the value of the command reception counter) by the number of received commands.
If A is the value of the command reception counter and B is the number of commands received, "A=B" immediately after execution of step D41. Then, immediately after the execution of step D43, "A = AB = 0" is a normal movement, but in the aspect of this example, the effect control device 300 command reception interrupt from the game control device (main board) 100 is given the highest priority without disabling the interrupt, there is a possibility that the value of A has increased between the processing of step D41 and the processing of step D43. Therefore, if the processing of step D43 is set to "A←0" (that is, the processing of setting the value of the command reception counter to zero), the command count will be shifted. I am doing it. However, when serial communication is used for sending and receiving commands from the main board as in this embodiment, interrupts are disabled so that the value of A does not increase during the processing from step D41 to step D153. Then, the processing content of step D43 may be set to "A←0".

[Step D44] The control section reads the contents of the receive command buffer (corresponding to the command buffer, hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as the command buffer) (that is, the command data stored at the address corresponding to the read pointer of the command buffer). Copy to command area (sometimes called command storage area). The command area is, for example, a storage area in the RAM 322 or the RAM 311a, and is a so-called FIFO type (first-in first-out type) buffer.

[Step D45] Since the control unit has read the data in the command buffer, it updates the value of the command read index, which is the read pointer of the command buffer, by increasing it by "1", for example, within the range of "0" to "31". Do. Note that the range from "0" to "31" here corresponds to the capacity of the command buffer (for example, "32").

[Step D46] The control section determines whether or not copying of the commands for the number of commands received has been completed (that is, whether steps D44 and D45 have been repeatedly executed for the number of commands received). The control unit advances to step D47 if copying of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed, and advances to step D44 if copying has not been completed.

[Step D47] The controller loads (reads) the contents of the command area (data stored first among the data in the command area that has not yet been read, i.e., data to be read next). do.

[Step D48] The control section executes a received command analysis process. The received command analysis process is a process of analyzing the data of the loaded command (hereinafter referred to as the current command). The received command analysis processing will be described later using FIG.

[Step D49] The controller updates the address of the command area (the address of the data to be read next).
[Step D50] The controller determines whether or not the analysis of the commands equal to the number of commands received has been completed (that is, whether steps D47 to D49 have been repeatedly executed for the number of commands received). The control unit proceeds to step D47 if analysis of the commands equal to the number of commands received has not been completed, and ends the received command check processing if analysis has been completed.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, received command analysis processing will be described using FIG. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing a flowchart of received command analysis processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command analysis process is a process executed by the control unit in step D48 of the received command check process.

[Step D51] The control unit separates and stores the upper byte in MODE and the lower byte in ACT of the data of the current command loaded in step D47 of the received command check process. In the case of a variation command that commands a special figure variation pattern, the upper byte data stored as MODE commands the first half variation pattern, and the lower byte data stored as ACT commands the second half variation pattern. It is.

[Step D52] The controller determines whether the MODE value separated in step D51 is within the normal range. If the value of MODE is within the normal range, the control unit proceeds to step D53, and if the value of MODE is not within the normal range, ends the received command analysis process. Note that some MODE values are not defined and are not used, and if such an unused value is determined in step D52, it is determined that it is not within the normal range.

[Step D53] The controller determines whether the ACT value separated in step D51 is within the normal range. If the ACT value is within the normal range, the control unit proceeds to step D54, and if the ACT value is not within the normal range, ends the received command analysis process.

Further, determination in step D53 as to whether or not the value of ACT separated in step D51 is within the normal range is performed, for example, as follows. That is, the effective ACT value differs for each MODE, and the upper and lower limits of the effective ACT value are defined in a predetermined ACTION check table (not shown), and in step D53, the values are separated into the range of the upper and lower limits. It is checked whether the obtained ACT value is within the normal range.

[Step D54] The control section determines whether or not the separated ACT values for the separated MODE values are a correct combination. The control unit proceeds to step D55 if the ACT values are a correct combination, and ends the received command analysis process if the combination is not correct. A match check table, for example, can be used to determine whether or not the ACT values are a correct combination. The match check table is a table in which all ACT values (ACTION values) valid for MODE values are registered in order from the leading address, and is provided for each MODE value. If there is a separated ACT value in this matching check table corresponding to the MODE value, it can be determined that the combination is correct, and if there is no separated ACT value in the matching check table, it is correct. It can be determined that it is not a combination.

It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the ACT values are a correct combination is performed including a missing check to determine whether or not the MODE is a normal combination of ACT values. Although there are multiple valid ACTs for one MODE, their values are not necessarily continuous (that is, there are values that are not discontinuous and values that are missing), so the command is a valid value. Since only valid values are defined in the match check table, it is checked one by one whether they match with any of them.

[Step D55] The controller determines whether or not the MODE data is within the range of the variable command. If the MODE value is within the variable command range, the control unit executes the variable command process (details omitted) (step D56), and proceeds to step D57 if the MODE data is not within the variable command range. .

Here, the MODE data is the MODE data separated and stored in step D51 (the same applies to step D57 and the like described later). Also, the variation command (sometimes referred to as variation command or variation pattern command) is a command to command the variation pattern of the special figure, and the range that the data of this variation command can take is the variation command range.

[Step D57] The controller determines whether or not the MODE data is within the jackpot command range. The control unit executes a jackpot command process (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the jackpot command range (step D58), and proceeds to step D59 when the MODE data is not within the jackpot command range. . The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.) during the jackpot effect, and the range of the jackpot command data is the jackpot command range.

[Step D59] The control section determines whether or not the MODE data is within the range of the symbol-based command. If the value of MODE is within the range of the symbol-based command, the control unit executes symbol-based command processing (details omitted) (step D60), and proceeds to step D61 if the data of MODE is not within the range of the symbol-based command. . Symbol system command (sometimes referred to as symbol command or decorative special figure command) is a command to command information about the special figure symbol (for example, what to do with the special figure stop symbol etc.), this symbol command The range that can be taken by the data of is the pattern system command range.

[Step D61] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the single-shot command range. If the MODE value is within the single-shot command range, the control unit executes single-shot command processing (details omitted) (step D62), and if the MODE data is not within the single-shot command range, proceeds to step D63. . In addition, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command, a command that is established independently is called a single-shot command. Single-shot commands (sometimes referred to as single-shot commands) include a customer waiting demo command, a pending number command, a pattern stop command, a probability information command, an error/illegal command, and a model designation command. The range that the data of this one-shot command can take is the one-shot system command range.

[Step D63] The control section determines whether or not the MODE data is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command. The control unit executes the prefetching pattern system command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the prefetching symbol system command range (step D64), and when the MODE data is not within the prefetching symbol system command range, step Go to D65.

[Step D65] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the prefetch variation command range. If the MODE data is within the prefetch variation command range, the control unit executes prefetch variation command processing (details omitted) (step D66), and receives if the MODE data is not within the prefetch variation command range. End command analysis processing. In addition, the look-ahead symbol system command and the look-ahead variation system command are commands for look-ahead production.

Here, the look-ahead effect (also referred to as a look-ahead notice or a look-ahead notice effect) is a variable display game that corresponds to a start winning memory that has not been executed by the special figure changing display game (suspension of starting winning memory, or simply referred to as suspension). In order to notify the player in advance with a predetermined degree of reliability whether or not the game will be a big hit (or what kind of variation pattern it will be) when is executed after that, the suspension display of the starting winning memory is performed in a manner different from usual. It is a production such as. And the look-ahead system command (look-ahead variation system command and look-ahead pattern system command) is a command to notify in advance the variation pattern and stop design corresponding to the suspension of the start winning memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and the number of start winning memory It is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the time of variation (at the time of starting winning or at the time of starting variable display of other starting winning memory). It should be noted that normal variation-based commands and symbol-based commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

[Decoration control process]
Next, decoration control processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a flowchart of decoration control processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The decoration control process is a process executed by the control section in step D28 of the main process.

[Step D71] The control unit executes test mode decoration processing. The test mode decoration process is a process of setting a decoration pattern for checking whether a decoration device such as an LED provided in the gaming machine 10 normally lights up with a preset decoration pattern. The control unit executes the test mode decoration process when the game machine 10 is started in the test mode, and does not execute the test mode decoration process when the game machine 10 is started in the normal mode.

[Step D72] The control section executes error decoration processing. The control unit executes error decoration processing when the performance control device 300 receives an error-related command from the game control device 100, and does not execute error decoration processing when it does not receive an error-related command. The error decoration process is a process of setting a decoration pattern for informing the player or the employee of the game arcade that an error has occurred.

[Step D73] The control section executes decoration setting processing. The decoration setting process is a process of setting a decoration pattern according to the game state. The decoration setting process will be explained later using FIG.

[Step D74] The control unit executes event decoration setting processing. The event decoration setting process is a process of setting a decoration pattern according to the event when a predetermined event occurs. The predetermined event is, for example, when push button 25 is operated.

[Step D75] The controller executes decoration pattern control data setting processing. The decoration pattern control data setting process is a process of setting control data to be transmitted to each effect device (the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18), and sets control data according to the decoration pattern set in steps D71 to D74. do. After executing the decoration pattern control data setting process, the control unit terminates the decoration control process.

[Decoration setting process]
Next, decoration setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a diagram showing a flowchart of decoration setting processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The decoration setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D73 of the decoration control process.

[Step D81] The control section branches the processing according to the game state. If the game state is "power on", the control unit proceeds to step D82; if the game state is "recovery from power failure", proceeds to step D84; if the game state is "waiting for customers", proceeds to step D86; If the game state is "fluctuating", proceed to step D88; if the game state is "stopping symbols", proceed to step D89; if the game state is "fanfare in progress", proceed to step D90; In the case of "during round", the process proceeds to step D91, and in the case of "ending", the process proceeds to step D92.

[Step D82] The controller sets the decoration pattern to a loop setting. Note that the loop setting is to repeat a predetermined decoration pattern.
[Step D83] The control unit sets a power-on decoration pattern from power-on to a playable state (waiting for customers (state)). As a result, the gaming machine 10 repeats the decoration display corresponding to power-on until it becomes ready to play. After setting the power-on decoration pattern, the control unit ends the decoration setting process.

[Step D84] The controller sets the decoration pattern to a loop setting.
[Step D85] The control unit sets a power failure recovery decoration pattern from power failure recovery to a playable state (waiting for customers (state)). As a result, the gaming machine 10 repeats the decoration display corresponding to the restoration of the power failure until the gaming machine 10 becomes ready to play. After setting the power failure restoration decoration pattern, the control unit ends the decoration setting process.

[Step D86] The controller sets the decoration pattern to a loop setting.
[Step D87] The control section executes a customer waiting demonstration decoration setting process while waiting for customers (state). The control unit sets a decoration pattern corresponding to the customer waiting demonstration in the customer waiting demonstration decoration setting process. As a result, the gaming machine 10 performs decoration display corresponding to the customer waiting demonstration while waiting for customers. After executing the customer waiting demonstration decoration setting process, the control unit ends the decoration setting process.

[Step D88] The control unit executes the changing ornament setting process while the game state is "fluctuating", that is, while the fluctuation display game is being executed. In the variable decoration setting process, the control unit sets a decoration pattern corresponding to the effect mode of the variable display game being executed (for example, when a big hit announcement is included, a rainbow including clockwise and counterclockwise rainbow colors is displayed). color display). As a result, the gaming machine 10 performs decoration display corresponding to the effect mode of the variable display game being executed while the variable display game is being executed. After executing the changing decoration setting process, the control unit ends the decoration setting process.

[Step D89] When the game state is "symbols stopped", that is, when the identified symbols in the variable display game are stopped, the control section executes decoration setting processing during symbol stop. The control unit sets a decoration pattern indicating that the identification symbol is stopped in the symbol stop decoration setting process. As a result, the gaming machine 10 performs decorative display indicating that the identification symbols are stopped while the identification symbols are stopped. After executing the decoration setting process during design stop, the control unit ends the decoration setting process.

[Step D90] The control unit executes decoration setting processing during fanfare when the game state is "in fanfare", that is, when the result of the variable display game is a big win. In the decoration setting process during the fanfare, the control unit sets a decoration pattern (for example, rainbow display including clockwise rainbow display and counterclockwise rainbow display) indicating that the result of the variable display game is a big hit. . As a result, the gaming machine 10 performs decorative display indicating that the result of the variable display game is a big win during the fanfare. After executing the decoration setting process during fanfare, the control unit ends the decoration setting process. Note that the gaming machine 10 performs the decoration display with the decoration pattern set in the decoration setting process during the fanfare until the big win state is started.

[Step D91] The control unit executes the during-round decoration setting process when the game state is "in-round", that is, when each round in the jackpot state is being executed. In the in-round decoration setting process, the control unit sets a decoration pattern indicating that the round is in progress (for example, rainbow-colored display including clockwise and counter-clockwise rainbow-colored displays). As a result, the gaming machine 10 performs decorative display indicating that the round is in progress during the round. After executing the mid-round decoration setting process, the control unit ends the decoration setting process.

[Step D92] The control section executes the during-ending decoration setting process when the game state is "ending", that is, when the ending process indicating that the jackpot state has ended is being executed. In the ending decoration setting process, the control unit sets a decoration pattern indicating that the ending is in progress (for example, rainbow color display including clockwise rainbow color display and counterclockwise rainbow color display). As a result, the gaming machine 10 performs decorative display indicating that the ending is in progress while the ending is in progress. After executing the ending decoration setting process, the control unit ends the decoration setting process.

Next, an example of the display screen of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of a display screen according to the first embodiment; FIG. 108 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of a display screen according to the first embodiment; FIG.

A display screen 700 shown in FIG. 107(a) is an example of the display screen during symbol stoppage. The display screen 700 includes a large pattern group 701, a pending digestion display 702, a pending display 703, a pending memory display (decorative special figure start memory display) 704, a special figure 1 reserved number display 705, and a special figure 2 reserved number and display 706 .

The large pattern group 701 is in charge of game production for the purpose of improving interest. Therefore, the large pattern group 701 is displayed largely in the substantially central portion of the display device 41 . The large symbol group 701 includes a left symbol 701a, a medium symbol 701b and a right symbol 701c. The left pattern 701a, the middle pattern 701b, and the right pattern 701c include rectangular background displays and numbers. In the middle pattern 701b and the right pattern 701c, the background display mainly takes charge of the design of the pattern, and suggests the value of the pattern (for example, the distinction between the normal pattern and the probability variation pattern, etc.) by the color and design. The numbers in the middle pattern 701b and the right pattern 701c are examples of identification information that can uniquely specify the type of pattern, and may be characters, graphics, or the like.

Note that the display screen 700 may include a small pattern group (not shown). The small symbol group is in charge of notifying the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the small pattern group is the peripheral part of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without disturbing the display effect by the large pattern group 701 (for example, the special figure 1 reserved number display 705 and the special figure 2 reserved number display 706 ) are displayed small.

On the display screen 700, the left symbol 701a indicates that the robot is stopped at symbol "5", the middle symbol 701b indicates that it is stopped at symbol "6", and the right symbol 701c indicates that it is stopped at symbol "7". Indicates that it is stopped. That is, on the display screen 700, the large symbol group 701 (the left symbol 701a, the medium symbol 701b and the right symbol 701c) indicates that the special symbol variation display game is in a stopped state (symbols are stopped).

The pending digestion display 702 can indicate whether or not the special figure fluctuation display game is in the fluctuation display state, and can notify the degree of expectation for the game result by its display mode. On the display screen 700, the pending digestion display 702 has a blank (blank) inside the frame to indicate that the special figure variation display game is in a stopped state.

The pending display 703 can clearly indicate the number of pending memories of the special figure fluctuation display game by its display mode (holding memory display 704 displayed on the holding display 703), and can notify the degree of expectation for the game result for each reserved memory. On the display screen 700, a pending display 703 displays three pending storage displays 704, indicating that the number of pending storage is "3".

It should be noted that the pending display 703 does not clearly define a boundary with the variable display area displaying the large pattern group 701 . That is, the reserved display 703 does not display a frame to clearly indicate the reserved display area. The reason why the reserved display 703 does not set the frame in this way is to avoid that the frame display restricts the display area of the large pattern group 701. This is to prevent the visibility from being impaired by interfering with the The reason why the pending display 703 does not set a frame is that the display range of the pending storage display 704 is not limited.

A pending memory display 704 displays a pending start-up memory (a pending memory). For example, the display mode of the pending memory display 704 is a circular icon as a default, and changes to a chance icon or the like through a look-ahead effect. The chance icon can notify the degree of expectation with colors such as green and red, and can also notify the degree of expectation with a higher degree of expectation by displaying a cherry blossom pattern, a rainbow display, or the like. In addition, the display mode of the reserved memory display 704 is not limited to icon display, and may be character display or the like. "Rush", "V", etc. may be displayed. Further, the display mode of the pending memory display 704 may be a combination of text display with color, cherry blossom pattern, rainbow display, or the like to notify the degree of expectation.

The special figure 1 reserved number display 705 displays the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game. In the display screen 700, the special figure 1 reserved number display 705 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game is "3". The special figure 2 reserved number display 706 displays the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game. In the display screen 700, the special figure 2 reserved number display 706 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game is "0". The number of pending storage that the pending display 703 displays corresponds to the sum of the number of pending storage that the special figure 1 pending number display 705 displays and the number of pending storage that the special figure 2 pending number display 706 displays.

For example, as shown in the display screen 700, when the special figure 1 pending number display 705 displays "3" and the special figure 2 pending number display 706 displays "0", the pending display 703 shows three pending storage displays 704 indicates that the reserved storage number is "3".

In addition, on the display screen 700, the gaming machine 10 displays the large pattern group 701 up to a range in which it overlaps the pending memory display 704 displayed in the pending display 703 (displays while allowing the overlap). 1, a reserved memory display 704 is displayed (preferentially) on the front side. In this way, the gaming machine 10 displays the large symbol group 701 up to a range overlapping the reserved display 703, thereby widening the display range of the large symbol group 701.例文帳に追加As a result, the game machine 10 is designed to enhance the interest by enhancing the visibility of the large symbol group 701 and the effect of display effects. In addition, the gaming machine 10 displays the reserved memory display 704 prior to the large symbol group 701, thereby preventing an unexpected disadvantage caused by the player's mistake in the number of reserved memories.

A display screen 710 shown in FIG. 107(b) is an example of the display screen during symbol variation. The display screen 710 is a special figure variation display game corresponding to the first (first) pending memory display 704 among the three pending memory displays 704 displayed in the pending display 703 of the display screen 700 shown in FIG. 107(a). shows a display screen during variable display (during symbol variation).

The display screen 710 includes a large symbol group 701, a pending digestion display 702, a pending display 703, a pending memory display 704, a special figure 1 reserved number display 705, and a special figure 2 reserved number display 706.
On the display screen 710, the left symbol 701a, the middle symbol 701b, and the right symbol 701c indicate that the symbols are changing. That is, the large symbol group 701 (the left symbol 701a, the medium symbol 701b, and the right symbol 701c) on the display screen 710 indicates that the special symbol variation display game is in the process of variation display.

In addition, on the display screen 710, the pending digestion display 702 displays the pending storage display 704 that is being digested, indicating that the special figure variation display game is in the process of variation display. Also, on the display screen 710, the pending display 703 displays two pending storage displays 704, indicating that the number of pending storage is two. Also, on the display screen 710, the special figure 1 reserved number display 705 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game is "2".

In the display screen 710, similarly to the display screen 700, the gaming machine 10 displays the large symbol group 701 up to a range in which it overlaps the pending memory display 704 displayed in the pending display 703 (displayed while allowing the overlap). In addition, when superimposed, a reserved memory display 704 is displayed on the front side. In this way, the gaming machine 10 displays the large symbol group 701 up to a range overlapping the reserved display 703, thereby widening the display range of the large symbol group 701.例文帳に追加As a result, the game machine 10 is intended to enhance interest. In addition, the gaming machine 10 displays the reserved memory display 704 prior to the large symbol group 701, thereby preventing an unexpected disadvantage caused by the player's mistake in the number of reserved memories.

A display screen 720 shown in FIG. 108(a) is an example of the display screen during symbol stop during which the look-ahead effect is being performed. The display screen 720 is a display in which a look-ahead effect is performed on the first reserved memory display 704 of the three reserved memory displays 704 displayed in the reserved display 703 of the display screen 700 shown in FIG. 107(a). showing the screen. It should be noted that the look-ahead effect is a effect performed prior to the derivation of the result mode in relation to the result mode derived by the reserved memory.

The display screen 720 includes a large symbol group 701, a pending digestion display 702, a pending display 703, a pending storage display 704, a special figure 1 pending number display 705, and a special figure 2 pending number display 706.
On the display screen 720, a look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the first reserved memory display 704 is performed in a closed range (closed area) within the frame of the reserved memory display 704, and the display mode of the reserved memory display 704 is changed. It shows how things are changing.

In this way, the game machine 10 performs the performance within the closed range in the reserved memory display 704 when performing the look-ahead performance while the symbols are stopped. According to this, even when the gaming machine 10 displays the large pattern group 701 to the extent that it overlaps the reserved memory display 704 , it is possible to clearly indicate that the effect is for the reserved memory display 704 . As a result, the game machine 10 misunderstands the look-ahead performance for the reserved memory display 704 as the performance for the large pattern group 701, and gives a misunderstanding that the symbols are fluctuating even though the symbols are stopped. can be suppressed.

In addition, by performing an effect in the closed range within the reserved memory display 704, the game machine 10 displays the large pattern group 701 up to the range overlapping the reserved memory display 704, and the stop pattern is displayed by the effect. Decrease in visibility can be suppressed. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the player from suffering an unexpected disadvantage due to the inability to confirm the stop symbol.

A display screen 730 shown in FIG. 108(b) is an example of the display screen during symbol variation in which the look-ahead effect is being performed. The display screen 730 is a display in which a look-ahead effect is performed on the first reserved memory display 704 of the two reserved memory displays 704 displayed in the reserved display 703 of the display screen 710 shown in FIG. 107(b). showing the screen.

The display screen 730 includes a large symbol group 701, a pending digestion display 702, a pending display 703, a pending storage display 704, a special figure 1 pending number display 705, and a special figure 2 pending number display 706.
On the display screen 730, a look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the first reserved memory display 704 is performed within the reserved memory display 704 and outside the reserved memory display 704, and the display mode of the reserved memory display 704 is changed. to show how it is. The look-ahead effects performed within the reserved memory display 704 and outside the reserved memory display 704 include, for example, effects using animation (effects) and effects using characters and the like.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform the look-ahead effect within the reserved memory display 704 and outside the reserved memory display 704 when performing the look-ahead effect during the symbol variation. According to this, the game machine 10 can perform various effects as compared with the case where the look-ahead effect is performed in the closed range in the reservation storage display 704.例文帳に追加As a result, the game machine 10 can improve interest in the look-ahead effect performed in the reserved memory display 704 .

In this way, the game machine 10 performs the prefetch effect in the closed range in the reserved memory display 704 when the symbols are stopped, so that while performing the prefetch effect in the reserved memory display 704, in the large pattern group 701 It is possible to easily confirm the stop pattern. In addition, the gaming machine 10 performs a prefetch effect within the reserved memory display 704 and outside the reserved memory display 704 when the symbols are fluctuating, thereby suppressing the deterioration of the visibility of the stop symbols (ensuring the visibility). ) and enhancement of interest can be compatible.

According to one point of view, the gaming machine 10 sets the change range of the display mode of the reserved memory display 704 to a limited state while the symbols are stopped, and sets the change range of the display mode of the reserved memory display 704 to a non-limiting state while the symbols are changing. Restricted state.

Next, a timing chart showing an example of the execution flow of the look-ahead effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart of execution timing of the look-ahead effect of the first embodiment. The timing chart shown in FIG. 109(1) shows an example of the case where the look-ahead effect is performed during symbol variation. The timing chart shown in FIG. 109(2) shows an example of the case where the look-ahead effect is performed while the symbols are stopped. The timing chart shown in FIG. 109(3) shows an example of the case where the look-ahead effect is performed while the symbols are fluctuating and the symbols are stopped.

109, the N−1th variation display is completed at timing T1, the Nth variation display is started, the Nth variation display is completed at timing T7, and the N+1th variation display is completed. shall be started. Also, in the N-th variable display, the pattern fluctuates from the timing T1 to the timing T4, and the pattern stops from the timing T4 to the timing T7.

In addition, the game control device 100 performs prior determination (see FIG. 26) of the random number value stored corresponding to the pending starting memory (holding memory) at the start of the N-th fluctuation display (timing T1), Effect control device 300 shall receive a look-ahead system command at the time of the N-th fluctuation display start (timing T1).

Also, a display state A is the display state of the reserved memory display during the period during which the pattern is changing (timing T1 to timing T4), that is, the period in which the look-ahead performance can be executed within the range of the reserved memory display and outside the reserved memory display. Also, the display state of the pending memory display during the period during which the symbols are stopped (timing T4 to timing T7), that is, the period in which the look-ahead effect can be executed in the closed range in the pending memory display is defined as display state B.

First, FIG. 109(1) showing the flow of execution of the look-ahead effect when the look-ahead effect is performed during symbol variation will be described.
The game machine 10 receives the look-ahead command after finishing the N-1th variation display (timing T1). When the game machine 10 receives the look-ahead system command, it decides to perform the look-ahead performance from timing T2 to timing T3 within the period during which the symbols are changing based on the look-ahead system command, and sets the performance pattern (performance contents) of the look-ahead performance. decide. For example, the gaming machine 10 determines an effect pattern for effecting within the range of the reserved memory display and the range outside the reserved memory display as the effect pattern of the look-ahead effect.

The gaming machine 10 starts the N-th variation display at timing T1 to start variation of symbols. After that, the game machine 10, when it comes to the timing T2 determined to perform the look-ahead effect, starts the effect (for example, the display screen 730 of FIG. 108 (b)) performed in the range of the reserved memory display and the reserved memory display outside, It continues until the timing T3 determined to end. The above is the flow of execution of the look-ahead effect when the look-ahead effect is performed during symbol variation.

Next, FIG. 109(2) showing the flow of execution of the look-ahead effect when performing the look-ahead effect while the symbols are stopped will be described.
The game machine 10 receives the look-ahead command after finishing the N-1th variation display (timing T1). When the game machine 10 receives the read-ahead system command, the game machine 10 decides to carry out the read-ahead performance from timing T5 to timing T6 in the period during which the pattern is stopped based on the read-ahead system command, and determines the performance pattern of the read-ahead performance. For example, the game machine 10 determines an effect pattern for effecting in a closed range in the reserved memory display as the effect pattern of the prefetch effect.

The gaming machine 10 starts the N-th variation display at timing T1, that is, starts the variation of the symbols, and performs the variation of the symbols until timing T4. The gaming machine 10 stops the symbols after finishing the variation of the symbols (timing T4). After that, at the timing T5 when it is determined to perform the look-ahead effect, the game machine 10 determines to start and end the effect (for example, the display screen 720 in FIG. 108(a)) performed in the closed range in the reserved memory display. It continues until timing T6. The above is the execution flow of the look-ahead effect when the look-ahead effect is performed while the symbols are stopped.

Next, FIG. 109(3) showing the flow of execution of the look-ahead effect in the case where the look-ahead effect is performed while the symbols are changing and when the symbols are stopped will be described.
The game machine 10 receives the look-ahead command after finishing the N-1th variation display (timing T1). When the game machine 10 receives the look-ahead system command, the game machine 10 decides to carry out a look-ahead effect spanning from the timing T2 in the period during which the symbols are changing to the timing T6 in the period during which the symbols are stopped based on the look-ahead system command, and A performance pattern of a look-ahead performance is determined. For example, the game machine 10 performs an effect in the range of the reserved memory display and the range outside the reserved memory display from the timing T2 to the timing T4, and the closed memory display from the timing T4 to the timing T6. A performance pattern for performing performance within a range is determined as a performance pattern for the look-ahead performance.

The gaming machine 10 starts the N-th variation display at timing T1 to start variation of symbols. After that, the game machine 10 starts an effect (for example, the display screen 730 in FIG. 108(b)) performed within the reserved memory display and outside the reserved memory display at the timing T2 when it is determined to perform the look-ahead effect. The gaming machine 10 stops the symbols after finishing the variation of the symbols (timing T4). The game machine 10, when the variation of the pattern is finished and the pattern stops (when the pattern is stopped), the performance performed in the range within the reserved memory display and outside the reserved memory display to the performance performed in the closed range within the reserved memory display (for example, , display screen 720 of FIG. 108(a)). After that, the gaming machine 10 continues the effect performed in the closed range within the reserved memory display until the timing T6 when it is decided to end the look-ahead effect. The above is the execution flow of the look-ahead effect when the look-ahead effect is performed while the symbols are fluctuating and the symbols are stopped.

Note that the prefetching command is received at the start of the Nth variable display, and the prefetching effect is performed during the Nth variable display, but this is not the only option. For example, when a look-ahead command for the seventh pending memory display is received at the start of the Nth variable display, a position where the pending memory display does not overlap with any of the symbols constituting the large symbol group (for example, the third position ) (during the N+4th variation display), the look-ahead effect may be performed. According to this, even when the game machine 10 allows the large pattern group to be superimposed on the reserved memory display and displays it, the game machine 10 performs a prefetch effect on the reserved memory display at the position not superimposed on the large pattern group. , the deterioration of the visibility of the pattern can be suppressed.

Next, the effect pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. FIG. 110 is a diagram showing an example of an effect pattern table according to the first embodiment.
The effect pattern table is a table for determining effect patterns. The effect pattern table is set with effect patterns that can be executed for each effect timing.

The production pattern table includes the item "production timing" and the item "production pattern". The item "effect timing" indicates the effect timing ("A", "B", "A→B"). The effect timing "A" indicates that the effect is performed at the timing when the display state of the pending memory display is the display state A. Also, the effect timing "B" indicates that the effect is performed at the timing when the display state of the pending memory display is the display state B. Further, the effect timing "A→B" indicates that the effect is performed over the period from the timing when the display state of the reserved storage display is the display state A to the timing when the display state is the display state B. The item "effect pattern" indicates the effect pattern that can be executed at each effect timing.

For example, when the performance timing is "A", there are five types of performance patterns "a1", "a2", "a3", "a4", and "a5". Further, when the effect timing is "B", there are five types of effect patterns, "b1", "b2", "b3", "b4", and "b5". Further, when the performance timing is "A→B", there are five types of performance patterns, namely, "c1", "c2", "c3", "c4", and "c5".

Next, the look-ahead effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 111 . FIG. 111 is a diagram showing a flowchart of prefetch effect setting processing of the first embodiment. The look-ahead effect setting process is a process of setting the effect timing and effect pattern of the look-ahead effect when a look-ahead system command is received. The look-ahead effect setting process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. FIG. The look-ahead effect setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D66 (see FIG. 104) of the received command analysis process.

[Step D101] The control unit determines the effect timing for executing the prefetch effect based on the prefetch system command.
[Step D102] Based on the look-ahead system command and the decided effect timing of the look-ahead effect, the control unit determines the effect pattern of the look-ahead effect using the effect pattern table.

[Step D103] The control unit sets the determined effect timing and the determined effect pattern, and terminates the look-ahead effect setting process.
In the game machine 10, the effect control device 300 determines the effect pattern using the effect pattern table, but the game control device 100 determines the effect pattern using the effect pattern table and notifies the effect control device 300. can be anything. In addition, the game machine 10, for example, the game control device 100 determines the selectable options as the effect pattern, the effect control device 300 determines the effect pattern from among the options, the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 can cooperate to determine the production pattern.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 switches the display mode allowed for the reserved memory display according to the symbol variation state (during symbol variation or during symbol stoppage), so that the range within the reserved memory display 704 and outside the reserved memory display 704 It is possible to improve the interest of the look-ahead effect performed in , and suppress the deterioration of the visibility of the stop pattern (ensuring the visibility).

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can perform highly interesting presentation display without impairing the convenience of the player.
[Modification 1 of the first embodiment]
Next, Modification 1 of the first embodiment will be described. In Modification 1 of the first embodiment, a look-ahead command is received at the time of start-up winning.

A timing chart showing an example of the execution flow of the look-ahead effect in Modification 1 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 112 . FIG. 112 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart of the execution timing of the look-ahead effect in Modification 1 of the first embodiment.

112, the N−1th variation display ends at timing T11, the Nth variation display starts, the Nth variation display ends at timing T15, and the N+1th variation display ends. shall be started. Also, in the N-th variable display, the pattern fluctuates from timing T11 to timing T14, and the pattern stops from timing T14 to timing T15.

Also, it is assumed that the starting prize is won at timing T12, and the number of pending memories is added. In addition, the game control device 100 performs preliminary determination (see FIG. 26) of the random number value stored in correspondence with the pending starting memory (holding memory) at the time of starting winning (timing T12), and the effect control device 300 shall receive the look-ahead command at the start winning (timing T12).

Also, a display state A is the display state of the reserved memory display during the period (timing T11 to timing T14) during which the pattern is changing, that is, the period in which the look-ahead effect can be executed within the range of the reserved memory display and outside the reserved memory display. Also, the display state of the pending memory display during the period during which the symbols are stopped (timing T14 to timing T15), that is, the period in which the look-ahead effect can be executed in the closed range in the pending memory display is referred to as display state B.

After finishing the (N-1)th variation display (timing T11), the gaming machine 10 starts the Nth variation display to start the pattern variation. When the game machine 10 receives the look-ahead command at the timing T12 when the number of starting memories is incremented by "1", it determines to carry out the look-ahead performance from the timing T12 to the timing T13 within the period during which the symbols are fluctuating based on the look-ahead command. At the same time, the effect pattern (effect content) of the look-ahead effect is determined. For example, the gaming machine 10 determines an effect pattern for effecting within the range of the reserved memory display and the range outside the reserved memory display as the effect pattern of the look-ahead effect. The game machine 10 determines to start and end an effect (for example, the display screen 730 in FIG. 108(b)) performed within the reserved memory display and outside the reserved memory display from the timing T12 when it is determined to perform the prefetch effect. It continues until timing T13.

The above is an example of the execution flow of the look-ahead effect when a look-ahead-related command is received at the time of start-up winning. It should be noted that, also in the case of receiving a look-ahead command at the starting winning opportunity, similarly to the case of receiving a look-ahead command at the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 109), the look-ahead effect may be performed while the symbols are stopped, or the symbols may be displayed. A look-ahead effect may be performed across the period of fluctuation and the period of symbol stoppage. Also, in the case of receiving a look-ahead command at the start winning opportunity, similarly to the case of receiving a look-ahead command at the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 109), the pending memory display is not the same as any of the symbols constituting the large symbol group. It is possible to perform the look-ahead effect after shifting to a non-overlapping position.

[Modification 2 of the first embodiment]
Next, Modification 2 of the first embodiment will be described. In Modified Example 2 of the first embodiment, a look-ahead effect is performed across two or more variable displays.

A timing chart showing an example of the execution flow of the look-ahead effect in Modification 2 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 113 . FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart of the execution timing of the look-ahead effect in Modification 2 of the first embodiment.

It is assumed that the (N-1)th variation display ends at timing T21 and the Nth variation display starts, and the Nth variation display ends and the (N+1)th variation display starts at timing T24. Also, in the N-th variable display, the pattern fluctuates from timing T21 to timing T23, and the pattern stops from timing T23 to timing T24. Also, in the (N+1)th variation display, the pattern is varied from timing T24 to timing T26.

In addition, the game control device 100 performs preliminary determination (see FIG. 26) of the random number value stored corresponding to the pending starting memory (holding memory) at the start of the N-th fluctuation display (timing T21), Effect control device 300 is assumed to receive a look-ahead command at the start of the N-th fluctuation display (timing T21).

In addition, the display state of the reserved memory display during the period during which the pattern is changing (timing T21 to timing T23 and timing T24 to timing T26), that is, the period in which the look-ahead effect can be executed in the range within the reserved memory display and outside the reserved memory display The display state is A. Also, the display state of the pending memory display during the period during which the symbols are stopped (timing T23 to timing T24), that is, the period in which the look-ahead effect can be executed in the closed range in the pending memory display is referred to as display state B.

The game machine 10 receives the look-ahead command after completing the N-1th variation display (timing T21). When the gaming machine 10 receives the look-ahead-related command, the gaming machine 10 passes through a period (from timing T23 to timing T24) during which the symbols are stopped from timing T22 in the period during which the symbol is changed in the N-th variation display based on the look-ahead-related command, It is determined that the look-ahead performance is to be performed until timing T25 in the period during which the pattern of the N+1-th variation display is changing, and the performance pattern (performance contents) of the look-ahead performance is determined.

For example, the gaming machine 10 performs effects within the reserved memory display and outside the reserved memory display from timing T22 to timing T23 and from timing T24 to timing T25, and holds from timing T23 to timing T24. A performance pattern for performing performance in a closed range within a memory display is determined as a performance pattern of the look-ahead performance.

The gaming machine 10 starts the N-th variation display at timing T21 to start the variation of the symbols. After that, the game machine 10 starts an effect (for example, the display screen 730 in FIG. 108(b)) performed within the reserved memory display and outside the reserved memory display at the timing T22 when it is determined to perform the look-ahead effect. The gaming machine 10 stops the symbols after finishing the variation of the symbols (timing T23). The game machine 10, when the pattern stops changing after the pattern change (when the pattern is stopped), the performance performed in the range within the reserved memory display and outside the reserved memory display to the performance performed in the closed range within the reserved memory display ( For example, the effect is switched to the display screen 720 of FIG. 108(a).

At the timing T24, the game machine 10 finishes stopping the symbols, starts the N+1th variation display, and starts the variation of the symbols. When the game machine 10 starts the N+1th variation display and starts the pattern variation (when the pattern is fluctuating), the effect performed in the closed range in the reserved memory display and the range within the reserved memory display and outside the reserved memory display. Switch the production to the production performed with.

After that, the gaming machine 10 continues the effect performed within the reserved memory display and outside the reserved memory display until the timing T25 when it is determined to end the look-ahead effect.
The above is an example of the execution flow of the look-ahead effect when performing the look-ahead effect across other variable displays. In the case where the look-ahead effect is performed across two or more variable displays, as in the case where two or more variable displays are not straddled (Fig. 109), the reserved memory display is not associated with any of the symbols constituting the large symbol group. It is possible to perform the look-ahead effect after shifting to a non-overlapping position.

[Modification 3 of the first embodiment]
Next, Modification 3 of the first embodiment will be described. In modification 3 of the first embodiment, the reserved memory display is displayed in a smaller size than in the first embodiment so that the large pattern group and the reserved memory display are not superimposed.

The display screen of Modification 3 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 114 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 1) of the display screen of Modification 3 of the first embodiment. FIG. 115 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 2) of a display screen in Modification 3 of the first embodiment.

A display screen 740 shown in FIG. 114(a) is an example of the display screen during symbol stoppage, and is a modification of the display screen 700 shown in FIG. 107(a). The display screen 740 includes a large symbol group 701, a pending digestion display 702, a pending display 703, a pending memory display 707, a special figure 1 reserved number display 705, and a special figure 2 reserved number display 706.

A reserved memory display 707 is a reserved memory display having a smaller size than the reserved memory display 704 shown on the display screen 700 so as not to overlap the large pattern group 701 .
On the display screen 740, the large pattern group 701 is displayed within a range not overlapping with the pending memory display 707 displayed on the pending display 703 (displayed without allowing the overlapping). In this way, the gaming machine 10 displays the large pattern group 701 in a range not superimposed on the reserved memory display 707, so that the large pattern group 701 overlaps the reserved memory display 704 as shown in the display screen 700. The visibility of the stop pattern can be improved more than when it is displayed.

A display screen 750 shown in FIG. 114(b) is an example of the display screen during symbol variation, and is a modification of the display screen 710 shown in FIG. 107(b). The display screen 750 includes a large symbol group 701, a pending digestion display 702, a pending display 703, a pending storage display 707, a special figure 1 pending number display 705, and a special figure 2 pending number display 706.

As with the display screen 740 , the display screen 750 displays the large pattern group 701 within a range that does not overlap with the pending memory display 707 displayed on the pending display 703 . In this way, the gaming machine 10 displays the large pattern group 701 in a range that does not overlap the reserved memory display 707, so that the large pattern group 701 overlaps the reserved memory display 704 as shown in the display screen 710. The visibility of the changing pattern can be improved more than when it is displayed.

A display screen 760 shown in FIG. 115(a) is an example of the display screen during symbol stoppage in which the look-ahead effect is being performed, and is a modification of the display screen 720 shown in FIG. 108(a). The display screen 760 includes a large symbol group 701, a pending digestion display 702, a pending display 703, a pending storage display 707, a special figure 1 pending number display 705, and a special figure 2 pending number display 706.

The display screen 760 shows how the look-ahead effect of changing the display mode of the first reserved memory display 707 is performed in a closed range within the reserved memory display 707, and the display mode of the reserved memory display 707 is changing. .

In this way, the gaming machine 10 displays the large pattern group 701 in a range not superimposed on the reserved memory display 707 when performing the look-ahead effect while the symbols are stopped, and performs the performance in a closed range within the reserved memory display 707. . According to this, the gaming machine 10 makes it clearer that the effect is for the reserved memory display 707 than when the large pattern group 701 is displayed in a range overlapping the reserved memory display 704 as shown in the display screen 720. can be displayed in As a result, the game machine 10 misunderstands the look-ahead performance for the reserved storage display 707 as the performance for the large pattern group 701, and gives a misunderstanding that the symbols are fluctuating even though the symbols are stopped. can be further suppressed.

In addition, the game machine 10 can improve the visibility of the stop symbols more than when the large symbol group 701 is displayed in a range overlapping the reserved memory display 704 as shown on the display screen 720 . As a result, the gaming machine 10 can more strongly prevent the player from suffering an unexpected disadvantage due to the inability to confirm the stop symbol.

A display screen 770 shown in FIG. 115(b) is an example of a display screen during symbol variation in which the look-ahead effect is being performed, and is a modification of the display screen 730 shown in FIG. 107(b). The display screen 770 includes a large symbol group 701, a pending digestion display 702, a pending display 703, a pending memory display 707, a special figure 1 reserved number display 705, and a special figure 2 reserved number display 706.

The display screen 770 is a range in which the look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the first reserved memory display 707 is allowed to overlap with the large pattern group 701 (within the reserved memory display 707 and outside the reserved memory display 707). It shows how the display mode of the pending memory display 707 is changed.

In this way, the game machine 10 displays the large pattern group 701 within a range not superimposed on the reserved memory display 707 when performing the look-ahead effect during the pattern variation, and also displays the large pattern group 701 within a range where it is allowed to be superimposed on the large pattern group 701. Perform a look-ahead performance. According to this, the gaming machine 10 enables more diverse effects than the case where the look-ahead effect is performed in the closed range in the reserved memory display 707, and the large pattern group 701 is reserved and stored as shown on the display screen 730. The visibility of the pattern can be improved as compared with the case where the pattern is displayed in a range superimposed on the display 704 . As a result, the gaming machine 10 can achieve both improved visibility of symbols and increased interest.

In the above description, the reserved memory display 707 having a smaller size than the reserved memory display 704 shown in FIGS. is not limited to For example, by using a large pattern group smaller in size than the large pattern group 701, the large pattern group and the reserved memory display 704 can be prevented from being superimposed in the same manner. In this way, the gaming machine 10 reduces the size of the large pattern group 701 instead of reducing the size of the reserved memory display 704, thereby preventing the visibility of the reserved memory display from deteriorating.

[Modification 4 of the first embodiment]
Next, Modification 4 of the first embodiment will be described. In modification 4 of the first embodiment, similarly to modification 3 of the first embodiment, the reserved memory display is made smaller than in the first embodiment so that the large symbol group and the reserved memory display do not overlap. The size is displayed, and when the look-ahead effect is performed during the symbol variation, the reservation storage display to be the object of the look-ahead effect is displayed in a size that allows it to be superimposed on the large pattern group 701.例文帳に追加

The display screen of Modification 4 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of modification 4 of the first embodiment.
A display screen 780 shown in FIG. 116 is an example of a display screen during symbol variation in which the look-ahead effect is being performed, and is a modification of the display screen 770 shown in FIG. 115(b). The display screen while the symbols are stopped, the display screen while the symbols are changing, and the display screen while the symbols are stopped during the look-ahead effect are the same as those of the third modification of the first embodiment.

The display screen 780 includes a large symbol group 701, a pending digestion display 702, a pending display 703, pending storage displays 704 and 707, a special figure 1 pending number display 705, and a special figure 2 pending number display 706.

The display screen 780 displays a pending memory display 707 other than the target of the look-ahead effect, and displays the target of the look-ahead effect by a pending memory display 704 . In addition, the display screen 780 shows that the look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the reserved memory display 704 is performed within the reserved memory display 704 and outside the reserved memory display 704, and the display mode of the reserved memory display 704 is changed. indicates

In this way, the gaming machine 10 displays objects other than the target of the look-ahead effect by the reserved memory display 707, and displays the target of the look-ahead effect by the reserved memory display 704, thereby ensuring the visibility of the changing pattern and the look-ahead effect. It is possible to improve the visibility of the pending memory display, which is the target of the above. In addition, the game machine 10 displays objects other than the target of the read-ahead performance by a reserved memory display 707, and displays the target of the read-ahead performance by the reserved memory display 704, thereby making the target of the read-ahead performance stand out and raising interest in the look-ahead performance. be able to.

It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 may return the reserved memory display, which is the target of the prefetching effect, from the reserved memory display 704 to the reserved memory display 707 after the prefetching effect is finished, or may return the reserved memory display 704 even after the prefetching effect is finished. may continue to be displayed as is.

Note that the look-ahead effect performed outside the reserved memory display 704 includes expansion and deformation of the reserved memory display 704 itself, and division and movement of the reserved memory display 704 . In addition, the look-ahead effect performed in the area outside the reserved memory display 704 includes display effects (for example, flashing) outside the reserved memory display 704, characters, characters, graphics, etc. displayed in relation to the reserved memory display 704. include.

[Modification 5 of First Embodiment]
Next, Modification 5 of the first embodiment will be described. In the modification 5 of the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 displays the large symbol group within a range not overlapping with the reserved memory display (displays without allowing the superimposition) while the symbols are stopped. On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 displays the large pattern group within a range of being superimposed on the display of the reserved memory (permits and displays the superimposition) during the pattern variation.

The display screen of Modification 5 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of modification 5 of the first embodiment.
A display screen 790 shown in FIG. 117(a) is an example of the display screen during symbol stoppage. The display screen 790 includes a large symbol group 701, a pending digestion display 702, a pending display 703, a pending memory display 707, a special figure 1 reserved number display 705, and a special figure 2 reserved number display 706.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 displays the large pattern group 701 in a range that does not overlap the reserved memory display 707, so that the large pattern group 701 overlaps the reserved memory display 704 as shown in the display screen 800 described later. The visibility of the pattern can be improved more than when it is displayed with .

A display screen 800 shown in FIG. 117(b) is an example of the display screen during symbol variation. The display screen 800 includes a large symbol group 701, a pending digestion display 702, a pending display 703, a pending storage display 704, a special figure 1 reserved number display 705, and a special figure 2 reserved number display 706.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 displays the large pattern group 701 in a range that overlaps the reserved memory display 704, thereby displaying the large pattern group 701 in a range that does not overlap the reserved memory display 707 as shown in the display screen 790. The visibility of the reserved memory display can be improved more than when

In this way, the game machine 10 reduces the size of the pending memory display while the symbols are stopped, and increases the size of the pending memory display during the symbol fluctuation, thereby improving the visibility of the stopped symbols and the symbol fluctuation. It is possible to improve the visibility of the reserved memory display inside.

[Modification 6 of the first embodiment]
Next, Modification 6 of the first embodiment will be described. In the sixth modified example of the first embodiment, the superimposition mode of the large symbol group and the reserved memory display is changed according to the state of symbol fluctuation.

A superimposition mode of Modification 6 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an example (Part 1) of a superimposition mode of a large symbol group and a reserved memory display in Modification 6 of the first embodiment. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing an example (part 2) of a superimposition mode of a large symbol group and a reserved memory display in Modification 6 of the first embodiment. In addition, below, as a mode of superimposition of the large symbol group and the reserved memory display, the left symbol constituting the large symbol group will be used for explanation.

In the superimposed form of the large pattern group and the reserved memory display shown in FIG. 118(1), the reserved memory display 704 is displayed in front of the left pattern 701a (large pattern group 701) during the pattern fluctuation. While the symbols are stopped, the reserved memory display 704 is displayed on the front side of the left pattern 701a in the same manner as during the pattern change, and the transparency of the portion of the reserved memory display 704 displayed on the front side that overlaps the left pattern 701a is changed. The left pattern 701a is made high and displayed so that it can be visually recognized.

By displaying in such a superimposed manner, the gaming machine 10 can ensure both the visibility of the reserved memory display during symbol variation and the visibility of the stop symbols.
In addition, the game machine 10 changes the superposition mode of the large pattern group and the retained memory display during the symbol stoppage and during the symbol change, so that the state of the symbol variation can be clearly indicated by the superimposition mode of the large symbol group and the retained memory display. . As a result, the game machine 10 can prevent misunderstanding that the symbols are fluctuating even though the symbols are stopped.

In the superimposed form of the large pattern group and the reserved memory display shown in FIG. 118(2), the reserved memory display 704 is displayed in front of the left pattern 701a (large pattern group 701) during the pattern fluctuation. Then, while the symbols are stopped, the left symbol 701a is displayed on the front side of the reserved memory display 704. - 特許庁

By displaying in such a superimposed manner, the gaming machine 10 can ensure both the visibility of the reserved memory display during symbol fluctuation and the visibility of the symbols while the symbols are stopped.
In addition, the game machine 10 changes the superposition mode of the large pattern group and the retained memory display during the symbol stoppage and during the symbol change, so that the state of the symbol variation can be clearly indicated by the superimposition mode of the large symbol group and the retained memory display. . Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can prevent misunderstanding that the symbols are fluctuating even though the symbols are stopped.

To simplify the explanation, the positional relationship with the reserved memory display 704 has been explained using the left pattern 701a, but the same can be applied to the middle pattern 701b and the right pattern 701c. In addition, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to the relationship between the reserved memory display 704 and the large pattern group 701, and other displays such as characters, characters, graphics, special figure 1 reserved number display 705, special figure 2 reserved number display 706, etc. The same can be applied to relationships with elements.

In the mode of superimposing the large symbol group and the reserved memory display shown in FIG. 119, the reserved memory display 704 is displayed in front of the left symbol 701a (large symbol group 701) during the symbol fluctuation. During the temporary stop of the symbol, the reserved memory display 704 is displayed visually by increasing the transparency of the portion superimposed on the left symbol 701a, as in the case of the symbol variation. Then, while the symbols are stopped, the left symbol 701a is displayed on the front side of the reserved memory display 704. - 特許庁

By displaying in such a superimposed manner, the gaming machine 10 can ensure both the visibility of the reserved memory display during symbol fluctuation and the visibility of the symbols while the symbols are stopped.
In addition, the game machine 10 shifts from the superimposed mode during symbol variation to the superimposed mode where symbols are stopped by changing the superimposed mode during symbol temporary stop to the superimposed mode in which the left symbol 701a is transparently displayed so as to be visually recognizable. It can give a sense of anticipation and improve interest.

In addition, the game machine 10 changes the superposition mode of the large pattern group and the retained memory display during the symbol stoppage and during the symbol change, so that the state of the symbol variation can be clearly indicated by the superimposition mode of the large symbol group and the retained memory display. . Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can prevent misunderstanding that the symbols are fluctuating even though the symbols are stopped.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may perform the look-ahead effect in a superimposed manner in the state of each symbol variation when performing the look-ahead effect, or regardless of the state of the symbol change, the reserved memory display to be the target of the look-ahead effect may be performed. may perform a look-ahead effect by applying a superimposed mode during fluctuation.

In this way, the game machine 10 applies the changing superimposition mode to the pending memory display to be the target of the look-ahead effect to perform the look-ahead effect, regardless of the state of the pattern variation, so that the hold to be the target of the look-ahead effect is performed. Visibility of memory display can be ensured.

To simplify the explanation, the positional relationship with the reserved memory display 704 has been explained using the left pattern 701a, but the same can be applied to the middle pattern 701b and the right pattern 701c. In addition, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to the relationship between the reserved memory display 704 and the large pattern group 701, and other displays such as characters, characters, graphics, special figure 1 reserved number display 705, special figure 2 reserved number display 706, etc. The same can be applied to relationships with elements.

[Modification 7 of the first embodiment]
Next, Modification 7 of the first embodiment will be described. In the modification 7 of the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 displays the large pattern group in front of the reserved memory display other than the target of the look-ahead effect, and displays the reserved memory display of the target of the look-ahead effect on the large pattern group. displayed in front of the

A display screen of Modification 7 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 120 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 1) of a display screen in Modification 7 of the first embodiment. FIG. 121 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 2) of the display screen of Modification 7 of the first embodiment.

A display screen 810 shown in FIG. 120(a) is an example of the display screen during symbol stoppage, and is a modification of the display screen 700 shown in FIG. 107(a).
The display screen 810 includes a large symbol group 701, a pending digestion display 702, a pending display 703, a pending memory display 704, a special figure 1 reserved number display 705, and a special figure 2 reserved number display 706.

In display screen 810, pending display 703 displays eight pending storage displays 704, indicating that the number of pending stores is eight. Further, on the display screen 810, the special figure 1 reserved number display 705 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game is "4". Also, on the display screen 810, the special figure 2 reserved number display 706 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 game is "4".

On the display screen 810, the large pattern group 701 is displayed to the extent that it is superimposed on the reserved storage display 704 displayed in the reserved display 703 (displayed while allowing the superimposition), and when the large pattern group 701 is superimposed, the large pattern group 701 is displayed. displayed on the front side. In this way, the gaming machine 10 displays the large symbol group 701 up to a range overlapping the reserved storage display 704, thereby widening the display range of the large symbol group 701.例文帳に追加As a result, the game machine 10 is intended to enhance interest.

In addition, the game machine 10 displays the large pattern group 701 in front of the reserved memory display 704, thereby displaying the reserved memory display 704 in front of the large pattern group 701 as shown in the display screen 700. The visibility of the stop pattern can be improved more than the case.

A display screen 820 shown in FIG. 120(b) is an example of the display screen during symbol variation. The display screen 820 is a variable display of a special figure variable display game corresponding to the first reserved memory display 704 of the eight reserved memory displays 704 displayed in the reserved display 703 of the display screen 810 shown in FIG. 120(a). The display screen in the middle (during the pattern fluctuation) is shown.

The display screen 820 includes a large symbol group 701, a pending digestion display 702, a pending display 703, a pending memory display 704, a special figure 1 pending number display 705, and a special figure 2 pending number display 706.
On the display screen 820, the left pattern 701a indicates that the pattern is changing, the middle pattern 701b indicates that the pattern is changing, and the right pattern 701c indicates that the pattern is changing. That is, the large symbol group 701 (the left symbol 701a, the medium symbol 701b, and the right symbol 701c) on the display screen 710 indicates that the special symbol variation display game is in the process of variation display.

Also, on the display screen 820, the pending digestion display 702 displays the pending storage display 704 that is being digested, indicating that the special figure variation display game is being displayed in variation. Also, on the display screen 820, the pending display 703 displays seven pending storage displays 704, indicating that the number of pending storage is seven. Also, on the display screen 820, the special figure 2 reserved number display 706 indicates that the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game is "3".

In the display screen 820, similarly to the display screen 810, the large pattern group 701 is displayed to the extent that it is superimposed on the pending memory display 704 displayed on the pending display 703 (displayed while allowing it to be superimposed). In this case, the large pattern group 701 is displayed on the front side. In this way, the gaming machine 10 displays the large symbol group 701 up to a range overlapping the reserved storage display 704, thereby widening the display range of the large symbol group 701.例文帳に追加As a result, the game machine 10 is intended to enhance interest.

In addition, the game machine 10 displays the large pattern group 701 on the front side of the reserved memory display 704, so that the reserved memory display 704 can be displayed from the large pattern group 701 like the display screen 710 shown in FIG. 107(b). The visibility of the changing pattern can be improved as compared with the case where the pattern is displayed on the front side.

A display screen 830 shown in FIG. 121(a) is an example of the display screen during symbol stop, in which the look-ahead effect is being performed. The display screen 830 is a display in which a look-ahead effect is performed on the eighth pending memory display 704 of the eight pending memory displays 704 displayed in the pending display 703 of the display screen 810 shown in FIG. 120(a). showing the screen.

The display screen 830 includes a large symbol group 701, a pending digestion display 702, a pending display 703, a pending storage display 704, a special figure 1 pending number display 705, and a special figure 2 pending number display 706.
On the display screen 830, the eighth reserved memory display 704 which is the target of the look-ahead effect is displayed in front of the large pattern group 701, and the large pattern group 701 is the reserved memory display 704 other than the eighth which is the target of the look-ahead effect. displayed on the front side. Also, on the display screen 830, the look-ahead effect for the eighth reserved memory display 704 is performed in a closed range within the eighth reserved memory display 704, and the display mode of the eighth reserved memory display 704 is changed. .

In this way, the gaming machine 10 displays the reserved memory display 704, which is the object of the look-ahead effect, in front of the large pattern group 701 when performing the look-ahead effect while the symbols are stopped, and the large pattern group 701 is displayed as the look-ahead effect. is displayed on the front side than the pending memory display 704 other than the eighth target.

According to this, the gaming machine 10 can ensure both the visibility of the stop symbol and the visibility of the reserved memory display which is the target of the look-ahead effect.
In addition, the game machine 10 performs the effect within the closed range in the reserved memory display 704 when executing the look-ahead effect while the symbols are stopped. According to this, even when the gaming machine 10 displays the large pattern group 701 to the extent that it overlaps the reserved memory display 704 , it is possible to clearly indicate that the effect is for the reserved memory display 704 .

As a result, the game machine 10 misunderstands the look-ahead performance for the reserved memory display 704 as the performance for the large pattern group 701, and gives a misunderstanding that the symbols are fluctuating even though the symbols are stopped. can be suppressed.

In addition, by performing an effect in the closed range within the reserved memory display 704, the game machine 10 displays the large pattern group 701 up to the range overlapping the reserved memory display 704, and the stop pattern is displayed by the effect. Decrease in visibility can be suppressed. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the player from suffering an unexpected disadvantage due to the inability to confirm the stop symbol.

A display screen 840 shown in FIG. 121(b) is an example of the display screen during symbol variation in which the look-ahead effect is being performed.
On the display screen 840, a look-ahead effect is performed on the first (first) reserved memory display 704 among the seven reserved memory displays 704 displayed in the reserved display 703 of the display screen 820 shown in FIG. 120(b). shows the display screen

The display screen 840 includes a large symbol group 701, a pending digestion display 702, a pending display 703, a pending memory display 704, a special figure 1 reserved number display 705, and a special figure 2 reserved number display 706.
On the display screen 840, the first reserved memory display 704, which is the target of the look-ahead effect, is displayed in front of the large pattern group 701, and the large pattern group 701 is the reserved memory display 704 other than the first, which is the target of the look-ahead effect. displayed on the front side. Also, on the display screen 840, the look-ahead effect for the first reserved memory display 704 is performed within the first reserved memory display 704 and outside the reserved memory display 704, and the display mode of the first reserved memory display 704 is is changing.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 displays the reserved memory display 704, which is the target of the prefetching effect, on the front side of the large pattern group 701 when performing the prefetching effect during the pattern fluctuation, and the large pattern group 701 is displayed in the prefetching effect. is displayed on the front side than the pending memory display 704 other than the eighth target.

According to this, the gaming machine 10 can ensure both the visibility of the symbols that are changing and the visibility of the reserved memory display that is the target of the look-ahead effect.
In addition, the gaming machine 10 performs the look-ahead effect within the reserved memory display 704 and outside the reserved memory display 704 when performing the look-ahead effect during the symbol variation. According to this, the game machine 10 can perform various effects than the case where the look-ahead effect is performed in the closed range in the reservation storage display 704.例文帳に追加As a result, the gaming machine 10 can improve interest.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 performs the look-ahead effect in the closed range within the reserved memory display 704 when the symbols are stopped, and the reserved memory display 704 and the reserved memory display 704 when the symbols are fluctuating. By performing the look-ahead effect in the outside range, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the visibility of the stop symbols (ensure the visibility) and improve the interest.

[Modification 8 of the first embodiment]
Next, Modification 8 of the first embodiment will be described. In the eighth modification of the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 displays a display that clearly indicates the position where the reserved memory display is displayed.

The display screen of Modification 8 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 122 . FIG. 122 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of modification 8 of the first embodiment.
A display screen 850 shown in FIG. 122(a) is an example of the display screen during symbol stoppage, and is a modification of the display screen 700 shown in FIG. 107(a).

The display screen 850 includes a large pattern group 701, a pending digestion display 702, a pending display 703, a pending memory display 704, a special figure 1 pending number display 705, a special figure 2 pending number display 706, and a reserved storage display reservation. and display 708 .

A pending storage display schedule display 708 is displayed in the pending display 703 and identifies the location where the pending storage display 704 is displayed. Reserved storage display reservation display 708 is displayed for the amount obtained by subtracting the reserved storage number from the maximum reserved storage number ("8"). Since the number of pending memories is "3" on the display screen 850, five pending memory display reservation displays 708 are displayed.

On the display screen 850 , the large pattern group 701 is displayed to the extent that it overlaps with the pending memory display 704 and the pending memory display reservation display 708 displayed on the pending display 703 (displayed while allowing the overlap). When the large symbol group 701 and the pending memory display 704 displayed on the pending display 703 are superimposed on the display screen 850 , the pending memory display 704 is displayed in front of the large pattern group 701 . On the other hand, on the display screen 850, when the large pattern group 701 and the reserved memory display reservation display 708 displayed on the reserved display 703 are superimposed, the large pattern group 701 is displayed on the front side of the reserved memory display reservation display 708. .

In this way, the gaming machine 10 displays the large symbol group 701 up to a range overlapping the reserved memory display 704 and the reserved memory display reservation display 708, thereby widening the display range of the large pattern group 701. As a result, the game machine 10 is intended to enhance interest.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 displays the reserved memory display 704 on the front side of the large pattern group 701, and displays the large pattern group 701 on the front side of the reserved memory display reservation display 708. It is possible to ensure both the visibility and the visibility of the pattern.

A display screen 860 shown in FIG. 122(b) is an example of the display screen during symbol stoppage, and is a modification of the display screen 850 shown in FIG. 122(a).
The display screen 860 includes a large pattern group 701, a pending digestion display 702, a pending display 703, a pending storage display 704, a special figure 1 pending number display 705, a special figure 2 pending number display 706, and a pending storage display reservation and display 709 .

A reserved memory display reservation display 709 is a reserved memory display reservation display whose size is smaller than that of the reserved memory display reservation display 708 shown on the display screen 850 so as not to be superimposed on the large pattern group 701 .

On the display screen 860, the large pattern group 701 is displayed in a range that overlaps with the reserved memory display 704 displayed in the reserved display 703, and is displayed in a range that does not overlap with the reserved memory display reservation display 709 displayed in the reserved display 703.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 displays the large symbol group 701 up to a range overlapping the reserved storage display 704, thereby widening the display range of the large symbol group 701.例文帳に追加As a result, the game machine 10 is intended to enhance interest.

In addition, the game machine 10 displays the large symbol group 701 in a range that overlaps with the reserved memory display 704, and displays it in a range that does not overlap with the reserved memory display reservation display 709, thereby ensuring the visibility of the reserved memory display 704. and ensuring the visibility of the pattern can be compatible.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described first embodiment (including modified examples 1 to 8) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The game machine 10 includes a display section (display device 41) and a display control section (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display unit can display identification information (large symbol group 701, small symbol group, etc.) and starting memory (suspension consumption display 702, suspension display 703, etc.) in the variable display game. The display control unit can switch the identification information between a variable display state (the large pattern group 701 is changing) and a stop display state (the large pattern group 701 is stopped), and the start memory interferes with the identification information. It is possible to switch between a first display state (for example, reserved memory display 704 in display screen 720) that does not display the identification information and a second display state that interferes with the identification information (for example, reserved memory display 704 in display screen 730). In the variable display state, the first display state and the second display state of the start memory are permitted (for example, display state A), and in the stop display state of the identification information, the first display state of the start memory is permitted and the second display state is permitted. Restrict (eg display state B).

(2) The game machine 10 includes a display section (display device 41) and a display control section (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display unit can display identification information (large symbol group 701, small symbol group, etc.) and starting memory (suspension consumption display 702, suspension display 703, etc.) in the variable display game. The display control section can switch the identification information between a variable display state (the large pattern group 701 is being changed) and a stop display state (the large pattern group 701 is being stopped). does not limit the range of change in the display mode of the starting memory (reserved memory display 704), and limits the range of change in the display mode of the starting memory (reserved memory display 704) in the stopped display state of the identification information.

[Second embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be explained. The gaming machine 10 shown in the second embodiment generates (divides) windows according to the number of reach, and displays a reach effect in each window when multi reach (for example, double reach) occurs. First, the decorative pattern of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123. FIG. FIG. 123 is a diagram showing an example of the decorative design of the second embodiment.

The decorative design A is a decorative design that displays one character (number). Decorative pattern A includes patterns 861, 862, 863, 864, 865, 866, and 867. The patterns 861, 862, 863, 864, 865, 866, and 867 are distinguishable from other patterns by different display modes.

A pattern 861 is a pattern that displays the number "1". The pattern 861 includes a base 861d that has a recognizable outline as a pattern with a figure (for example, a white circular pattern), and a number element 861n that has a recognizability as a pattern with the number "1".

A pattern 862 is a pattern that displays the number "2". The pattern 862 includes a base 862d that has an external shape that is identifiable as a pattern by a graphic (for example, a black round pattern), and numeral elements 862n that are identifiable as a pattern by the numeral "2".

A pattern 863 is a pattern that displays the number "3". The pattern 863 includes a base 863d that has a recognizable outline as a pattern with a graphic (for example, a white square pattern), and a number element 863n that has a recognizable design as the number "3".

A pattern 864 is a pattern that displays the number "4". The pattern 864 includes a base 864d having a recognizable outer shape as a pattern (for example, a black square pattern) and a numeral element 864n having a recognizable design as the number "4".

The pattern 865 is a pattern that displays the number "5". The pattern 865 includes a base 865d having a recognizable outline as a pattern with a graphic (for example, a white triangular pattern), and a numeral element 865n having a recognizable design as the numeral "5".

A design 866 is a design that displays the number "6". The pattern 866 includes a base 866d having a recognizable outline as a pattern with a graphic (for example, a black triangular pattern), and a numeral element 866n having a recognizable design as the numeral "6".

A design 867 is a design that displays the number "7". The pattern 867 includes a base 867d having an outline identifiable as a pattern with a figure (for example, a white star pattern) and a numeral element 867n having identifiability as a pattern with the numeral "7".

The decorative design B is a decorative design that displays two or more characters (numbers). Decorative pattern B is a pattern for generating multi-reach (two or more simultaneous reach). Decorative pattern B includes patterns 871 , 872 , 873 , and 874 . The patterns 871, 872, 873, and 874 can be distinguished from other patterns by different display modes.

The pattern 871 is a pattern that displays the number "1" and the number "2". The pattern 871 is composed of a base 871d which is a figure (for example, a hatched line pattern) that is identifiable as a pattern, a numeral element 8711 that is identifiable as a pattern by the number "1", and a number "2" that is a pattern. and a numeric element 8712 having distinctiveness.

The pattern 872 is a pattern that displays the number "3" and the number "4". The pattern 872 is composed of a base 872d that has a recognizable outline as a pattern by a figure (for example, a pattern of crossed diagonal lines), a numeral element 8721 that is identifiable as a pattern by the number "3", and a figure "4" as a pattern. and a numeric element 8722 having the identity of .

The pattern 873 is a pattern that displays the number "5" and the number "6". The design 873 is composed of a base 873d that has a distinctive appearance as a design by means of a figure (for example, a horizontal line pattern), a numeral element 8731 that is identifiable as a design by the number "5", and a number "6" as a design. and a numeric element 8732 having distinctiveness.

The pattern 874 is a pattern displaying the number "1", the number "3", the number "5" and the number "7". The pattern 874 is composed of a base 874d which is a figure (for example, a solid color) having a distinctive appearance as a pattern, a numeral element 8741 having a distinguishability as a pattern with the number "1", and a figure "3" which is distinguished as a pattern. a numeric element 8742 having a gender, a numeric element 8743 having a distinctiveness as a design with the number "5", and a numeric element 8744 having a distinctiveness as a design with the number "7".

The decorative design C is a decorative design that displays one character (number). Decorative pattern C includes patterns 881, 882, 883, 884, 885, 886, and 887. The patterns 881, 882, 883, 884, 885, 886, and 887 are distinguishable from other patterns by different display modes.

The pattern 881 is a pattern that displays the number "1". The pattern 882 is a pattern that displays the number "2". The pattern 883 is a pattern that displays the number "3". The pattern 884 is a pattern that displays the number "4". The pattern 885 is a pattern that displays the number "5". A design 886 is a design that displays the number "6". The pattern 887 is a pattern that displays the number "7".

The gaming machine 10 can simultaneously or exclusively use the decorative pattern A, the decorative pattern B, and the decorative pattern C according to the display effect.
Next, the symbol stop rule according to the type of ready-to-win will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a diagram showing an example of the reach-specific symbol stop rule table of the second embodiment.

The ready-to-win symbol stopping rule table 888 is a table showing a symbol stopping rule for each ready-to-win type. The reach-specific symbol stop rule table 888 shows the symbol stop rule for "reach A" and the symbol stop rule for "reach B".

In the ready-to-win symbol stop rule table 888, when the ready-to-win symbol of "reach A" is "N", the last symbol stops at "N" in the case of winning, and the last symbol stops at "N" in the case of losing. "Non-N" indicates to stop. According to the reach-specific symbol stop rule table 888, for example, when the reach symbol is "7" in "reach A", the last symbol stops at "7" in the case of hit, and the last symbol in the case of loss. symbol is "other than 7" (one of "1" to "6").

The symbol stopping rule table 888 classified by reach indicates that when the reach symbol of "reach B" is "N", the last symbol stops at "N" in the case of winning, and the last symbol stops at "N" in the case of losing. It indicates to stop at the symbol "N-1" which is one symbol before the ready-to-win symbol.

Note that reach B occurs when the final stop symbol (medium symbol) is two symbols before the reach symbol "N", that is, when the symbol "N-2" is reached, and the stop symbol is one symbol before the reach symbol "N". The reach is limited to the symbol "N-1" or the reach symbol "N".

According to the reach-specific symbol stop rule table 888, for example, when the reach symbol is "7" in "reach B", the last symbol stops at "7" in the case of hit, and the last symbol in the case of loss. symbol stops at "6".

In the following, it is assumed that the decorative pattern A or the decorative pattern B is used when the reach A is displayed, and the decorative pattern C is used when the reach B is displayed. As a result, the game machine 10 can make the player perceive the pattern stop rule of stopping at the ready-to-win pattern or the pattern one before the ready-to-win pattern in the ready-to-win using the decorative pattern C (ready-to-win B). . Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can give the player a sense of expectation that the ready-to-win symbol will stop when the symbol immediately before the ready-to-win symbol moves in the ready-to-win using the decorative symbol C. In addition, the game machine 10 can remove from the player the uneasiness that the ready-to-win pattern displayed as the final stop pattern advances to the previous pattern and stops in the ready-to-win using the decorative pattern C.例文帳に追加

Next, the display effect of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be explained using FIGS. 125 to 132. FIG. FIG. 125 is a diagram showing an example of the effect flow of the second embodiment. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing an example of an effect flow when single reach occurs according to the second embodiment. FIG. 127 is a diagram showing an example of an effect flow when double reach occurs according to the second embodiment. 128 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 1) of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the second embodiment; FIG. 129 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 2) of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the second embodiment; FIG. 130 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 3) of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the second embodiment; FIG. 131 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 4) of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the second embodiment; FIG. 132 is a diagram illustrating an example (No. 5) of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the second embodiment; FIG.

[Effect flow F11] The gaming machine 10 stops and displays the symbols before the start of variation in the variation display game. A display screen 1100 in FIG. 128 (F11) shows a screen display example before the start of fluctuation. The display screen 1100 displays a large symbol group 1101, a small symbol group 1102, a special figure 1 reserved number display 1103, a special figure 2 reserved number display 1104, a reserved display 1105, and a reserved digestion display 1106.

The large pattern group 1101 is in charge of game production for the purpose of improving interest. Therefore, the large pattern group 1101 is displayed in a large size by setting a variable display area in the substantially central portion of the display device 41 . The large symbol group 1101 includes a left symbol 1101L, a middle symbol 1101C and a right symbol 1101R.

On the display screen 1100, the left design 1101L, the middle design 1101C and the right design 1101R are decorative designs A. On the display screen 1100, the left symbol 1101L indicates that the symbol is "3" and is stopped, the middle symbol 1101C indicates that the symbol is "5" and is stopped, and the right symbol 1101R indicates that the symbol is "5". "7" indicates that it is stopped. That is, the large symbol group 1101 (left symbol 1101L, medium symbol 1101C and right symbol 1101R) on the display screen 1100 indicates that the special symbol variation display game is in a stopped state (symbols are stopped).

The small symbol group 1102 is in charge of notifying the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the small pattern group 1102 is displayed in a small size on the periphery of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without interfering with the display performance by the large pattern group 1101 . The small symbol group 1102 includes left symbols, middle symbols and right symbols. On the display screen 1100, the left pattern, the medium pattern and the right pattern that constitute the small pattern group 1102 all indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in a stopped state.

In general, the large pattern group 1101 is displayed larger than the small pattern group 1102, has a high degree of freedom of display position, and can be greatly changed in its display mode. On the contrary, the small pattern group 1102 is displayed smaller than the large pattern group 1101, and has a low degree of freedom of display position (for example, fixed position).

The special figure 1 reserved number display 1103 displays the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game. On the display screen 1100, the special figure 1 reserved number display 1103 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game is "4". The special figure 2 reserved number display 1104 displays the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game. On the display screen 1100, the special figure 2 reserved number display 1104 indicates that the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game is "4". The number of pending storage that the pending display 1105 displays corresponds to the sum of the number of pending storage that the special figure 1 pending number display 1103 and the number of pending storage that the special figure 2 pending number display 1104 displays.

For example, as shown in the display screen 1100, when the special figure 1 pending number display 1103 displays "4" and the special figure 2 pending number display 1104 displays "4", the pending display 1105 is 8 pending storage display indicates that the number of reserved memories is "8".

The pending display 1105 can clearly indicate the number of pending memories of the special figure variation display game and inform the degree of expectation for the game result for each pending memory by its display mode (holding memory display displayed on the holding display 1105). On display screen 1100, pending display 1105 displays eight pending storage displays, indicating that the number of pending storage is "8".

The pending digestion display 1106 can indicate whether or not the special figure fluctuation display game is in the fluctuation display state, and can notify the degree of expectation for the game result by its display mode. On the display screen 1100, the pending digestion display 1106 has a blank (blank) inside the frame to indicate that the special figure variation display game is in a stopped state.

After stopping and displaying the symbols, the game machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F12.
[Effect flow F12] The gaming machine 10 starts variable display. A display screen 1110 in FIG. 128 (F12) shows an example of the screen display after the start of the variable display. On the display screen 1110, the large symbol group 1101 and the small symbol group 1102 are fluctuating symbols, indicating that the special figure variation display game is in the process of varying display (during symbol variation) (variation display has started).

In the display screen 1110, the special figure 2 reserved number display 1104 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 game is "3", and the reserved display 1105 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure fluctuation display game is "7". ”. In addition, on the display screen 1110, the pending digestion display 1106 displays the pending storage display 704 that is being digested, indicating that the special figure variation display game is in the process of variation display.

The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the production flow F13 when the variable display does not develop into the ready-to-win state, and proceeds to the production flow F14 when the variable display develops to the single ready-to-win state. Also, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the production flow F15 when the variable display develops to double reach, and proceeds to the production flow F16 when it develops to quad reach.

Single reach is a display effect that forms one reach, double reach is a display effect that forms two reach, and quad reach is a display effect that forms four reach. Note that double reach and quad reach are forms of multi reach that form two or more reaches.

[Effect flow F13] The gaming machine 10 stops the symbol variation and displays the variation result (loss). A display screen 1150 of (F13) in FIG. 129 shows an example of the screen display when the variation result is a loss.

On the display screen 1150, the large symbol group 1101 is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a loss, indicating that the variation result is a loss. Also, on the display screen 1150, the small symbol group 1102 is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a loss, indicating that the variation result is a loss. Further, on the display screen 1150, the pending digestion display 1106 indicates that the special figure fluctuation display game is not in the fluctuation display state (the fluctuation is stopped) by blank display.

[Effect Flow F14] The gaming machine 10 generates Single Reach. A display screen 1120 of (F14) in FIG. 128 shows an example of a screen display for announcing Single Reach. In the display screen 1120, the large symbol group 1101 includes the left symbol and the right symbol displaying "3" which swing up and down for temporary stop display, the medium symbol which is variably displayed, and the ready-to-win symbol which is "3". Indicates that reach has occurred. Also, on the display screen 1120, the large pattern group 1101 is composed of decorative patterns A, indicating that the ready-to-win state is ready-to-reach A. A detailed flow of Single Reach will be described later with reference to FIG. The game machine 10 advances to the effect flow F13 or the effect flow F17 according to the result of single reach.

[Effect flow F15] The gaming machine 10 generates double reach. A display screen 1130 of (F15) in FIG. 128 shows an example of a screen display for informing of double reach. On the display screen 1130, the large symbol group 1101 has left and right symbols displaying "3" and "4" oscillating up and down for temporary stop display, middle symbols fluctuating, and ready-to-win symbols "3". It shows a state in which a double reach of a certain reach and a reach of which the reach pattern is "4" has occurred. A detailed flow of double reach will be described later with reference to FIG. The game machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F13 or the effect flow F17 according to the result of double reach.

[Effect flow F16] The gaming machine 10 generates quad reach. A display screen 1140 of (F16) in FIG. 129 shows an example of a screen display for notifying quad reach. On the display screen 1140, the large pattern group 1101 has the left and right patterns displaying "1", "3", "5" and "7" oscillating up and down for temporary stop display, and the middle pattern for variably displaying. , a reach with a reach symbol of "1", a reach with a reach symbol of "3", a reach with a reach symbol of "5", and a reach with a reach symbol of "7" (4 reach) indicates that a has occurred. Description of the detailed flow of quad reach is omitted because quad reach is a form of multi reach like double reach. The gaming machine 10 advances to the effect flow F13 or the effect flow F17 according to the result of quad reach.

Here, the detailed flow of Single Reach will be described with reference to FIG.
[Effect Flow F14] The gaming machine 10 notifies the occurrence of Single Reach ((F14) in FIG. 128). The game machine 10 advances to the effect flow F141 after reporting the occurrence of Single Reach.

[Effect flow F141] The gaming machine 10 performs symbol variation (ready-to-win effect) with reach A. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the production flow F142 when shifting (developing) the reach from the reach A to the reach B. On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 advances to the effect flow F13 or the effect flow F17 in the case of deriving the result by stopping the variation of the symbols in the reach A state.

A display screen 1152 of (F13) in FIG. 129 shows an example of the screen display when the change result is a loss. On the display screen 1152, the large symbol group 1101 is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to the loss of reach, indicating that the variation result is loss. Also, on the display screen 1152, the small symbol group 1102 is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a loss, indicating that the variation result is a loss.

[Effect flow F142] The gaming machine 10 shifts the reach from the state of reach A to the state of reach B, and performs symbol variation (read effect) in the state of reach B.
Screen display examples during pattern variation (ready-to-win effect) in ready-to-win state B are shown in display screen 1160 in FIG. 129 (F142), display screen 1170 in FIG. 130 (F1421), and display screen 1180 in FIG. 130 (F1422).

In the display screen 1160, the large symbol group 1101 includes a ready-to-win symbol in which the left symbol and the right symbol displaying "3" oscillate up and down and are temporarily stopped, the medium symbol is variably displayed, and the ready-to-win symbol is "3". state. Also, on the display screen 1160, the large pattern group 1101 is composed of decorative patterns C, indicating that the ready-to-win state is ready-to-win B.

On the other hand, in the display screen 1170, the large symbol group 1101 has the left symbol and the right symbol displaying "3" oscillated up and down for temporary stop display, and the middle symbol displaying "2" swaying up and down. to indicate that it is likely to lead to "missing" in reach B. Also, the display screen 1170 displays the character 1107 . On the display screen 1170, the character 1107 assists the ready-to-win effect and guides the expectation level of the ready-to-win effect depending on the display mode (for example, facial expression, gesture, etc.).

On the other hand, in the display screen 1180, the large symbol group 1101 has the left symbol and the right symbol displaying "3" oscillated up and down for temporary stop display, and the middle symbol displaying "3" swaying up and down. A temporary stop is displayed by pressing the button to indicate that the derivation of the win in the reach B is confirmed. This is because the symbol stop rule for reach B is limited to the reach symbol or the symbol immediately before the reach symbol.

The gaming machine 10 advances to the effect flow F13 when deriving a loss, and proceeds to the effect flow F17 when deriving a win.
Next, a detailed flow of double reach will be described with reference to FIG.

[Effect Flow F15] The gaming machine 10 notifies the occurrence of Double Reach ((F15) in FIG. 128). The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F151 after notifying the occurrence of double reach.

[Production flow F151] The gaming machine 10 divides the window (variation display area) for displaying Double Reach, and divides the window (first variation display area) for displaying one of Double Reach and the window for displaying the other. (Second variable display area) is displayed to clearly indicate to the player that two reach is displayed in two windows (W window).

A display screen 1190 in FIG. 130 (F151) and a display screen 1200 in FIG. 130 (F1511) show screen display examples in which two windows (W windows) are displayed.
Display screen 1190 displays two windows, window 1108a and window 1108b. The window 1108a is a variable display area that displays one reach of the double reach (for example, reach whose reach symbol is "3"). The window 1108b is a display area for displaying the other reach of the double reach (for example, the reach whose symbol is "4").

The display screen 1190 transparently displays the window on the front side so that even if one window is on the front side, the other window on the rear side is not hidden. As a result, the gaming machine 10 clearly indicates to the player the number and size of the divided windows.

On the display screen 1200, the two displayed windows are partially overlapped, and the window 1108a is displayed on the upper side of the overlapped portion. By displaying the window 1108a above the window 1108b in this manner, the display screen 1200 indicates to the player that the single reach displayed in the window 1108a has a higher degree of expectation than the single reach displayed in the window 1108b. guide to.

In addition, the display screen 1200 displays a character 1107a in the window 1108a for assisting the ready-to-win effect performed in the window 1108a and guiding the expectation level of the ready-to-win effect. In addition, the display screen 1200 displays a character 1107b in the window 1108b for assisting the ready-to-win effect performed in the window 1108b and guiding the expectation level of the ready-to-win effect.

Although it has been described that the display screen 1200 guides the player as to the degree of expectation of the ready-to-win effect displayed in the two windows according to the overlapping mode of the windows 1108a and 1108b, the display screen 1200 is not limited to this. For example, the display screen 1200 may inform the player in advance of the order of effects to be performed in the two windows, depending on how the windows 1108a and 1108b are superimposed.

The gaming machine 10 divides the window, displays two windows, and after clearly indicating this to the player, proceeds to the effect flow F152.
[Effect flow F152] The gaming machine 10 divides and displays the generated double reach into single reach in each of the two generated windows. A display screen 1210 in FIG. 131 (F152) shows a screen display example in which single reach divided from double reach is displayed in each of two windows.

Display screen 1210 displays single reach in each of window 1108a and window 1108b.
In the window 1108a, the left and right symbols displaying "3" oscillate up and down for temporary stop display, the middle symbol fluctuates, and the reach symbol "3" is single reach (part of double reach). ). Further, the window 1108a shows that the left pattern, the right pattern, and the middle pattern are composed of the decorative pattern A, and the reach type is the reach A. FIG.

In the window 1108b, the left and right symbols displaying "4" oscillate up and down for temporary stop display, the middle symbol fluctuates, and the reach symbol "4" is single reach (part of double reach). ). Further, the window 1108b shows that the left pattern, the right pattern, and the middle pattern are composed of the decorative pattern A, and the reach type is the reach A. FIG.

On the display screen 1210, windows 1108a and 1108b are displayed while their positions are alternately exchanged. As a result, the display screen 1210 guides the player that two effects of the ready-to-win effect with the ready-to-win pattern of "3" and the ready-to-win effect of the ready-to-win pattern of "4" will be performed. In addition, the display screen 1210 partially overlaps the window 1108a and the window 1108b, thereby guiding the player's expectations of the ready-to-win effect displayed in the two windows according to the overlapping mode.

The gaming machine 10 displays the generated Single Reach in each of the two windows, and then proceeds to the effect flow F153.
[Effect flow F153] The gaming machine 10 performs the symbol variation of reach A (reach effect) for each of the two generated windows.

A display screen 1220 in FIG. 131 (F153) shows an example of a screen display during symbol variation (ready-to-win effect) for each of the two windows.
The display screen 1220 displays a window 1108a in which the pattern is changing (ready-to-win effect) in the state of reach-A, and a window 1108b in which the pattern is changing (to-win effect) in the state of reach-A.

In the window 1108a, the left symbol and the right symbol displaying "3" swing up and down to display a temporary stop, and the middle symbol displaying "1" swings up and down to display a temporary stop. It indicates that the state is likely to lead to a deviation.

In the window 1108b, the left symbol and the right symbol displaying "4" swing up and down to display a temporary stop, and the middle symbol displaying "3" swings up and down to display a temporary stop. It indicates that the state is likely to lead to a deviation.

On the display screen 1220, windows 1108a and 1108b are displayed while their positions are alternately exchanged. As a result, the display screen 1220 guides the player that two effects, ie, the ready-to-win effect with the ready-to-win pattern of "3" and the ready-to-win effect with the ready-to-win pattern of "4" will be performed.

For example, on the display screen 1220, the positions of the window 1108a and the window 1108b are switched each time the pattern changes between the window 1108a and the window 1108b. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 clearly indicates to the player that the pattern has changed.

In addition, the display screen 1220 allows the player to know the degree of expectation of the ready-to-win effect displayed in the two windows according to the superimposition mode (superimposition order, superimposition range, superimposition portion) by partially superimposing the window 1108a and the window 1108b. invite. For example, the gaming machine 10 can indicate that the window 1108b has higher (or lower) expectations than the window 1108a by overlapping the window 1108b with the window 1108a. Also, the gaming machine 10 can indicate the degree of expectation of the window 1108b and the window 1108a by the size of the overlapping range of the window 1108b and the window 1108a. Also, the gaming machine 10 can indicate the degree of expectation of the window 1108b and the window 1108a at the overlapping position of the window 1108b and the window 1108a (for example, upper right, lower left, etc.). In addition, the gaming machine 10 can indicate that the window 1108b derives the result before the window 1108a by overlapping the window 1108b on the window 1108a.

When the gaming machine 10 performs symbol variation in the state of reach A for each of the two generated windows, the game machine 10 proceeds to the production flow F154.
[Production Flow F154] The gaming machine 10 shifts the state of the reach of each of the two windows from the reach A to the reach B, and performs the pattern variation (reach production) in the reach B for the two windows. When the game machine 10 performs symbol variation with the reach B for each of the two generated windows, the game machine 10 proceeds to the production flow F155.

[Effect flow F155] The gaming machine 10 performs the symbol variation of reach B (read effect) in one of the two windows (hereinafter referred to as the first window). A display screen 1230 in FIG. 131 (F155) shows an example of a screen display during symbol variation (ready-to-win effect) in which the first window is ready-to-win.

The display screen 1230 displays a window 1108a (first window) during pattern variation and a window 1108b (second window) in a standby state (inactive state). On the display screen 1230, the window 1108a has the left symbol and the right symbol displaying "3" swinging up and down for temporary stop display, and the middle symbol displaying "2" swinging up and down for temporary stop display. , and indicates that the reach B is in a state where deviation is likely to be derived. In addition, on the display screen 1230, the window 1108a displays a character 1107a for assisting the ready-to-win effect performed on the window 1108a and guiding the expectation level of the ready-to-win effect.

On the other hand, on display screen 1230, window 1108b is displayed behind window 1108a in a smaller size than window 1108a, and can be displayed in a predetermined display mode (eg, translucent, low brightness, low saturation, etc.). to inform the player of the standby state.

In addition, on the display screen 1230, the window 1108b temporarily stops and displays the left pattern, the right pattern, and the middle pattern, thereby notifying the player that the effect (variation display) in the window has not ended. invite. The gaming machine 10 advances to the effect flow F156 when "losing" is derived in the first window, and to the effect flow F17 when winning is derived in the first window.

[Effect flow F156] The gaming machine 10 stops the symbol variation in the first window and displays the variation result (loss). A display screen 1240 of (F156) in FIG. 131 shows an example of a screen display when the variation result in the first window is a loss.

The display screen 1240 displays a window 1108a (first window) in which the symbols have stopped changing and a window 1108b (second window) in a standby state (inactive state).
On the display screen 1240, the window 1108a is stopped and displayed in a pattern combination mode corresponding to a loss, indicating that the variation result is a loss.

On the other hand, on display screen 1240, window 1108b is displayed behind window 1108a in a smaller size than window 1108a, and is displayed in a predetermined display mode (eg, translucent, low brightness, low saturation, etc.). to inform the player of the standby state.

In addition, on the display screen 1240, the window 1108b temporarily stops and displays the left pattern, the right pattern, and the middle pattern, thereby notifying the player that the effect (variable display) in the window has not ended. invite.

Also, on the display screen 1240, the small symbol group 1102 variably displays symbols to indicate that the special symbol variation display game is in a variation display state.
After displaying the deviation in the first window, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F157.

[Effect flow F157] The gaming machine 10 performs symbol variation (ready-to-win effect) with reach B in the other of the two windows (hereinafter referred to as the second window).
A display screen 1250 of FIG. 132 (F157) and a display screen 1260 of FIG.

The display screen 1250 displays a window 1108b (second window) during pattern variation and a window 1108a (first window) in a standby state (inactive state).
On the display screen 1250, the window 1108b has the left symbol and the right symbol displaying "4" oscillating up and down for temporary stop display, and the middle symbol displaying "3" swaying up and down for temporary stop display. , and indicates that the reach B is in a state where deviation is likely to be derived. In addition, on the display screen 1250, the window 1108b displays a character 1107b for assisting the ready-to-win effect performed on the window 1108b and guiding the expectation level of the ready-to-win effect.

On the other hand, on the display screen 1250, the window 1108a is displayed behind the window 1108b in a size smaller than the window 1108b, and is displayed in a predetermined display mode (for example, translucent, low brightness, low saturation, etc.). to inform the player of the standby state.

In addition, on the display screen 1250, the window 1108a temporarily stops and displays the left pattern, the right pattern, and the middle pattern, thereby notifying the player that the effect (variation display) in the window has ended. invite. Since the symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed on the window 1108b, the symbols may be stopped and displayed on the window 1108a.

The display screen 1260 displays a window 1108b (second window) during pattern variation and a window 1108a (first window) in a standby state (inactive state).
On the display screen 1260, the window 1108b has the left symbol and the right symbol displaying "4" oscillated up and down for temporary stop display, and the middle symbol displaying "4" swaying up and down for temporary stop display. , indicating that it is determined that the reach B will lead to a win.

On the other hand, on display screen 1260, window 1108a is displayed behind window 1108b in a smaller size than window 1108b, and can be displayed in a predetermined display mode (eg, translucent, low brightness, low saturation, etc.). to inform the player of the standby state.

In addition, on the display screen 1260, the window 1108a temporarily stops and displays the left pattern, the right pattern, and the middle pattern, thereby notifying the player that the effect (variable display) in the window has ended. invite. Since the symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed on the window 1108b, the symbols may be stopped and displayed on the window 1108a.

The gaming machine 10 advances to the effect flow F13 when deriving "loss" in the second window, and proceeds to the effect flow F17 when deriving a win in the second window.
A display screen 1154 of FIG. 132 (F13) shows an example of the display mode of "lost" in reach B. FIG. The display screen 1154 displays the stopped pattern of the window 1108a which is the last stopped pattern among the window 1108a and the window 1108b.

A display screen 1270 of FIG. 132 (F17) shows an example of the display mode of "hit" in reach B. FIG. The display screen 1154 displays the stopped pattern of the window 1108a which is the last stopped pattern among the window 1108a and the window 1108b.

On the display screen 1270, the large symbol group 1101 is stop-displayed in a pattern combination mode corresponding to winning to indicate that the variation result is winning. In addition, on the display screen 1270, the small symbol group 1102 is stopped and displayed in a pattern combination mode corresponding to winning to indicate that the variation result is winning.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 divides the window and displays the single reach in each window when the multi reach occurs, thereby providing the player with the effect of multiple reach. Thereby, the game machine 10 can improve interest.

In addition, the game machine 10 divides the window and performs an independent performance as a single reach in each window when a multi-reach occurs, so it is necessary to consider the symbol stop rule of other reach in the performance of a certain reach. disappears. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can prevent damage to the interest-enhancing effect, and can exhibit the interest-enhancing effect that should be exhibited by the multi-reach.

[Modification 1 of Second Embodiment]
Next, modification 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 133. FIG. In the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, reach fluctuations (see, for example, display screens 1210 and 1220) are performed in parallel with windows divided by double reach. 10 is different in that the reach is varied sequentially in the windows divided by the double reach.

A detailed flow of double reach in Modification 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 133 . FIG. 133 is a diagram showing an example of an effect flow when Double Reach occurs in Modification 1 of the second embodiment. It should be noted that the same configuration (including the effect flow) as in the second embodiment will be given the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

[Effect Flow F15] The gaming machine 10 notifies the occurrence of Double Reach. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F151 after notifying the occurrence of double reach.
[Production flow F151] The gaming machine 10 divides the window (variation display area) for displaying Double Reach, and divides the window (first variation display area) for displaying one of Double Reach and the window for displaying the other. (Second variable display area) is displayed to clearly indicate to the player that two reach is displayed in two windows (W window).

[Effect Flow F160] The gaming machine 10 displays Single Reach in the first window of the two generated windows. At this time, the gaming machine 10 puts the second window in a standby state.

[Effect flow F161] The gaming machine 10 performs the symbol variation of reach A (reach effect) in the first window. The game machine 10 proceeds to the production flow F162 when the symbol variation of the reach A develops into the symbol variation of the reach B in the first window, and proceeds to the performance flow F163 when the symbol variation of the reach A leads to a loss.

[Effect flow F162] The gaming machine 10 performs a symbol change (ready-to-win effect) for reach B in the first window. The game machine 10 advances to the production flow F163 when the symbol variation of the reach B leads to a win in the first window, and proceeds to the production flow F17 when the symbol variation of the reach A leads to winning.

[Effect flow F163] The gaming machine 10 clearly indicates the deviation of the symbol variation in the first window.
[Effect flow F164] The gaming machine 10 displays Single Reach in the second window of the two generated windows. At this time, the gaming machine 10 may put the first window in a standby state or in a non-display state.

[Effect flow F165] The gaming machine 10 performs a symbol variation of reach A (reach effect) in the second window. The game machine 10 proceeds to the production flow F166 when the symbol variation of the reach A develops into the symbol variation of the reach B in the second window, and proceeds to the performance flow F13 when the symbol variation of the reach A leads to a loss.

[Effect flow F166] The gaming machine 10 performs a symbol change (ready-to-win effect) for reach B in the second window. The game machine 10 advances to the production flow F13 when the symbol variation of the reach B leads to a win in the second window, and advances to the production flow F17 when the symbol variation of the reach A leads to winning.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can sequentially change the reach in the windows divided by the double reach. Although the game machine 10 performs the reach variation in the second window after the reach variation in the first window, the reach variation in the first window may be performed after the reach variation in the second window. For example, the gaming machine 01 switches the reach A fluctuation display to the reach B fluctuation display in the first window before developing to the reach A fluctuation display in the second window, and switches the reach A fluctuation display to the reach B fluctuation display in the second window. It is possible to switch to the reach B fluctuation display in the first window in the pre-development stage. In this manner, the gaming machine 10 may be configured to alternately display the first window and the second window at a predetermined trigger.

[Modification 2 of Second Embodiment]
Next, modification 2 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 134(1). FIG. 134 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display devices of Modifications 2 to 4 of the second embodiment.

A display screen 1280 shown in FIG. 134(1) displays a first window 1281 and a second window 1282 divided by double reach. The first window 1281 and the second window 1282 do not overlap each other, so that one does not hinder the visibility of the other. The first window 1281 and the second window 1282 inform the player of the derivation order of the result mode and the degree of expectation by changing the display mode of the windows. For example, the gaming machine 10 reduces the brightness of the second window 1282 compared to the first window 1281, thereby guiding that the first window 1281 derives the result mode before the second window 1282. In addition, the gaming machine 10 displays the first window 1281 larger than the second window 1282 to guide the expectation that the first window 1281 is higher than the second window 1282 .

[Modification 3 of Second Embodiment]
Next, modification 3 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 134(2). A display screen 1290 shown in FIG. 134(2) indicates that the second window 1292 is waiting behind the first window 1291 . Normally, the gaming machine 10 displays symbols before the symbols are stopped by variable display or temporary stop, but the second window 1292 is behind the first window 1291 and clearly shows the display state of the symbols. becomes difficult. Therefore, if the pattern displayed by the second window 1292 is to be specified, the gaming machine 10 may impair the effect of the variable display being executed on the first window 1291 .

Therefore, the gaming machine 10 indicates that the second window 1292 is waiting by swinging (moving display) the second window 1292 . As a result, the gaming machine 10 can inform the player that the symbol variation on the second window 1292 is in a standby state without clearly indicating the display state of the symbols on the second window 1292 . It should be noted that the game machine 10 can indicate that the second window 1292 is stopped by displaying the second window 1292 in a stopped state when the symbols on the second window 1292 are stopped.

[Modification 4 of Second Embodiment]
Next, modification 4 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 134(3). A display screen 1300 shown in FIG. 134(3) is a display on the display device 41, and a display screen 1310 is a display on the sub-liquid crystal. The sub liquid crystal is a separate display device (second display device) from the display device 41 (first display device).

Display screen 1300 displays a first window 1301 and a message 1302 regarding a second window. Also, the display screen 1310 displays a second window 1311 . The message 1302 informs the player that the second window 1311 is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 allows the player to easily check the display contents of the second window 1311 while displaying the first window 1301 on the display device 41 . Also, by displaying the message 1302 on the display screen 1300, it is possible to prevent the player from not noticing the existence of the second window 1311. FIG.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described second embodiment (including modified examples 1 to 4) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The game machine 10 includes a display section (display device 41) and a display control section (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display unit can display a variable display game. When the display control unit variably displays a multi-symbol including two or more pieces of identification information (for example, a decorative symbol B) in the variable display area of the display unit, and generates a multi-reach including two or more leeches from the combination of the multi-symbols. (For example, production flows F15 and F16), the variable display area (eg, the variable display area for displaying the large symbol group 1101) is divided into the first sub-variable display area (eg, window 1108a) and the second sub-variable display area (eg, window 1108b). ), the first reach of the multi-reach is subjected to variable display control in the first sub-variation display area, and the second reach of the multi-reach is subjected to variable display control in the second sub-variation display area.

(2) The display control unit of (1) provides a first symbol (for example, symbol "N-2"), a second symbol (for example, symbol "N-1") and a second symbol (for example, symbol "N-1") which are consecutive in the symbol arrangement in the variable display game. Variable display control is performed including 3 symbols (for example, symbol "N"). The second ready-to-win can be stopped by forming the ready-to-win with the third pattern, and by the third pattern for deriving the win and the second pattern for not deriving the win.

(3) In (1), the first reach (for example, the reach of the pattern "N") is the first pattern that derives the hit (for example, the pattern "N") and the second pattern that does not derive the hit (for example, the pattern 'N-1'), and the second reach (for example, the reach of symbol 'N-1') leads to the second symbol that derives the hit (for example, symbol 'N-1'). It is possible to stop at a third symbol (for example, symbol "N-2") that is not derived.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment will be explained. In the gaming machine 10 shown in the third embodiment, instead of diversifying effects such as increasing the number of effect modes, or in addition to diversifying effects such as increasing the number of effect modes, To perform a game performance with unexpectedness for a player.

First, the game state transition of the third embodiment will be explained using FIG. FIG. 135 is a diagram showing an example of game state transition of the third embodiment.
The game state of the gaming machine 10 includes a game state ST1, a game state ST2, and a game state ST3. The game state ST1 indicates a winning state such as a big win or a small win. The game state ST2 is a general electric support mode (during special time reduction), and indicates a special game state in which display effects are performed in the general electric support mode. The game state ST3 is a normal game state in which the display effect is performed in the effect mode A in the non-general electric support mode.

The game machine 10 makes the state transition to the game state ST2 by using the state transition trigger Tr12 when the winning action is completed in the game state ST1. In addition, the gaming machine 10 makes a state transition to the game state ST1 by using the state transition trigger Tr21 when a win is derived in the game state ST2. In addition, the gaming machine 10 makes a state transition to the game state ST3 by using the state transition trigger Tr23 when the variable display of the predetermined number of times is completed in the game state ST2.

The game machine 10 performs display effects in the effect mode A in the game state ST3. In production mode A, one variable display pattern is selected from a predetermined number of variable display patterns prepared in advance, and one variable display is performed. At this time, the game machine 10 has two internal modes m1 and m2 with different selection probabilities of the respective variable display patterns, the internal mode m1 presents the presentation mode A1, and the internal mode m2 presents the presentation mode A2. do.

Such internal modes m1 and m2 may have different rates of appearance and reliability for winning depending on the variation display pattern. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can present different game characteristics to the player by having the internal modes m1 and m2.

The gaming machine 10 determines one of the internal modes m1 and m2 as the current internal mode when transitioning to the gaming state ST3. For example, the gaming machine 10 may randomly determine the internal modes m1 and m2, for example, the internal mode m1 has a probability of 50% and the internal mode m2 has a probability of 50%.

The gaming machine 10 may determine the internal modes m1 and m2 before transitioning to the gaming state ST3, or may determine, for example, when a win occurs. Also, instead of randomly determining the internal modes m1 and m2, the gaming machine 10 may determine the internal modes m1 and m2 using other parameters such as symbols at the time of winning, date and time, operation amount, and the like.

The gaming machine 10 maintains the internal modes m1 and m2 without changing while staying in the state in the game state ST3, and makes a state transition to the game state ST1 with the fact that a win is derived in the game state ST3 as a state transition trigger Tr31. . Therefore, when the gaming machine 10 transitions from the gaming state ST2 to the gaming state ST3, the gaming machine 10 maintains the internal modes m1 and m2 without changing until it transitions to the gaming state ST1. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can present different game characteristics to the player each time the game state ST2 transitions to the game state ST3.

Since the gaming machine 10 uses a predetermined number of variable display patterns prepared in advance for both the internal modes m1 and m2, it is difficult to distinguish between the internal modes m1 and m2 from the outside in the short term. However, since the gaming machine 10 selects the variation display patterns with different selection probabilities in the internal modes m1 and m2, the internal modes m1 and m2 can be statistically distinguished from the outside by accumulating the number of samples. ing.

As a result, the game machine 10 creates different playability by distinguishing between the internal modes m1 and m2 while performing the display effect in only one effect mode A in the normal game state. In addition, since the game machine 10 makes it difficult to distinguish between the internal modes m1 and m2 in the short term, even though the game machine 10 has only one presentation mode A for the player, even if he/she has a lot of game experience, the game performance is not very large. It is possible to produce a playability that cannot be grasped. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can reduce the risk of the player feeling monotonous in the gameplay. Such a gaming machine 10 can perform a game presentation with unexpectedness for a player.

Next, the game state transition in the variable display game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart of game state transition timings of the third embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 transitions to the general electricity support mode (game state ST2) at the timing (number of rotations (variation display count) “0”) at which winning (game state ST1) ends. The game machine 10 makes a transition to the normal game state (game state ST3) after performing the variable display 70 times in the general electric power support mode (game state ST2). The gaming machine 10 normally (game state ST3) transitions to a win (game state ST1) when winning is derived in the n-th variation display.

At this time, the gaming machine 10 can take two transition patterns (transition pattern 1 and transition pattern 2). First, in the transition pattern 1 shown in (1), the state transitions in order of win (game state ST1), general electric support mode (game state ST2), normal 1 (game state ST3), and win (game state ST1). However, normal 1 (game state ST3) is one form of normal (game state ST3) and internally indicates that it is in internal mode m1. The game control device 100 can manage the internal mode and notify the effect control device 300 as a game state command.

Next, in transition pattern 2 shown in (2), the state transitions in the order of winning (game state ST1), general electric support mode (game state ST2), normal 2 (game state ST3), and winning (game state ST1). . However, normal 2 (game state ST3) is one form of normal (game state ST3) and internally indicates that it is internal mode m2. The game control device 100 can manage the internal mode and notify the effect control device 300 as a game state command.

Next, the variation display pattern selection table used in the general electric support mode (game state ST2) and normal (game state ST3) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart of switching timings of the variable display pattern selection table according to the third embodiment.

The game machine 10 is in the general electricity support mode (game state ST2) up to the number of revolutions "69", and in the general electricity support mode, the variation display pattern selection table for the general electricity support (loss) is changed by a "lost" lottery. Determine the display pattern. In addition, the gaming machine 10 determines a variation display pattern by using a variation display pattern selection table for general electrical support (winning) in a "win" lottery in the general electrical support mode. Since the gaming machine 10 does not prepare two or more internal modes in the general electric support mode, it is possible to provide the player with one game-oriented general electric support mode.

The gaming machine 10 is in a normal state (game state ST3) from the number of revolutions "70" to the number of revolutions "n-1" (however, the win is derived at the number of revolutions "n"). It is either m1 or m2.

The gaming machine 10 determines the variation display pattern by using the variation display pattern selection table for normal 1 (loss) in the “loss” lottery in the normal 1 (internal mode m1). In addition, the gaming machine 10 determines a variation display pattern using a variation display pattern selection table for normal 1 (win) in a “win” lottery in normal 1 (internal mode m1). In addition, the gaming machine 10 determines the variation display pattern using the variation display pattern selection table for normal 2 (loss) in the “loss” lottery in normal 2 (internal mode m2). In addition, the gaming machine 10 determines a variation display pattern using a variation display pattern selection table for normal 2 (win) in a “win” lottery in normal 2 (internal mode m2). Since the game machine 10 normally (game state ST3) has two internal modes m1 and m2, two different game properties are provided to the player while being one game mode externally. can.

Next, the gameplay in the normal state (game state ST3) will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139. FIG. First, the reach occurrence rate and reach reliability for each internal mode will be described with reference to FIG. 138 . FIG. 138 is a diagram showing an example of reach appearance rate and reach reliability in production mode A of the third embodiment.

The reach performance table shown in FIG. 138 (1) shows the reach appearance rate and reach reliability for each reach type in the production mode A1 (internal mode m1). In addition, in order to simplify the description, the reach type is assumed to be five types of reach 1 to reach 5. FIG. In the reach performance table shown in FIG. 138 (1), the reach type “reach 1” has a reach appearance rate “0.6%” and the reach reliability “1%”, and the reach type “reach 2” has a reach appearance rate “ 0.6%”, reach reliability “7%”, reach type “reach 3” has reach appearance rate “0.6%”, reach reliability “20%”, reach type “reach 4” The reach appearance rate is “0.01%” and the reach reliability is “100%”, and the reach type “reach 5” indicates that the reach appearance rate is “0.7%” and the reach reliability is “5%”.

The reach performance table shown in FIG. 138 (2) shows the reach appearance rate and reach reliability for each reach type in the production mode A2 (internal mode m2). In the reach performance table shown in FIG. 138 (2), the reach type “reach 1” has a reach appearance rate “0.6%” and the reach reliability “1%”, and the reach type “reach 2” has a reach appearance rate “ 0.8%”, the reach reliability is “5%”, the reach type “reach 3” is the reach appearance rate “0.2%”, the reach reliability is “80%”, and the reach type “reach 4” is The reach appearance rate is “0.01%” and the reach reliability is “100%”, and the reach type “reach 5” indicates that the reach appearance rate is “0.5%” and the reach reliability is “7%”.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 has different reach appearance rates and reach reliability levels for some reach in the production mode A1 and the production mode A2 (differences are indicated by diagonal hatching). Thereby, the gaming machine 10 produces different game characteristics between the production mode A1 and the production mode A2. For example, the gaming machine 10 produces reach 3 more frequently in the production mode A1 than in the production mode A2, and produces higher reliability in the production mode A2 than in the production mode A1.

Note that the gaming machine 10 can set composite performance as shown in the reach performance table shown in FIG. 138(3) even if the internal modes m1 and m2 are set.
The reach performance table shown in FIG. 138 (3) shows the reach appearance rate and reach reliability for each reach type as production mode A. The ready-to-reach appearance rate indicates a synthetic probability of the ready-to-reach appearance rate of the production mode A1 and the ready-to-reach appearance rate of the production mode A2, and the reach reliability is a combination of the ready-to-reach reliability of the production mode A1 and the reach reliability of the production mode A2. Indicates probability.

In the reach performance table shown in FIG. 138 (3), the reach type “reach 1” has a reach appearance rate “0.6%” and the reach reliability “1%”, and the reach type “reach 2” has a reach appearance rate “ 0.7%”, the reach reliability is “6%”, the reach type “reach 3” is the reach appearance rate “0.4%”, the reach reliability is “50%”, and the reach type “reach 4” is The reach appearance rate is “0.01%” and the reach reliability is “100%”, and the reach type “reach 5” indicates that the reach appearance rate is “0.6%” and the reach reliability is “6%”.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 sets the reach appearance rate and the reach reliability that are different from the performance mode A1 and the performance mode A2 in the performance mode A (the difference is indicated by cross hatching), and two different games are performed. performance can be produced.

Next, the reach occurrence rate and reach reliability for each internal mode will be described with reference to FIG. 139 . FIG. 139 is a graph showing an example of reach appearance rate and reach reliability in production mode A of the third embodiment.

According to the appearance rate set value shown in FIG. 139 (1), it can be seen that the appearance rate for each reach is different between the production mode A1, the production mode A2, and the production mode A (synthesis probability). For example, production mode A1 has a lower appearance rate of reach 2 than production mode A (synthesis probability), and a higher appearance rate of reach 3 and reach 5 than production mode A (synthesis probability). On the other hand, production mode A2 has a higher appearance rate of reach 2 than production mode A (synthesis probability), and a lower appearance rate of reach 3 and reach 5 than production mode A (synthesis probability).

Further, according to the reliability setting value shown in FIG. 139 (2), it can be seen that the reliability for each reach is different between the production mode A1, the production mode A2 and the production mode A (synthesis probability). For example, production mode A1 has higher reliability of reach 2 than production mode A (synthesis probability), and lower reliability of reach 3 and reach 5 than production mode A (synthesis probability). On the other hand, production mode A2 has lower reliability of reach 2 than production mode A (synthesis probability), and higher reliability of reach 3 and reach 5 than production mode A (synthesis probability).

Next, the variation display pattern selection table that the game control device 100 normally uses (internal modes m1, m2) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an example of the variation display pattern selection table in the normal game state of the third embodiment.

The variable display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 140(1) is a variable display pattern selection table for normal 1 (loss). In addition, although the reach type has been described as five types of reach 1 to reach 5, in order to further simplify the description, three types of reach A to reach C will be described here.

The variable display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 140(1) has three variable display patterns (variation patterns) as options. According to the variation display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 140(1), the gaming machine 10 allows the variation pattern Pt1 corresponding to the loss of the reach A to be selected with the selection probability “Pr1”. The variation pattern Pt1 is the command "C1" and the variation time "T1". The game control device 100 can determine the command “C1” using the variable display pattern selection table shown in FIG. As a result, the effect control device 300 can determine specific variable display content based on the command “C1” and display it on the display device 41 . The game control device 100 can make the variation pattern Pt2 corresponding to the loss of the reach B and the variation pattern Pt3 corresponding to the loss of the reach C similar to the variation pattern Pt1 corresponding to the loss of the reach A.

The variation display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 140(2) is a variation display pattern selection table for normal 1 (hit). The variable display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 140(2) has three variable display patterns (variation patterns) as options. According to the variation display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 140(2), the gaming machine 10 enables selection of the variation pattern Pt4 corresponding to reach A with the selection probability "Pr4". The variation pattern Pt4 is the command "C4" and the variation time "T4". The game control device 100 can determine the command “C4” using the variable display pattern selection table shown in FIG. As a result, the effect control device 300 can determine specific variable display content based on the command “C4” and display it on the display device 41 . The game control device 100 can make the variation pattern Pt5 corresponding to the reach B hit and the variation pattern Pt6 corresponding to the reach C hit similar to the variation pattern Pt4 corresponding to the reach A hit.

The variable display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 140(3) is a variable display pattern selection table for normal 2 (loss). The variable display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 140(3) has three variable display patterns (variation patterns) as options. According to the variation display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 140(3), the gaming machine 10 allows the variation pattern Pt1 corresponding to the loss of the reach A to be selected with the selection probability “Pr7”. The variation pattern Pt1 is the command "C1" and the variation time "T1". The game control device 100 can determine the command “C1” using the variable display pattern selection table shown in FIG. As a result, the effect control device 300 can determine specific variable display content based on the command “C1” and display it on the display device 41 . The game control device 100 can make the variation pattern Pt2 corresponding to the loss of the reach B and the variation pattern Pt3 corresponding to the loss of the reach C similar to the variation pattern Pt1 corresponding to the loss of the reach A.

The variation display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 140(4) is a variation display pattern selection table for normal 2 (hit). The variable display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 140(4) has three variable display patterns (variation patterns) as options. According to the variation display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 140(4), the gaming machine 10 enables selection of the variation pattern Pt4 corresponding to reach A with the selection probability “Pr10”. The variation pattern Pt4 is the command "C4" and the variation time "T4". The game control device 100 can determine the command “C4” using the variable display pattern selection table shown in FIG. As a result, the effect control device 300 can determine specific variable display content based on the command “C4” and display it on the display device 41 . The game control device 100 can make the variation pattern Pt5 corresponding to the reach B hit and the variation pattern Pt6 corresponding to the reach C hit similar to the variation pattern Pt4 corresponding to the reach A hit.

Thus, the variation display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 140(1) and the variation display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 140(3) differ only in the selection probability. Also, the variation display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 140(2) and the variation display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 140(4) differ only in the selection probability. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 realizes two internal modes m1 and m2 in the normal mode.

The variable display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 140 is held in the storage section of the game control device 100. FIG. Therefore, the internal modes m1 and m2 are determined and managed by the game control device 100. FIG.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform a game presentation with unexpectedness even for a player who has a certain amount of gaming experience.
[Modification 1 of the third embodiment]
In the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, the game control device 100 manages the internal mode, but the gaming machine of Modification 1 of the third embodiment is different in that the production control device 300 manages the internal mode. do. The effect control device 300 determines the effect display contents according to the internal mode within the range of the variable display pattern determined by the game control device 100. - 特許庁

Next, the variation display pattern selection table normally used by the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a diagram showing an example of a variation display pattern selection table used by the game control device in the normal game state of Modification 1 of the third embodiment.

The variation display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 141(1) is a variation display pattern selection table for normal (loss). That is, in Modification 1 of the third embodiment, the game control device 100 does not distinguish between the internal modes m1 and m2 and does not use the variation display pattern selection table.

The variable display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 141(1) has three variable display patterns (variation patterns) as options. According to the variation display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 141(1), the gaming machine 10 allows the variation pattern Pt1 corresponding to the loss of the reach A to be selected with the selection probability “Pr1”. The variation pattern Pt1 is the command "C1" and the variation time "T1". The game control device 100 can determine the command “C1” using the variable display pattern selection table shown in FIG.

The variation display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 141(2) is a variation display pattern selection table for normal (win). The variable display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 141(2) has three variable display patterns (variation patterns) as options. According to the variation display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 141(2), the gaming machine 10 enables selection of the variation pattern Pt4 corresponding to reach A with the selection probability "Pr4". The variation pattern Pt4 is the command "C4" and the variation time "T4". The game control device 100 can determine the command “C4” using the variable display pattern selection table shown in FIG.

Next, the variable display pattern selection table normally used by the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a diagram showing an example of a variation display pattern selection table used by the effect control device in the normal game state of Modification 1 of the third embodiment.

The variable display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 142(1) is a variable display pattern selection table for normal 1 (loss). In order to simplify the explanation, only the range used when the game control device 100 transmits the command "C1" to the effect control device 300 will be explained.

The variable display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 142(1) provides three variable display patterns (variation patterns) as options when command "C1" is received. According to the variation display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 142 (1), the gaming machine 10 provides three more specific variation patterns (loss of reach A1, loss of reach A2) based on variation pattern Pt1 corresponding to loss of reach A. , reach A3 is off). According to the variation display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 142(1), the gaming machine 10 enables selection of the variation pattern Pt1a corresponding to the loss of the reach A1 with the selection probability "Pr11". The variation pattern Pt1a is the variation time "T1" indicated by the command "C1". The effect control device 300 can determine specific variable display contents based on the selected variable pattern Pt1a and display them on the display device 41. FIG. The effect control device 300 can make the variation pattern Pt1b corresponding to the reach A2 loss and the variation pattern Pt1c corresponding to the reach A3 loss the same as the variation pattern Pt1a corresponding to the reach A1 loss.

The variation display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 142(2) is a variation display pattern selection table for normal 1 (hit). In order to simplify the explanation, only the range used when the game control device 100 has transmitted the command "C4" to the effect control device 300 will be explained.

The variable display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 142(2) provides three variable display patterns (variation patterns) as options when command "C4" is received. According to the variation display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 142(2), the gaming machine 10 provides three more specific variation patterns (per reach A1, per reach A2) based on the variation pattern Pt4 corresponding to per reach A. , per reach A3). According to the variation display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 142(2), the gaming machine 10 enables the variation pattern Pt4a corresponding to reach A1 to be selected with the selection probability “Pr41”. The variation pattern Pt4a is the variation time "T4" indicated by the command "C4". The effect control device 300 can determine specific variable display contents based on the selected variable pattern Pt4a and display them on the display device 41. FIG. The effect control device 300 can make the variation pattern Pt4b corresponding to the reach A2 and the variation pattern Pt4c corresponding to the reach A3 similar to the variation pattern Pt4a corresponding to the reach A1.

The variable display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 142(3) is a variable display pattern selection table for normal 2 (loss). In order to simplify the explanation, only the range used when the game control device 100 transmits the command "C1" to the effect control device 300 will be explained.

The variable display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 142(3) provides three variable display patterns (variation patterns) as options when the command "C1" is received. According to the variation display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 142 (3), the gaming machine 10 selects three more specific variation patterns (loss of reach A1, loss of reach A2) based on variation pattern Pt1 corresponding to loss of reach A. , reach A3 is off). According to the variation display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 142(3), the gaming machine 10 enables selection of the variation pattern Pt1a corresponding to the loss of the reach A1 with the selection probability “Pr14”. The variation pattern Pt1a is the variation time "T1" indicated by the command "C1". The effect control device 300 can determine specific variable display contents based on the selected variable pattern Pt1a and display them on the display device 41. FIG. The effect control device 300 can make the variation pattern Pt1b corresponding to the reach A2 loss and the variation pattern Pt1c corresponding to the reach A3 loss the same as the variation pattern Pt1a corresponding to the reach A1 loss.

The variation display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 142(4) is a variation display pattern selection table for normal 2 (hit). In order to simplify the explanation, only the range used when the game control device 100 has transmitted the command "C4" to the effect control device 300 will be explained.

The variable display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 142(4) provides three variable display patterns (variation patterns) as options when command "C4" is received. According to the variation display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 142(4), the gaming machine 10 provides three more specific variation patterns (per reach A1, per reach A2) based on the variation pattern Pt4 corresponding to per reach A. , per reach A3). According to the variation display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 142(4), the gaming machine 10 enables the variation pattern Pt4a corresponding to reach A1 to be selected with the selection probability “Pr44”. The variation pattern Pt4a is the variation time "T4" indicated by the command "C4". The effect control device 300 can determine specific variable display contents based on the selected variable pattern Pt4a and display them on the display device 41. FIG. The effect control device 300 can make the variation pattern Pt4b corresponding to the reach A2 and the variation pattern Pt4c corresponding to the reach A3 similar to the variation pattern Pt4a corresponding to the reach A1.

Thus, the variation display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 142(1) and the variation display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 142(3) differ only in the selection probability. Also, the variation display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 142(2) and the variation display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 142(4) differ only in the selection probability. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 realizes two internal modes m1 and m2 in the normal mode.

The variable display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 142 is held in the storage section of the effect control device 300. FIG. Therefore, the internal modes m1 and m2 are determined and managed by the effect control device 300. FIG.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform a game presentation with unexpectedness even for a player who has a certain amount of gaming experience.
It should be noted that the game machine 10 can also determine and manage the internal modes m1 and m2 by the game control device 100 while holding the variable display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 142 in the storage unit of the effect control device 300. . In this case, the game control device 100 may notify the effect control device 300 of the distinction between the internal modes m1 and m2 by means of a command.

[Modification 2 of the third embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine of Modification 2 of the third embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 shown in the third embodiment has internal modes m1 and m2 in only one production mode A, but the gaming machine of modification 2 of the third embodiment has two or more production modes. is different from the gaming machine 10 shown in the third embodiment.

A game state transition of Modification 2 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 143 is a diagram showing an example of game state transitions of Modification 2 of the third embodiment.
The game state of the gaming machine 10 includes a game state ST1, a game state ST2, a game state ST3A, and a game state ST3B. The game state ST1 indicates a winning state such as a big win or a small win. The game state ST2 is a general electric support mode (during special time reduction), and indicates a special game state in which display effects are performed in the general electric support mode. The game state ST3A is a non-general electric support mode, and indicates a normal game state in which display effects are performed in the effect mode A. FIG. The game state ST3B is a non-general electric support mode, and indicates a normal game state in which display effects are performed in the effect mode B. FIG.

The game machine 10 makes the state transition to the game state ST2 by using the state transition trigger Tr12 when the winning action is completed in the game state ST1. In addition, the gaming machine 10 makes a state transition to the game state ST1 by using the state transition trigger Tr21 when a win is derived in the game state ST2. In addition, the gaming machine 10 makes state transition to the game state ST3A or the game state ST3B using state transition triggers Tr23a and Tr23b when the predetermined number of variable displays are completed in the game state ST2. The gaming machine 10 makes a state transition from the game state ST2 to the game state ST3A by a state transition trigger Tr23a according to a random lottery, and makes a state transition from the game state ST2 to the game state ST3B by a state transition trigger Tr23b according to a random lottery. be able to. The game machine 10 may set the state transition triggers Tr23a and Tr23b according to a state transition rule set in advance instead of random lottery.

The game machine 10 performs display effects in the effect mode A in the game state ST3A. In production mode A, one variable display pattern is selected from a predetermined number of variable display patterns prepared in advance, and one variable display is performed. At this time, the game machine 10 has two internal modes ma1 and ma2 with different selection probabilities of the respective variable display patterns, the internal mode ma1 presents the presentation mode A1, and the internal mode ma2 presents the presentation mode A2. do.

The gaming machine 10 maintains the internal modes ma1 and ma2 without changing while staying in this state in the gaming state ST3A, and makes a state transition to the gaming state ST1 with the fact that a win is derived in the gaming state ST3A as a state transition trigger Tr31a. .

The game machine 10 performs display effects in the effect mode B in the game state ST3B. In production mode B, one variable display pattern is selected from a predetermined number of variable display patterns prepared in advance, and one variable display is performed. At this time, the game machine 10 has two internal modes mb1 and mb2 with different selection probabilities of the respective variable display patterns, the internal mode mb1 presents the presentation mode B1, and the internal mode mb2 presents the presentation mode B2. do.

The gaming machine 10 maintains the internal modes mb1 and mb2 without changing while staying in this state in the gaming state ST3B, and makes a state transition to the gaming state ST1 using the fact that a win is derived in the gaming state ST3B as a state transition trigger Tr31b. .

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can prepare two or more production modes (production modes A and B) in the normal game state, and further set internal modes for each production mode.

[Modification 3 of the third embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine of Modification 3 of the third embodiment will be described. The game machine 10 shown in the third embodiment has the internal modes m1 and m2 in the normal game state, but the game machine of the modification 3 of the third embodiment has the internal mode in the general electricity support mode. This is different from the gaming machine 10 shown in the third embodiment.

A game state transition of Modification 3 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 144 is a diagram showing an example of game state transitions of modification 3 of the third embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game state ST1, a game state ST2A, and a game state ST3 in the game state. The game state ST1 indicates a winning state such as a big win or a small win. The game state ST2A is a general electric support mode (during special time reduction), and indicates a special game state in which display effects are performed in the general electric support mode. The game state ST3 is a non-common electricity support mode, and indicates a normal game state in which a display effect is performed in a predetermined effect mode.

The game machine 10 makes a state transition to the game state ST2A using the state transition trigger Tr12 that the winning action is completed in the game state ST1. The gaming machine 10 makes a state transition to the game state ST1 by using the state transition trigger Tr21 when a win is derived in the game state ST2A.

The game machine 10 performs a display effect corresponding to the general electricity support mode in the game state ST2A. In the general electricity support mode, one variable display pattern is selected from a predetermined number of variable display patterns prepared in advance, and one variable display is performed. At this time, the gaming machine 10 has two internal modes ms1 and ms2 with different selection probabilities of the respective variable display patterns. Produce mode 2.

The gaming machine 10 maintains the internal modes ms1 and ms2 without changing while staying in this state in the gaming state ST2A, and makes a state transition to the gaming state ST1 with the fact that a win is derived in the gaming state ST2A as a state transition trigger Tr21. . In addition, the gaming machine 10 transitions to the game state ST3 by using the state transition trigger Tr23 when the predetermined number of variable displays are completed in the game state ST2A.

The gaming machine 10 performs a display effect in a predetermined effect mode in the game state ST3. The game machine 10 makes the state transition to the game state ST1 by using the state transition trigger Tr31 that the win has been derived.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can set the internal mode not only for the normal game state but also for the general electric support state.
[Modification 4 of Third Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine of Modification 4 of the third embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 shown in the third embodiment has the internal modes m1 and m2 in the normal game state, and the internal mode is fixed while in the normal game state. machine differs in that the internal mode is not fixed.

A game state transition of Modification 4 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 is a diagram showing an example of game state transitions of modification 4 of the third embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game state ST1, a game state ST2, and a game state ST3A in the game state. The game state ST1 indicates a winning state such as a big win or a small win. The game state ST2 is a general electric support mode (during special time reduction), and indicates a special game state in which display effects are performed in the general electric support mode. The game state ST3A is a non-general electric support mode, and indicates a normal game state in which display effects are performed in the effect mode A. FIG.

The game machine 10 makes the state transition to the game state ST2 by using the state transition trigger Tr12 when the winning action is completed in the game state ST1. In addition, the gaming machine 10 makes a state transition to the game state ST1 by using the state transition trigger Tr21 when a win is derived in the game state ST2. In addition, the gaming machine 10 makes a state transition to the game state ST3A using the state transition trigger Tr23 that the variable display of the predetermined number of times is completed in the game state ST2.

The game machine 10 performs display effects in the effect mode A in the game state ST3A. In production mode A, one variable display pattern is selected from a predetermined number of variable display patterns prepared in advance, and one variable display is performed. At this time, the game machine 10 has two internal modes m1 and m2 with different selection probabilities of the respective variable display patterns, the internal mode m1 presents the presentation mode A1, and the internal mode m2 presents the presentation mode A2. do.

The gaming machine 10 determines one of the internal modes m1 and m2 as the initial internal mode when transitioning to the gaming state ST3A. For example, the gaming machine 10 may randomly determine the internal modes m1 and m2, for example, the internal mode m1 has a probability of 50% and the internal mode m2 has a probability of 50%.

The gaming machine 10 may determine the internal modes m1 and m2 before transitioning to the gaming state ST3A, or may determine, for example, when a win occurs. Also, instead of randomly determining the internal modes m1 and m2, the gaming machine 10 may determine the internal modes m1 and m2 using other parameters such as symbols at the time of winning, date and time, operation amount, and the like.

The gaming machine 10 changes the internal modes m1 and m2 by triggering the establishment of a predetermined condition (mode transition timings Trm12 and Trm21) while remaining in the gaming state ST3A. The game machine 10 makes a mode transition from the internal mode m1 to the internal mode m2 at the mode transition trigger Trm12, and makes a mode transition from the internal mode m2 to the internal mode m1 at the mode transition trigger Trm21. For example, the gaming machine 10 may assume that a predetermined number of variable displays (for example, 30 times) satisfy the predetermined condition, or may indicate that a random lottery (for example, 1/30 winning probability) wins the predetermined condition. .

The gaming machine 10 makes the state transition to the game state ST1 by using the state transition trigger Tr31 that the win is derived in the game state ST3A. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 transitions from the gaming state ST2 to the gaming state ST3A, and transitions between the internal modes m1 and m2 each time a predetermined condition is satisfied until transitioning to the gaming state ST1. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can present different game characteristics to the player while remaining in the gaming state ST3A.

As a result, the game machine 10 creates different playability by distinguishing between the internal modes m1 and m2 while performing the display effect in only one effect mode A in the normal game state. In addition, since the game machine 10 makes it difficult to distinguish between the internal modes m1 and m2 in the short term, even though the game machine 10 has only one presentation mode A for the player, even if he/she has a lot of game experience, the game performance is not very large. It is possible to produce a playability that cannot be grasped. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can reduce the risk of the player feeling monotonous in the gameplay. Such a gaming machine 10 can perform a game presentation with unexpectedness for a player.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 can perform a game effect with unexpectedness to the player in a state where the game state ST3A is maintained for a long time, that is, in a state where no win is derived for a long time.

Next, mode transition timings of the internal modes m1 and m2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart of game state transition timings of modification 4 of the third embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 transitions to the general electricity support mode (game state ST2) at the timing (number of rotations (variation display count) “0”) at which winning (game state ST1) ends. The gaming machine 10 makes a transition to normal (game state ST3A) after 70 times of variable display in the general electricity support mode (game state ST2).

The gaming machine 10 normally (game state ST3A) transitions to a win (game state ST1) when winning is derived in the n-th variation display.
At this time, the gaming machine 10 can take three transition patterns (transition pattern 1, transition pattern 2, and transition pattern 3). Any transition pattern is hit (game state ST1), general electric support mode (game state ST2), normal 1 (game state ST3A), normal 2 (game state ST3A), normal 1 (game state ST3A), hit (game The state transitions in the order of state ST1). Note that the normal 1 (game state ST3A) is one form of the normal (game state ST3A) and indicates internally that it is the internal mode m1. Also, normal 2 (game state ST3A) is one mode of normal (game state ST3A) and internally indicates that it is internal mode m2. The game control device 100 can manage the internal mode and notify the effect control device 300 as a game state command.

However, the three transition patterns are different in the timing of transition to normal 2 respectively. First, the transition pattern 1 shown in (1) is normally 2 from the 101st rotation to the 130th rotation, and the transition pattern 2 shown in (2) is normally 2 from the 131st rotation to the 160th rotation. 2, and the transition pattern 3 shown in (3) is normally 2 from the 161st rotation to the 190th rotation.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 has two internal modes m1 and m2 and has various mode transition patterns by performing mode transitions. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can perform a more unexpected game presentation even for a player who has a certain amount of gaming experience.

Next, the variable display pattern selection table used in normal 2 (internal mode m2) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 147 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart of switching timings of the variable display pattern selection table according to Modification 4 of the third embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 is normally 1 (internal mode m1) up to the number of revolutions "100". The gaming machine 10 determines the variation display pattern by using the variation display pattern selection table for normal 1 (loss) in the “loss” lottery in the normal 1 (internal mode m1). In addition, the gaming machine 10 determines a variation display pattern using a variation display pattern selection table for normal 1 (win) in a “win” lottery in normal 1 (internal mode m1).

The game machine 10 is normally 2 (internal mode m2) from the number of revolutions "101" to the number of revolutions "130". In normal 2 (internal mode m2), the gaming machine 10 determines a variable display pattern using a variable display pattern selection table for normal 2 (win) in a "win" lottery. In addition, the game machine 10 uses the fluctuation display pattern selection table for normal 2 (fixed time S) in the normal 2 (internal mode m2), at the number of revolutions "101" at the first mode transition, and in the "loss" lottery. Determines the variable display pattern. In addition, the game machine 10, in the normal 2 (internal mode m2), between the number of revolutions "102" to the number of revolutions "129" at the first time of mode transition, the variable display for normal 2 (standard loss) in the "loss" lottery A pattern selection table is used to determine the variable display pattern. In addition, the game machine 10 uses the variation display pattern selection table for normal 2 (fixed time F) in the "loss" lottery at the number of revolutions "130" at the final mode transition in normal 2 (internal mode m2). to determine the variable display pattern.

In the variable display pattern selection table for normal 2 (fixed lag time S), the variable time of all variable display patterns to be selected is fixed to 8 seconds, for example. In addition, in the variable display pattern selection table for normal 2 (fixed lag time F), the variable time of all variable display patterns to be selected is fixed to, for example, 16.6 seconds.

As a result, the game machine 10 guides the mode transition timing from normal 1 (internal mode m1) to normal 2 (internal mode m2) by a variable display fixed to 8 seconds, and from normal 2 (internal mode m2) to normal 1 (internal mode m1) can be guided by a variable display fixed to 16.6 seconds. Such a gaming machine 10 can perform a game performance balanced between predictability and unexpectedness for a player who has a certain amount of gaming experience.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described third embodiment (including modified examples 1 to 4) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The game machine 10 includes a display section (display device 41), a storage section (for example, ROM 111B, PROM 321, etc.), and a display control section (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display unit can display a variable display game. The storage unit stores a variable display pattern set including two or more variable display patterns (for example reach A, B and C) and a first selection probability set including selection probability for each variable display pattern (for example selection probabilities Pr1, Pr2 and Pr3). and a first variation display pattern selection table (for example, a variation display pattern selection table for normal 1 (lost)), a variation display pattern set (for example, reach A, B, C) and a first selection probability set. A second selection probability set (for example, selection probabilities Pr4, Pr5, Pr6) and a second variation display pattern selection table (for example, a variation display pattern selection table for normal 1 (win)) are stored. The display control unit selects the first variable display pattern selection table or the second variable display pattern selection table with the transition to a specific game state (for example, normal game state (production mode A)) as a trigger, and performs a specific game. Until the end of the state, when the first variation display pattern selection table is selected, at the selection probability according to the first selection probability set, among the variation display pattern sets registered in the first variation pattern selection table , and when the second variation display pattern selection table is selected, the variation registered in the second variation pattern selection table with the selection probability according to the second selection probability set. A variable display pattern to be used in the variable display game is selected from the display pattern set.

[Fourth embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment differs in that it includes a game board in place of the gaming board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. In addition, in the description of the fourth embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted.

First, a game board included in the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 148 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the fourth embodiment.
A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 3000 . The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 3000 . In the game area 32, a center case 40 having a display device (variable display device) 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40 .

Further, a board effect device 44 is provided on the upper part of the center case 40 for effecting a game by operating it. This board effect device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 148 toward the center of the display device 41 .

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 that provides a starting condition for the normal pattern fluctuation display game. A game ball that has won the normal figure starting gate 34 is detected by a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, two general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the right side of the center case 40 and on the upper right side of the display device 41. It is The game balls that have entered these general winning holes 35 are detected by a winning hole switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a starting opening distribution device 36 (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives the starting condition of the special figure fluctuation display game. ing. The starting opening distribution device 36 has a distribution mechanism 362 , a first starting winning opening 363 , and a second starting winning opening 364 . The distribution mechanism 362 alternately distributes and guides the game balls winning from the starting opening distribution device winning opening 361 to the first starting winning opening 363 and the second starting winning opening 364 one by one. The game ball that has entered the first start winning opening 363 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3), and the game ball that has entered the second starting winning opening 364 is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 37d (see FIG. 3). detected by

In addition, on the lower left side of the starting opening sorting device 36, there is provided a normal fluctuation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives the starting condition of the special figure fluctuation display game.
The normal variable winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b that can be converted into a state in which the upper end side is turned in a direction in which it falls to the right so that the game balls can flow in easily. It maintains a closed closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which balls cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device opens the game ball to easily flow into the normal fluctuation winning device 37. It can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). A game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, below the normal variable prize winning device 37, an out port 30a for recovering game balls that did not win a prize such as a prize winning port is provided.
In addition, on the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32 and above the normal figure start gate 34, it is possible to convert between a state where game balls are not accepted and a state where game balls are easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game. A special variable winning device (large winning opening) 38 is provided.

The special variable prize winning device 38 has a single-wing type open/close door 38c that can be opened by rotating in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the side right side, and the result of the special figure variable display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how the large winning opening is closed, the blocked state (disadvantageous state for the player) is changed to the open state (advantageous state for the player). That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an open/close door 38c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device, During the state, the closed state of the large winning opening is changed to the open state, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening, and providing a predetermined game value (prize balls) to the player. It's becoming The game balls winning these special variable winning devices 38 are detected by the big winning opening switch 38a (see FIG. 3).

Also, the center case 40 is provided with a warp port 39a below the special variable winning device 38. As shown in FIG. A game ball that has flowed into a warp channel 39c from a warp port (warp entrance) 39a is guided to a warp exit 39b. A game ball flowed out from the warp exit 39b rolls on a stage 39d inside the center case 40, and part of it is guided directly above the starting opening sorting device 36. - 特許庁A game ball guided just above the starter sorting device 36 is more likely to win the starter sorter 36.例文帳に追加

In the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, of the game area 32 in which game balls flow down, the area to the left of the center case 40 is defined as the left area, and the area to the right of the center case 40 is defined as the right area. It is said that Then, the player adjusts the shooting force and shoots the game ball to the left game area (so-called left hitting), so that the game ball can be aimed at the starting opening sorting device 36, and the game ball is shot to the right game area. By doing so-called right-handed hitting, it is possible to aim to win a prize to the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38.

In addition, inside the game area 32 (here, the lower left part of the game board 3000), a state display for displaying state information in the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game that form the special figure variation display game A device 80 is provided.

The state display device 80 includes special figure 1 reserved display units 81 and 82, special figure 2 reserved display units 83 and 84, special figure 1 state display unit 85, and special figure 2 state display unit 86, which are made up of LEDs. Prepare. The special figure 1 pending display units 81 and 82 identifiably display the number of pending figures "0" to "4" of the special figure 1 variable display game according to the lighting mode. In addition, the special figure 2 pending display units 83 and 84 identifiably display the number of pending special figures 2 from "0" to "4" according to the lighting mode. In addition, the special figure 1 state display unit 85 grasps the progress of the special figure 1 variation display game by performing a variation display (for example, blinking) and a stop display (for example, lighting) in parallel with the decoration pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game. Enable and display. In addition, the special figure 2 state display unit 86 grasps the progress of the special figure 2 variation display game by performing a variation display (for example, blinking) and a stop display (for example, lighting) in parallel with the decoration pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game. Enable and display.

In addition, outside the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 3000), the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that form the special figure fluctuation display game, and the prize to the normal figure start gate 34 are displayed. A collective display device 50 is provided for displaying a general pattern variation display game used as a trigger and for displaying various types of information.

The collective display device 50 includes a special figure 1 symbol display unit 51 made up of LEDs, a special figure 1 reserved display unit 52, a general figure symbol display unit 55, a general figure reservation display unit 56 and a state display unit 57, A special figure 2 reserved display unit 58 is provided. In addition, the collective display device 50 is provided with a special figure 1 symbol display portion 53 and a special figure 2 symbol display portion 54, which are configured by 7-segment LEDs.

Next, the decorative design of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 149. FIG. FIG. 149 is a diagram showing an example of the decorative design of the fourth embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 can display a decorative pattern A and a decorative pattern B. The decorative symbol A is a symbol displayed during variable display in the special figure variable display game, and the decorative symbol B is a symbol displayed during a win in the special figure variable display game. The gaming machine 10 performs a variable display using the decorative symbol A in the winning derivation process, and performs a variable display using the decorative symbol B in the performance during the winning.

The decorative design A is a decorative design that displays one character (number). Decorative pattern A includes patterns 1321, 1322, 1323, 1324, 1325, 1326, and 1327. The patterns 1321 to 1327 are distinguishable from other patterns due to their different display modes.

A pattern 1321 is a pattern that displays the number "1". A pattern 1322 is a pattern that displays the number "2". A pattern 1323 is a pattern that displays the number "3". A pattern 1324 is a pattern that displays the number "4". A pattern 1325 is a pattern that displays the number "5". A pattern 1326 is a pattern that displays the number "6". A pattern 1327 is a pattern that displays the number "7". Designs 1321 to 1327 are identifiable as designs due to the general shape formed by a collection of graphic elements (for example, petal patterns) 1320 .

Decorative design B is a decorative design that displays one character (Chinese character). The decorative pattern B includes patterns 1331, 1332, 1333, 1334, and 1335. The patterns 1331 to 1335 are distinguishable from other patterns due to their different display modes.

The pattern 1331 is a pattern displaying the Chinese character "sakura". The pattern 1332 is a pattern displaying the Chinese character "flower". The pattern 1333 is a pattern displaying the Chinese character "treasure". A pattern 1334 is a pattern that displays the Chinese character "moon". The pattern 1335 is a pattern that displays the Chinese character "light". Designs 1331 to 1335 are identifiable as designs due to the general shape formed by a collection of graphic elements (for example, petal patterns) 1330 .

In this way, the gaming machine 10 gives completely different identifiability to the decorative symbols A and B, thereby reducing the possibility of confusion between the decorative symbols A and B.例文帳に追加For example, since the decorative pattern A has identifiability by numbers and the decorative pattern B has identifiability by kanji characters, confusion from appearance is eliminated. In addition, since the decorative pattern A and the decorative pattern B do not include the same name of the pattern, confusion in the sound effects and the like is eliminated. In addition, since the decorative pattern A and the decorative pattern B do not include patterns that have the same concept, confusion can be eliminated more reliably.

Next, the configuration of the variable display screen using the decorative pattern A in the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display screen using decorative pattern A in the display device of the fourth embodiment.

A display screen 1340 shown in FIG. 150(1) is the display content of the display device 41 during symbol stop in the variable display game. The display screen 1340 includes two sets of decorative symbols, a special figure 1 reserved number display 1343, a special figure 2 reserved number display 1344, a reserved display 1345, and a reserved digestion display 1346 in the display contents.

The two sets of decorative patterns include a large pattern group 1341 as a first decorative pattern and a small pattern group 1342 as a second decorative pattern. The large pattern group 1341 is in charge of game production for the purpose of improving interest. Therefore, the large pattern group 1341 is displayed largely in the substantially central portion of the display device 41 . The large symbol group 1341 includes a left symbol 1341L, a middle symbol 1341C and a right symbol 1341R. The left symbol 1341L, the middle symbol 1341C and the right symbol 1341R on the display screen 1340 all indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in the symbol stop state.

Generally, the large symbol group 1341 starts changing in the order of the left symbol 1341L, the right symbol 1341R and the middle symbol 1341C, and stops (including temporary stop) in the order of the left symbol 1341L, the right symbol 1341R and the middle symbol 1341C. Therefore, in many cases, the large symbol group 1341 forms a reach state with the left symbol 1341L and the right symbol 1341R, and waits for the stop of the middle symbol 1341C to enable the formation of the hit state.

The symbols (the left symbol 1341L, the middle symbol 1341C and the right symbol 1341R) constituting the large symbol group 1341 are displayed using the decorative symbol A and are not displayed using the decorative symbol B.
The small symbol group 1342 is in charge of notifying the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the small pattern group 1342 is displayed in a small size on the periphery of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without interfering with the display performance by the large pattern group 1341 . The small symbol group 1342 includes left symbols, medium symbols and right symbols. The left symbols, medium symbols, and right symbols in the small symbol group 1342 on the display screen 1340 all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol stop state.

In general, the large pattern group 1341 is displayed larger than the small pattern group 1342, has a high degree of freedom in display position, and can be greatly changed in its display mode. On the contrary, the small pattern group 1342 is displayed smaller than the large pattern group 1341, and the degree of freedom of the display position is low (for example, the position is fixed).

The special figure 1 reserved number display 1343 displays the number of reserved memories (the number of starting memories) of the special figure 1 game. The special figure 2 pending number display 1344 displays the number of pending memories of the special figure 2 game. The pending display 1345 can clearly indicate the number of pending memories of the special figure fluctuation display game and inform the degree of expectation for the game result for each pending memory depending on the display mode. The number of pending storage that the pending display 1345 displays corresponds to the sum of the number of pending storage that the special figure 1 pending number display 1343 displays and the number of pending storage that the special figure 2 pending number display 1344 displays. The pending digestion display 1346 can indicate, by its display mode, that the special figure variation display game is in a variation display state and can notify the degree of expectation for the game result.

On the display screen 1340, the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game indicated by the special figure 1 reserved number display 1343 is "0", and the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 game indicated by the special figure 2 reserved number display 1344 is "0". Therefore, the pending storage count indicated by the pending display 1345 is also "0". Moreover, the display screen 1340 shows that the special figure variation display game is in the process of design stop by the pending digestion display 1346 .

Also, in the gaming machine 10, the large symbol group 1341 and the small symbol group 1342 are each composed of 3-digit symbols, but any number of digits may be used as long as they include one or more symbols. In the gaming machine 10, the large symbol group 1341 and the small symbol group 1342 have the same number of symbol digits, but the large symbol group 1341 and the small symbol group 1342 have different symbol digit numbers. good too.

Also, the gaming machine 10 may change the transparency of the large symbol group 1341 (for example, change the transparency from 0% to 50%) between variable display and stop display, or during variable display. For the small pattern group 1342, the transparency of the pattern can be fixed (for example, the transparency is fixed to 0%). As a result, the gaming machine 10 can ensure the visibility of the small symbol group 1342 while ensuring the diversity of the display effects of the large symbol group 1341, thereby facilitating the player's understanding of the game state.

A display screen 1347 shown in FIG. 150(2) is the display contents of the display device 41 during symbol variation in the variation display game. On the display screen 1347, the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game indicated by the special figure 1 reserved number display 1343 is "1", and the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 game indicated by the special figure 2 reserved number display 1344 is "0". Therefore, the number of pending memories indicated by the pending display 1345 is also "1". In addition, the display screen 1347 shows that the special figure variation display game is in the process of pattern variation by the pending digestion display 1346 . The left symbol 1341L, the middle symbol 1341C and the right symbol 1341R on the display screen 1347 all indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in the symbol variation state. In addition, the left pattern, the middle pattern and the right pattern in the small pattern group 1342 on the display screen 1347 all indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in the pattern variation state.

Next, the jackpots that can be derived by the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 151 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot list according to the fourth embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 prepares a plurality of types of jackpots that can be derived from the special figure 1 variation display game or the special figure 2 variation display game. For example, the gaming machine 10 has "S bonus", "A bonus 1", "A bonus 2", "B bonus", "C bonus 1", "C bonus 2", "C bonus 3", "D bonus 1", "D bonus 2", "D bonus 3", and "D bonus 4" are prepared.

The "S bonus" is a jackpot with the largest game value that can be given to a player. The "S bonus" accompanies a probability change after the end of the big win, and the number of rounds is controlled to be "16", the number of rounds to be apparently "16", and the number of prize balls to be obtained is "2000". The number of control rounds is the number of rounds in terms of game control, the apparent number of rounds is the number of rounds in which prize balls can actually be obtained, and in one aspect the number of rounds perceived by the player. . For example, even if the number of rounds for a big hit is "16" in terms of control, if there are "8" rounds in which the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short and it is not possible to obtain prize balls, the apparent number of rounds is It becomes "8".

The "A bonus 1" is a jackpot whose game value that can be given to the player is about half that of the "S bonus". "A bonus 1" accompanies a probability change after the end of the big win, and the number of rounds is controlled to be "16", the apparent number of rounds is "8", and the number of winning balls is "1000".

The "A bonus 2" is a big win in which the game value that can be given to the player is equivalent to two times of the "A bonus 1". "A bonus 2" is accompanied by probability fluctuation after the end of the big hit, the number of control rounds is "16", the apparent number of rounds is "16 (=8 x 2)", and the number of prize balls is "2000 (=1000 x 2)". ” can be obtained. "A bonus 2" produces a big hit equivalent to two rounds of "A bonus 1" with two sets of apparently round number "8".

The "B bonus" is a big hit (probability) that has almost no game value that can be given to the player, but is accompanied by probability fluctuations. The "B bonus" sets the number of control rounds to "8", the apparent number of rounds to "0", and the number of obtainable prize balls to "0".

"C bonus 1" accompanies a probability change after the end of the big win, the number of control rounds is set to "16", the apparent number of rounds is set to "15", and the number of prize balls to be obtained is "1800". "C bonus 2" accompanies a probability change after the end of the big win, the number of rounds is controlled to be "16", the apparent number of rounds is "8", and the number of prize balls to be obtained is "1000". "C bonus 3" does not accompany a probability change after the big win (usually), the number of rounds is controlled to be "8", the apparent number of rounds is "7", and the number of prize balls to be obtained is "600".

"D bonus 1" accompanies a probability change after the end of the big win, the number of control rounds is set to "16", the apparent number of rounds is set to "15", and the number of prize balls to be obtained is "1800". The "D bonus 2" is accompanied by a probability change after the end of the big win, and the number of control rounds is set to "8", the apparent number of rounds is set to "7", and the number of prize balls to be obtained is "600". "D bonus 3" does not accompany a probability change after the big win (usually), the number of control rounds is set to "16", the apparent number of rounds is set to "15", and the number of prize balls to be obtained is "1800". "D bonus 4" does not accompany a probability change after the big win (usually), the number of control rounds is set to "8", the apparent number of rounds is set to "7", and the number of prize balls to be obtained is "600".

The game machine 10 produces various game properties by preparing a plurality of types of big wins. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can increase the apparent number of big wins by using the "A bonus 1" and the "A bonus 2" as compared with the number of big wins in terms of control.

Next, the number of big hits in terms of control and the number of apparent big wins in the continuous occurrence of "A bonus 1" and "A bonus 2" will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an example of occurrence of "A bonus 1" and "A bonus 2" in the fourth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 can produce “A bonus 1” and “A bonus 2” as an apparent jackpot type (apparent jackpot type) “effect bonus”. One "A bonus 1" corresponds to one "production bonus", and one "A bonus 2" corresponds to two "production bonuses".

For example, the gaming machine 10 continuously generates the "effect bonus" three times, and makes it possible to acquire the number of prize balls "1000" with each "effect bonus". Such a three-time "effect bonus" can take three forms as a control jackpot.

According to the first control jackpot mode (actual jackpot type example 1), three "effect bonuses" can be realized by generating three "A bonuses 1". Further, according to the second control jackpot mode (actual jackpot type example 2), the three "production bonuses" are one "A bonus 1" that occurs first and one time that occurs later. It can be realized by "A bonus 2". Further, according to the third control jackpot mode (actual jackpot type example 3), the three "production bonuses" are one "A bonus 2" that occurs first and one time that occurs later. It can be realized by "A bonus 1".

In real jackpot type example 1, the number of big hits in control and the apparent number of jackpots match, but in real jackpot type example 2 and real jackpot type example 3, the number of jackpots in control is compared to the apparent number of hits. The number of jackpots is large. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can improve the frequency with which the player experiences the continuous occurrence of big wins.

Next, description will be given of the procedures for executing the effects of "A bonus 1" and "A bonus 2" that make it possible to produce a mismatch between the number of big wins under control and the number of apparent big wins. First, the effect execution procedure of "A bonus 1" will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 153 is a diagram showing an example of an effect execution procedure for "A bonus 1" of the fourth embodiment.

"A Bonus 1" has a control state that starts with a fanfare (FAN), progresses from 1 round (1R) to 16 rounds (16R) with an interval (INT) between the rounds, and then reaches the ending (END). Also, "A Bonus 1" starts with "Fanfare Effect 1 (FAN1)" and ends with "Ending 2 (END 2)" with "Round Music Selection Effect" and "Selected Music and Corresponding Movie Effect". It has a jackpot performance.

"A bonus 1" realizes one "performance bonus" by a big hit performance from "FAN1" to "END2". "A bonus 1" is the following time value for each control state during the big hit in order to realize one "effect bonus" from the number of control rounds "16" and the apparent number of rounds "8". set.

The game machine 10 sets the fanfare time to 12 seconds, and presents the beginning of one "presentation bonus" here. The gaming machine 10 sets the maximum round time corresponding to the opening time of the big winning hole from 1R to 8R to 29 seconds at the maximum, and makes it possible to acquire the number of prize balls "1000". Also, the gaming machine 10 sets the interval time from 1R to 8R to 2 seconds each. As a result, the gaming machine 10 secures a maximum of 62 (=29×2+2×2) seconds of “round music selection effect” time from the start of the 1R to the start of the 3R. Also, the gaming machine 10 secures a maximum of 184 (=29×6+2×5) seconds of “selected song and corresponding movie effect” time from the start of 3rd round to the end of 8th round. In addition, the gaming machine 10 secures “END2” time of 14.6 (=2+0.1×8+1.4×7+2) seconds from the end of 8R to the end of END.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can produce one "effect bonus" by one "A bonus 1" without making the player feel uncomfortable.
The game machine 10 performs 0.1 second short opening eight times from the end of the 8R to the end of the END, but it may be a guaranteed short opening that guarantees the minimum winning number (for example, 1). . For example, the gaming machine 10 can set an opening time (for example, 10 seconds) long enough to win a prize, and achieve a guaranteed short opening by controlling the opening of a prize opening that is closed when the minimum number of prizes has been won. Also, the gaming machine 10 may be provided with a prize winning guiding structure that guides game balls one by one to the vicinity of the winning hole, thereby assisting the winning of the large winning hole during short opening. In addition, the game machine 10 has a ball force suppression structure that reduces the falling force of the game ball by surface treatment (for example, surface treatment that increases friction) on the game board surface and the rolling surface, and force reducing members (for example, uneven portions). By doing so, it is possible to assist the player to win a prize in the big prize-winning opening during the opening of the short.

Next, the effect execution procedure of "A bonus 2" will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 154 is a diagram showing an example of an effect execution procedure of "A bonus 2" of the fourth embodiment.
"A Bonus 2" has a control state that starts with a fanfare (FAN), progresses from the first round (1R) to 16 rounds (16R) with an interval (INT) between rounds, and then reaches the ending (END). In addition, "A Bonus 2" starts with "Fanfare Effect 1 (FAN1)", sandwiches the first "round song selection effect" and the first "selected song and corresponding movie effect", and ends with "ending 1 (END 1)” has a big hit effect. In addition, "A bonus 2" starts with "Fanfare effect 2 (FAN2)" after "END 1" through "Bonus variation effect", the second "round song selection effect", and the second "selection effect". It has a jackpot effect leading to 'Ending 2 (END 2)' with a song and a corresponding movie effect in between.

"A bonus 2" realizes the first "production bonus" by the big hit production from "FAN1" to "END1", and the second "production bonus" by the big hit production from "FAN2" to "END2". come true. "A bonus 2" is the number of control rounds "16", the apparent number of rounds "16 (= 8 × 2)", in order to achieve two "production bonuses" in each control state during the big hit Setting time values such as:

The gaming machine 10 sets the fanfare time to 12 seconds, and presents the beginning of the first "presentation bonus" here. The gaming machine 10 sets the maximum round time corresponding to the opening time of the big winning hole from 1R to 8R to 29 seconds at the maximum, and makes it possible to acquire the number of prize balls "1000". Also, the gaming machine 10 sets the interval time from 1R to 8R to 2 seconds each. As a result, the gaming machine 10 secures a maximum of 62 (=29×2+2×2) seconds of “round music selection effect” time from the start of the 1R to the start of the 3R. Also, the gaming machine 10 secures a maximum of 184 (=29×6+2×5) seconds of “selected song and corresponding movie effect” time from the start of 3rd round to the end of 8th round. In addition, the game machine 10 secures 26.3 (=6+0.1×3+10×2) seconds from the end of the 8th round to the middle of the 9th round, and allocates them to the "END 1" time and the "fluctuation presentation during bonus" time. In addition, the gaming machine 10 reserves 12.1 (=6×2+0.1) seconds in the middle of 9R and uses them for the “FAN2” time.

The game machine 10 sets the round time corresponding to the substantial winning opening opening time to 27 seconds at maximum for 9R, and sets the round time corresponding to the opening time to opening the large winning opening to 29 seconds at maximum for 10R to 16R. Furthermore, the number of prize balls "1000" can be obtained. Also, the game machine 10 sets the interval time from 9R to 16R to 2 seconds each. As a result, the game machine 10 secures a maximum of 60 (=27+29+2×2) seconds of "round music selection effect" time from the middle of 9R (27 seconds open start in 9R) to before the start of 11R. In addition, the game machine 10 secures a maximum of 184 (=29×6+2×5) seconds of “selected song and corresponding movie effect” time from the start of the 11th round to the end of the 16th round. In addition, the gaming machine 10 secures the "END2" time of 12 seconds from the end of 16R to the end of END.

In addition, the game machine 10, for 9R of "A bonus 2", opens the large winning opening for 0.1 seconds (short opening) four times, opens the large winning opening for 27 seconds (long opening), and A period (WAIT) for closing the big winning opening for four times is set. The first two WAITs are set to 10 seconds and the last two to 6 seconds.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can produce two "effect bonuses" with one "A bonus 2" without making the player feel uncomfortable.
In addition, the game machine 10 mixes the first wait period (10 seconds) and the second wait period (6 seconds) in the wait period of 9R, thereby making the progress of the game unexpected. . In addition, the gaming machine 10 sets the second release period (27 seconds) after the first release period (0.1 seconds) in 9R, thereby allowing the player to "A bonus 1" and "A bonus 2". ” can be delayed.

In addition, the game machine 10 performs 0.1 second short opening four times in 9R of "A bonus 2", but it may be a guaranteed short opening that guarantees the minimum winning number (for example, 1). . In addition, the game machine 10 can set the guaranteed short-circuit release in "A bonus 2" to be the same as the guaranteed short-circuit release in "A bonus 1".

Next, the display screen (effect display screen) for each effect of "A bonus 2" on the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 164. FIG. FIG. 155 is a diagram showing an example (part 1) of the effect display screen in "A Bonus 2" of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 156 is a diagram showing an example (part 2) of the effect display screen in the "A bonus 2" of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 157 is a diagram showing an example (part 3) of the effect display screen in "A Bonus 2" of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 158 is a diagram showing an example (part 4) of the effect display screen in "A Bonus 2" of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 159 is a diagram showing an example (No. 5) of the effect display screen in "A Bonus 2" of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing an example (part 6) of the effect display screen in "A bonus 2" of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 161 is a diagram showing an example (No. 7) of the effect display screen in "A Bonus 2" of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 162 is a diagram showing an example (part 8) of the effect display screen in "A Bonus 2" of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 163 is a diagram showing an example (9) of the effect display screen in "A Bonus 2" of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 164 is a timing chart showing an example of decorative symbol switching timing before and after the end of "A bonus 2" in the fourth embodiment.

A display screen 1350 shown in FIG. 155(1) is an effect display screen corresponding to "FAN1 (fanfare)". The display screen 1350 includes an effect guide 1351, a shooting direction guide 1352, an effect element 1353, and a jackpot symbol guide 1354 in its display contents.

The effect guidance 1351 guides a bonus name (for example, "effect bonus") corresponding to the jackpot type. The shooting direction guide 1352 guides the player that the shooting direction of the batted ball is the right game area by means of a message "Right hit" and a pictogram (an arrow pointing to the right). The gaming machine 10 displays the shooting direction guide 1352 at the same display position as other game states (for example, during normal electric support) in which the shooting direction of the batted ball is the right game area, so that the player can see the shooting direction guide 1352. reduces the risk of missing The production element 1353 is a display element for producing fanfare, and includes characters, messages, movies, and the like, for example. The big hit symbol guide 1354 displays the symbols that lead to the big win. For example, the jackpot symbol guidance 1354 uses the decorative pattern A to guide that the jackpot is a three-digit pattern "3".

A display screen 1355 shown in FIG. 155(2) is an effect display screen corresponding to the first "round music selection effect". The display screen 1355 displays an effect guide 1351, a shooting direction guide 1352, an effect element 1353, a round guide 1356, a bonus count guide 1359, an award ball guide 1360, a music guide 1361, and an operation guide 1363. Include in content.

The performance guidance 1351 guides the bonus name corresponding to the jackpot type in a smaller area than during the fanfare. A round guide 1356 guides the number of rounds with a number of petals 1357 corresponding to the apparent number of rounds. The round guide 1356 indicates that the effect bonus is 8 rounds by displaying 8 dark petals 1357 .

Note that the gaming machine 10 may set the final round as a special notification mode in the round guide 1356 to enhance the notification effect of the final round more than the non-final round. For example, the gaming machine 10 outputs a special message such as “Final” or “FINAL” in the final round, or displays in a special display mode such as displaying the petal 1357 one size larger. In addition, the game machine 10 is not limited to the round guide 1356, but the effect guide 1351, the launch direction guide 1352, the effect element 1353, the jackpot pattern guide 1354, etc. The final round may be indicated by displaying with (highlighted by ).

Also, although the gaming machine 10 guides the number of rounds in the round guidance 1356, it is not necessary to display it on the display device 41. FIG. For example, the gaming machine 10 may provide round guidance by sound output. For example, the gaming machine 10 may output different sounds such as “do” for 1R, “re” for 2R, and “mi” for 3R as sound outputs corresponding to rounds. You may output a common sound in each round, such as "pyrorin". In addition, the game machine 10 may output different sounds such as "1 round" for 1R, "2 rounds" for 2R, and "3 rounds" for 3R as sound outputs corresponding to the rounds. As the sound output to be played, a common sound such as "Round up" may be output in each round.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may set the final round as a special notification mode when performing the round guidance by outputting sound so that the notification effect of the final round is higher than that of the non-final round. For example, the gaming machine 10 outputs a special sound such as "pyropyroline" in the non-final round and a special sound such as "pyropyroline" in the final round, or outputs a special sound such as "final round" in the final round with the round number in the non-final round. output.

Further, the game machine 10 may perform round guidance by lamp output (including LED output) from the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46 . For example, the gaming machine 10 can provide round guidance by changing the light intensity, color, and flashing cycle of the lamp corresponding to the round. In addition, the game machine 10 can perform round guidance by changing the number and positions of lamps corresponding to rounds. In addition, the game machine 10 can guide the update of the round by the lighting mode of the lamp.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may set the final round as a special notification mode when round guidance is performed by lamp output so that the notification effect of the final round is higher than that of the non-final round.

The number-of-bonus guide 1359 displays the apparent number of bonuses (for example, "first time"). The won prize ball guide 1360 displays the number of won prize balls in this apparent bonus. It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 uses "1000pt" to indirectly guide the number of prize balls instead of "1000" or "1000 shots" that directly indicate the number of prize balls from the viewpoint of suppressing gambling. Etc. notation is adopted. The song guidance 1361 guides the song titles that can be selected during the bonus. The operation guidance 1363 guides selection operations of music titles. Operation guidance 1363 includes, for example, a pictogram showing an overview of the operation unit (push button 25) and an operation guidance message.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can progress the big win while allowing the player to select the music in the bonus. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can allow the player to feel the progression of the rounds during the big win without guiding the player to the specific number of rounds in the big win.

A display screen 1365 shown in FIG. 156(1) is an effect display screen corresponding to the first "selected song and corresponding movie effect". The display screen 1365 displays a performance guidance 1351, a shooting direction guidance 1352, a round guidance 1356, a bonus number guidance 1359, a winning ball guidance 1360, a music guidance 1361, a music lyrics guidance 1362, and a corresponding movie 1366. Included in display content.

The music guide 1361 guides the music selected in the previous "round music selection effect". The music lyric guidance 1362 guides the lyrics of the currently selected music in cooperation with the performance of the currently selected music. Corresponding movie 1366 displays a movie corresponding to the performance of the currently selected song. The round guide 1356 guides the progress of the production bonus round by changing the dark-colored petals 1357 to light-colored petals 1358 and displaying them as the round progresses. Note that the corresponding movie 1366 is one of the effect elements 1353 .

A display screen 1367 shown in FIG. 156(2) is an effect display screen corresponding to "END1 (ending 1)". The display screen 1367 includes a launch direction guide 1352, an effect element 1353, a bonus won prize ball guide 1368, and a total win prize ball guide 1369 in its display contents. The bonus winning prize ball guide 1368 displays the number of winning prize balls obtained during one bonus. The total won prize ball guide 1369 displays the number of won prize balls obtained during consecutive bonuses. Note that the bonus winning ball guide 1368 and the total winning ball guide 1369 may include only the winning balls based on the big winning openings, or include the winning balls based on the general winning openings. good.

A display screen 1370 shown in FIG. 157(1) is an effect display screen corresponding to the "variation effect during bonus". The display screen 1370 includes an effect guide 1371 and a shooting direction guide 1352 in its display contents. The performance guidance 1371 guides the performance name (for example, "Bamboo bamboo shoots chance after the rain") corresponding to the "variable performance during bonus".

A display screen 1372 shown in FIG. 157(2) is an effect display screen corresponding to the “fluctuation effect during bonus” and is an effect display screen after the display screen 1370 . The display screen 1372 includes, in its display contents, an effect guidance 1371, a shooting direction guidance 1352, and a variation display 1374 during a bonus.

The performance guidance 1371 guides the performance name corresponding to the “fluctuation performance during bonus” in an area smaller than the area on the display screen 1370 . The shooting direction guide 1352 is a smaller area compared to the area on the display screen 1370, and guides that the shooting direction of the batted ball is the right game area while the position is the same. The variable display 1374 during bonus variably displays a left symbol 1374L, a middle symbol 1374C and a right symbol 1374R as an effect during the bonus. However, since the variable display 1374 during the bonus is different from the variable display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, instead of the decorative symbol A used in the large symbol group 1341, the left symbol 1374L, the middle symbol 1374C and the right symbol 1374R Decorative pattern B is used for . In addition, the gaming machine 10 hides the small symbol group 1342 in order to prevent the player from confusing the large symbol group 1341 and the bonus medium fluctuation display 1374 . In addition, the gaming machine 10 stops the special figure 1 state display section 85 and the special figure 2 state display section 86 (for example, lit) or hidden.

The display screen 1375 shown in FIG. 158(1) is one of the variable display modes of the variable display during bonus 1374, in which the left symbol 1374L stops at the symbol "cherry blossom", and the middle symbol 1374C and the right symbol 1374R are changing. shows the state of

A display screen 1376 shown in FIG. 158(2) is one of the variable display modes of the during-bonus variable display 1374 and is a variable display mode following the display screen 1375 . The display screen 1376 shows a state where the left symbol 1374L and the middle symbol 1374C are stopped at the symbol "cherry blossom" and the right symbol 1374R is changing.

A display screen 1377 shown in FIG. 158(3) is one of the variable display modes of the during-bonus variable display 1374 and is a variable display mode following the display screen 1376 . On the display screen 1377, the left pattern 1374L and the middle pattern 1374C form a ready-to-win mode by the pattern "cherry blossom", and the right-side pattern 1374R shows the state in which the reach is fluctuating. On the display screen 1377, for example, by clearing the stop symbols by falling cherry blossoms and forming the symbols by the falling petals, the reach variation of the right symbol 1374R is produced.

A display screen 1378 shown in FIG. 158(4) is one of the variable display modes of the during-bonus variable display 1374 and is a variable display mode following the display screen 1377 . A display screen 1378 shows a state in which the left pattern 1374L, the middle pattern 1374C, and the right pattern 1374R form a winning mode with the pattern "cherry blossom".

A display screen 1380 shown in FIG. 159(1) is an effect display screen corresponding to "FAN2 (fanfare)". The display screen 1380 includes display contents of an effect guide 1351, a shooting direction guide 1352, an effect element 1353, a jackpot pattern guide 1354, and a continuous effect guide 1381. - 特許庁

The effect guidance 1351 guides a bonus name (for example, "effect bonus") corresponding to the jackpot type. The continuous effect guidance 1381 is a display for guiding the continuation of the big win. It should be noted that the continuation effect guidance 1381 is a display that guides the occurrence of an apparent big win in one aspect. The continuous effect guide 1381 is displayed close to the effect guide 1351 in order to distinguish it from the hit occurrence of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. That is, the gaming machine 10 displays only the effect guide 1351 when the effect of the effect bonus is started with the occurrence of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 as a trigger. In addition, the game machine 10 displays the effect guide 1351 and the continuous effect guide 1381 when starting the effect of the second effect bonus during the occurrence of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2.例文帳に追加

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can distinguish between the actual occurrence of a big win and the apparent occurrence of a big win. In addition, if the game machine 10 does not pay due attention, for example, does not pay attention to the continuation effect guidance 1381, the game machine 10 can make the player perceive the apparent occurrence of the big win as the continuous occurrence of the big win. can.

In addition, the big win symbol guide 1354 displays the symbols derived from the big win, and uses the decoration symbol A to guide that the big win is due to the three-digit symbol "3". Incidentally, the jackpot symbol guide 1354 may display a decorative symbol B (for example, a symbol “cherry blossom”) instead of the decorative symbol A or in addition to the decorative symbol A. However, it is desirable that the display position of the decorative pattern B is different from the display position of the decorative pattern A to avoid confusion of the player.

A display screen 1382 shown in FIG. 159(2) is an effect display screen corresponding to the second "round music selection effect". The display screen 1382 includes an effect guide 1351, a shooting direction guide 1352, an effect element 1353, a round guide 1356, a bonus count guide 1359, a prize ball guide 1360, a music guide 1361, an operation guide 1363, and a continuation guide. Effect guidance 1381 is included in the display contents.

The performance guidance 1351 guides the bonus name corresponding to the jackpot type in a smaller area than during the fanfare. Further, the continuation performance guidance 1381 guides the apparent occurrence of a big hit in a smaller area than during the fanfare.

Round guidance 1356 guides the number of rounds by the number of petals 1357 corresponding to the apparent number of rounds in the same manner as the first time. The round guide 1356 indicates that the effect bonus is 8 rounds by displaying 8 dark petals 1357 .

The number-of-bonus guide 1359 displays the apparent number of bonuses (for example, “2nd time”). Note that the bonus count guide 1359 may be provided with a distinguishing display similar to the continuous performance guide 1381 in order to prevent confusion with the actual number of big wins. For example, the number-of-bonus guide 1359 may display "first time", which is the actual number of big wins, and may display "plus 1 time" as a distinguishing display. In addition, the number-of-bonus guide 1359 may not display "first", which is the actual number of big wins, and may display "plus 2 times" as a distinguishing display. Also, the gaming machine 10 may not reset the cumulative number of the distinguishing display when a big win in the pending memory, that is, a so-called pending big win occurs. For example, the bonus times guidance 1359 may display "Plus 3 times" as a distinguishing display when a pending jackpot occurs after "Plus 2 times" is displayed as a distinguishing display.

The won prize ball guide 1360 displays the number of won prize balls in this apparent bonus. The won prize ball guide 1360 may display the actual number of won prize balls during the big hit instead of the apparent number of won prize balls during the bonus. Also, the won prize ball guide 1360 may display the number of won prize balls during one round instead of the apparent number of won prize balls during the bonus. In addition, the won prize ball guide 1360 displays the number of won prize balls and the number of won prize balls during one winning opening (including short opening) instead of the number of won prize balls during the apparent bonus. You may make it

The song guidance 1361 guides the song titles that can be selected during the bonus. It should be noted that the song guide 1361 can expand the number of songs that can be selected according to the number of bonuses. The game machine 10 makes it possible to provide a player with a substantial privilege for the apparent big win by using the apparent number of big wins instead of the actual number of big wins as a condition for expanding options. The operation guidance 1363 guides selection operations of music titles.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can progress the big win while allowing the player to select the music in the bonus. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can allow the player to feel the progression of the rounds during the big win without guiding the player to the specific number of rounds in the big win.

A display screen 1384 shown in FIG. 160(1) is an effect display screen corresponding to the second "selected song and corresponding movie effect". The display screen 1384 includes an effect guidance 1351, a shooting direction guidance 1352, a round guidance 1356, a bonus number guidance 1359, a winning ball guidance 1360, a music guidance 1361, a music lyrics guidance 1362, a corresponding movie 1366, The display contents include a continuation effect guide 1381 .

A display screen 1386 shown in FIG. 160(2) is an effect display screen corresponding to "END2 (ending 2)". The display screen 1386 includes a launch direction guide 1352, an effect element 1353, a bonus won prize ball guide 1368, and a total win prize ball guide 1369 in its display contents. The bonus won prize ball guide 1368 displays the number of won prize balls (for example, "1000pt") obtained during one bonus. The total won prize ball guide 1369 displays the number of won prize balls (for example, “2000pt”) obtained during consecutive bonuses.

A display screen 1388 shown in FIG. 161(1) is an effect display screen corresponding to "END2 (ending 2)". A display screen 1388 is an effect display screen displayed after the display screen 1386 . Display screen 1388 includes launch direction guide 1352 and mode guide 1389 in its display contents. Mode guide 1389 guides the game state after the big hit. The game state after the jackpot is a probability fluctuation state with general electricity support (high probability state), a probability fluctuation state without general electricity support, a normal state with general electricity support (low probability state), and a normal state with general electricity support. There is a normal state without For example, the mode guidance 1389 guides the probability change state accompanied by the general electricity support under the name of "Bamboo shoots mode".

A display screen 1390 shown in FIG. 161(2) is an effect display screen corresponding to "END2 (ending 2)". Display screen 1390 is an effect display screen displayed after display screen 1388 . The display screen 1390 includes a launching direction guide 1352, a gaming machine guide 1391, and an alert guide 1392 in its display contents. The gaming machine guide 1391 guides the manufacturer, seller, or brand of the gaming machine 10 by name or logo. For example, gaming machine guide 1391 displays the manufacturer name "ABC". The attention call guide 1392 displays a display for calling the player's attention to the game. For example, the gaming machine 10 alerts the player against excessive addiction to the game by displaying the message "Beware of addiction" in the alert guide 1392 .

A display screen 1394 shown in FIG. 161(3) is an effect display screen corresponding to "END2 (ending 2)". A display screen 1394 is an effect display screen displayed after the display screen 1388 . The display screen 1394 includes a launch direction guidance 1352, a prepaid card forgetting guidance 1395, and a warning guidance 1392 in its display contents. The prepaid card forgetting guide 1395 guides the player to forget to take the prepaid card. For example, the prepaid card forgetting guidance 1395 displays the message "Be careful not to forget to take out the prepaid card."

The gaming machine 10 can selectively display the display screen 1390 or the display screen 1394 after the display screen 1388 . For example, the gaming machine 10 displays the display screen 1394 for the first big win, and displays the display screen 1390 for the second and subsequent big wins in the consecutive big wins.

A display screen 1396 shown in FIG. 162(1) is an effect display screen corresponding to "END2 (ending 2)". Display screen 1396 is an effect display screen displayed after display screen 1390 or display screen 1394 . The display screen 1396 includes an effect guide 1371 and a shooting direction guide 1352 in its display contents. The performance guidance 1371 guides the performance name (for example, "Bamboo bamboo shoots chance after the rain") corresponding to the "variable performance during bonus".

A display screen 1397 shown in FIG. 162(2) is an effect display screen corresponding to “END 2 (ending 2)” and is an effect display screen after the display screen 1396. FIG. The display screen 1397 includes an effect guidance 1371, a shooting direction guidance 1352, and a bonus fluctuation display 1374 in its display contents.

The performance guidance 1371 guides the performance name corresponding to the “fluctuation performance during bonus” in an area smaller than the area on the display screen 1370 . The shooting direction guide 1352 is a smaller area compared to the area on the display screen 1396, and guides that the shooting direction of the batted ball is the right game area while the position is the same. The variable display 1374 during bonus variably displays a left symbol 1374L, a middle symbol 1374C and a right symbol 1374R as an effect during the bonus.

A display screen 1398 shown in FIG. 163(1) is an effect display screen corresponding to "END2 (ending 2)". The display screen 1398 is one of the variable display modes of the during-bonus variable display 1374, and shows how the left symbol 1374L stops at the symbol "cherry blossom" and the middle symbol 1374C and the right symbol 1374R are varying.

A display screen 1399 shown in FIG. 163(2) is a variable display screen after the end of the big win, and is an effect display screen subsequent to the display screen 1398 . The display screen 1399 switches the variable display 1374 during bonus to the large symbol group 1341 and displays it. The display screen 1399 is one of the variable display modes of the special figure variable display game, and shows a state in which the left symbol 1341L is stopped at symbol "5" and the middle symbol 1341C and the right symbol 1341R are varying.

That is, the gaming machine 10 switches the variable display effect to the special figure variable display game without deriving the result of the variable effect during the bonus while starting the variable effect during the bonus as the bamboo shoots mode. In this way, the gaming machine 10 does not display the stopped state of the large symbol group 1341 (for example, the three-digit symbol "3" which is the last stopped symbol) after the big hit, and the variation display effect in the special symbol variation display game. to start. As a result, the game machine 10 can make it appear that the timing of starting the variation display of the first special figure variation display after the end of the big win appears to start during the ending.

The display screen 1400 shown in FIG. 163(3) is one of the variable display modes of the special figure variable display game, and is a variable display mode following the display screen 1399. FIG. The display screen 1400 shows a "lost" mode in which the left symbol 1341L and the middle symbol 1341C stop at symbol "5" and the right symbol 1341R stops at symbol "4". In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform an effect as if a "lost" was derived as a result of the bamboo shoots chance after the rain (fluctuation effect during the bonus).

The display screen 1401 shown in FIG. 163(4) is one of the variable display modes of the special figure variable display game, and is a variable display mode following the display screen 1399. FIG. The display screen 1401 shows a "hit" mode in which the left symbol 1341L, the middle symbol 1341C and the right symbol 1341R are stopped at symbol "5". In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform an effect as if a "hit" was derived as a result of the bamboo shoots chance after the rain (fluctuation effect during the bonus). As a result, the game machine 10 can produce a succession of apparent big wins across substantial big wins. In addition, the display screen 1401 shows the state of the holding jackpot of the first rotation after the jackpot of the special figure fluctuation display game, but it occurs at an appropriate frequency because it is a fluctuation display during probability fluctuation (high probability). can be expected.

Here, the switching timing from the decorative design B to the decorative design A in "END2" will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming machine 10 switches from the control state "16R" to the control state "ending" at timing t1, and starts the pattern variation by the decorative pattern B by guiding the bamboo shoots chance after the rain at timing t2. The game machine 10 switches from the control state "ending" to the control state "special symbol variation" at timing t3, and switches from the symbol variation by the decorative symbol B to the symbol variation by the decorative symbol A. - 特許庁

Simultaneously with switching to symbol variation by the decorative symbol A, the gaming machine 10 has a large symbol group 1341, a small symbol group 1342, a special figure 1 reserved number display 1343, a special figure 2 reserved number display 1344, and a reserved display 1345. , the pending digestion display 1346 is displayed. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 reliably notifies the player that the control state has been switched from "ending" to "special figure variation". The gaming machine 10 derives a hit as a result of the pattern variation by the decorative pattern A, thereby switching from the control state "special figure variation" to the control state "win (fanfare)" at timing t4.

As a result, the game machine 10 can perform a display effect such that the wins are continuous within the framework of the effect of bamboo shoots chance after the rain. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can improve the frequency with which the player experiences the continuous occurrence of big wins.

[Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 of Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment produced two apparent big wins with one big win on control in the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment. It is different in that it is possible to produce apparent big wins three times or more with the control big wins.

First, the apparent jackpot configuration of the gaming machine 10 of Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 165 is a diagram showing an example of an apparent jackpot configuration in the control jackpot of Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 of Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment includes "X bonus 1", "X bonus 2", and "X bonus 3" as control jackpots.
"X bonus 1" is assumed to be the number of control rounds "16" and the apparent number of rounds "16 (=4×4)". As a result, the "X bonus 1" produces a big hit equivalent to four unit bonuses (production bonuses) with the apparent number of rounds "4" set as four sets. Thus, the gaming machine 10 can produce four apparent big wins with one control big win.

"X bonus 2" is assumed to be the number of control rounds "16" and the apparent number of rounds "16 (=4×2+8×1)". As a result, the "X bonus 2" produces a big win with 2 sets of apparent round number "4" and 1 set of apparent round number "8" in total of 3 sets. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can produce two or more apparent big wins in which the number of rounds is different in one control big win. In other words, the gaming machine 10 can produce two or more apparent big wins in one control big win by changing the magnitude of the game value that can be given to the player.

"X bonus 3" is assumed to be the number of control rounds "16" and the apparent number of rounds "12 (=4×3)". The number of rounds "4", which is the difference between the number of rounds "16" in terms of control and the number of rounds "12" in appearance, is a short opening (for example, a large winning opening "0.1" second opening that does not actually allow you to get a prize ball. ). The gaming machine 10 can improve the degree of freedom in setting the apparently round number that is not divisible from the round number in terms of control by setting short open rounds (for example, “5R” and “6R”). In addition, the game machine 10 can secure a presentation time for delimiting an apparent big win by setting a short open round.

Next, the big hit effect execution unit will be described with reference to FIG. 166 . FIG. 166 is a diagram showing an example of a big hit effect execution unit of Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment.
Since "X bonus 1" produces four apparent big hits, the production can be reset for each unit bonus. For example, when the "X bonus 1" produces four unit bonuses, namely production bonus 1, production bonus 2, production bonus 3, and production bonus 4, the gaming machine 10 sets BGM 1 as the sound production for the production bonus 1, BGM2 can be set as a sound effect in the effect bonus 2, BGM3 can be set as the sound effect in the effect bonus 3, and BGM4 can be set as the sound effect in the effect bonus 4 (BGM selection pattern 1).

Further, even when BGM1 is set as the sound effect for the effect bonus 1 to the effect bonus 4, the game machine 10 can reset the BGM1 at the start timing of each of the effect bonus 1 to the effect bonus 4 (BGM Selection pattern 2).

Although BGM is given as an example of the effect, the start timing of the effect bonus can be set as the reset timing not only for BGM but also for movies, decorations, character effects, and the like. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can make it easier for the player to feel a plurality of apparent big wins.

[Modification 2 of the fourth embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of Modification 2 of the fourth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment executes the variable effect during the bonus in the first round (9R: see FIG. 154) of the next unit bonus (effect bonus), but in the modification 2 of the fourth embodiment. The game machine 10 is different in that it can execute the variable performance during the bonus at a timing other than the first round of the next unit bonus. 167, the execution timing of the variation effect during the bonus of the gaming machine 10 of the modification 2 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 167 is a diagram showing an example of the execution timing of the during-bonus variation effect of Modification 2 of the fourth embodiment.

The during-bonus variable performance shown in FIG. 167 (1) starts the during-bonus variable performance from the interval (INT) before the first round of the next unit bonus. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can extend the time that can be allocated to the variable effect during the bonus. In addition, since the game machine 10 starts the variable effect during bonus before the first round of the next unit bonus, the variable effect during bonus can be started without opening the big winning hole.

The mid-bonus variable performance shown in FIG. 167 (2) starts and ends the mid-bonus variable performance from the interval (INT) before the first round of the next unit bonus. As a result, the game machine 10 ends the variable effect during the bonus before the first round of the next unit bonus, so that the big winning hole is not opened during the variable effect during the bonus. Therefore, since the gaming machine 10 does not require the player to pay attention to the opening of the big prize winning opening, it is possible to further increase the interest in the variable effect itself during the bonus.

In the bonus medium fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 167 (3), short open rounds (for example, short open rounds are set to 5R and 6R) are set between unit bonuses, and the bonus medium fluctuating effect is performed in the short open rounds. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can improve the flexibility of the unit bonus setting timing in the control round. In addition, the number of short release rounds per round is not limited to two, and may be one or three or more.

[Modification 3 of the fourth embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of Modified Example 3 of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the conventional gaming machine, the content of the effect may be changed depending on the number of big wins in terms of control, but it is not easy to increase the number of big wins. It is difficult for the player to feel the change in the contents of the performance. The gaming machine 10 of Modified Example 3 of the fourth embodiment changes the content of the production according to the number of consecutive unit bonuses, so that the appearance of the number of big wins can be easily increased. make it easy to The gaming machine 10 can increase the apparent number of big wins relative to the number of big wins in terms of control, as described with reference to FIG. 152, for example. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can increase the apparent number of big wins relative to the number of big wins in control, as described with reference to FIG. 165, for example.

Description will be made with reference to FIG. FIG. 168 is a diagram showing an example of effect contents that change according to the apparent number of big hits in Modification 3 of the fourth embodiment.

The game machine 10 changes the music option used for sound effects, and the movie option and character option used for display effects between the number of consecutive unit bonuses (apparent number of big wins) '1' to '16'. For example, for song options, the number of choices is set to "1" for the unit bonus consecutive numbers "1" and "2", and thereafter, the number of choices is increased by "1" each time the unit bonus consecutive number increases by "2".

In addition, the movie options are set to "1" for the number of consecutive unit bonuses "1" to "4", and "2" for the number of consecutive unit bonuses to be selected from "5" to "8". The number of options is set to "3" for "9" and "10", the number of options is set to "4" for the number of continuous unit bonuses of "11" and "12", and the number of options is set to "5" for the number of continuous unit bonuses of "13". Thereafter, the number of choices is increased by "1" each time the number of continuous unit bonuses increases by "1".

As for character options, the number of options is set to "1" when the number of continuous unit bonuses is "1", and thereafter, the number of options is increased by "1" each time the continuous number of unit bonuses increases by "1".
In this way, the gaming machine 10 increases options for various effects according to the number of continuous unit bonuses. Since the game machine 10 uses the apparent number of big wins instead of the number of big wins for control as a condition for increasing the options of various performances, it is possible for the player to easily feel the change in the contents of the performance.

The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment (including modifications) described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means can display an effect related to a game (eg, special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 2 variable display game) that variably displays identification information (eg, special figure 1, special figure 2). The control means is capable of executing a special game state (big hit in terms of control) as a result of the game, and a special game state production (unit bonus) of one unit that appears as a special game state during execution of the special game state. The display is displayed on the display means two or more times.

(2) The game machine 10 includes control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300), effect means (for example, display device 41, speakers 19a and 19b, board effect device 44, frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46 etc.). The control means can execute a game that variably displays the identification information. Furthermore, the control means resets the effect related to the special game state being executed by the effect means during execution of the special game state (big hit in terms of control) corresponding to the result of the game.

[Fifth Embodiment]
A gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 shown in the fifth embodiment changes the combination of characters (numbers) forming multi-symbols according to the game state. In the following, when an odd number hit (for example, "111") occurs, the game state (high probability state: also known as variable probability state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal probability state (low probability state) However, when an even hit (for example, "222") occurs, the normal probability state is assumed.

First, the decorative design of the fifth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. FIG. 169 is a diagram showing an example of the decorative design of the fifth embodiment.
The decorative pattern A is a decorative pattern (single pattern) displaying one character (number). Decorative pattern A includes patterns 1601, 1602, 1603, 1604, 1605, 1606, and 1607. Designs 1601, 1602, 1603, 1604, 1605, 1606, and 1607 are distinguishable from other designs by different display modes.

A pattern 1601 is a pattern that displays the number "1". The pattern 1601 includes a base 1601a having a recognizable outline as a pattern with a graphic (for example, a white circular pattern), and numeral elements 1601b having a recognizable design as the number "1".

A design 1602 is a design that displays the number "2". The pattern 1602 includes a base 1602a having a recognizable outline as a pattern with a graphic (for example, a black circular pattern), and numeral elements 1602b having a recognizable design as the number "2".

A pattern 1603 is a pattern that displays the number "3". The pattern 1603 includes a base 1603a having a recognizable outline as a pattern with a graphic (for example, a white square pattern), and numeral elements 1603b having a recognizable design as the number "3".

A design 1604 is a design that displays the number "4". The pattern 1604 includes a base 1604a that has a recognizable outline as a pattern with a graphic (for example, a black square pattern), and numeral elements 1604b that have identifiability as a pattern with the numeral "4".

A pattern 1605 is a pattern that displays the number "5". The pattern 1605 includes a base 1605a having a recognizable outline as a pattern with a graphic (for example, a white triangular pattern), and numeral elements 1605b having a recognizable design as the number "5".

A design 1606 is a design that displays the number "6". The pattern 1606 includes a base 1606a having a recognizable outline as a pattern with a graphic (for example, a black triangular pattern), and numeral elements 1606b having a recognizable design as the number "6".

A pattern 1607 is a pattern that displays the number "7". The pattern 1607 includes a base 1607a that has a recognizable outline as a pattern with a graphic (for example, a white star pattern), and numeral elements 1607b that have a recognizable design as the number "7".

The decorative design B is a decorative design (multi-design) displaying two or more different characters (numbers). The decorative pattern B is a pattern for generating a multi-reach (two or more simultaneous reach) with a higher expectation of winning than a single reach.

The decorative pattern B includes patterns 1611,1612,1613,1614. The patterns 1611, 1612, 1613, and 1614 can be distinguished from other patterns by different display modes.

A pattern 1611 is a pattern that displays the number "1" and the number "2". The symbol 1611 can generate two reach, a reach that can derive a hit ("111") that shifts to a high probability state, and a reach that can derive a hit ("222") that shifts to a normal probability state. It is a possible pattern.

The pattern 1611 is composed of a base 1611a which is a figure (for example, a hatched line pattern) having a distinctive appearance as a pattern, a numeral element 1611b having a distinguishability as a pattern with the number "1", and a figure "2" as a pattern. and a unique numeric element 1611c.

The pattern 1612 is a pattern that displays the number "3" and the number "4". The symbol 1612 can generate two reach, a reach that can derive a hit (“333”) that shifts to a high probability state, and a reach that can derive a hit (“444”) that shifts to a normal probability state. It is a possible pattern.

The pattern 1612 is composed of a base 1612a that has a recognizable outline as a pattern with a figure (for example, crossed diagonal pattern), a numeral element 1612b that has identifiability as a pattern with the number "3", and a figure "4" as a pattern. and a numeric element 1612c having the identity of

The pattern 1613 is a pattern displaying the number "5" and the number "6". The symbol 1613 can generate two reach, a reach that can derive a hit ("555") that shifts to a high probability state, and a reach that can derive a hit ("666") that shifts to a normal probability state. It is a possible pattern.

The pattern 1613 is composed of a base 1613a that has a recognizable appearance as a pattern by a figure (for example, a horizontal line pattern), a numeral element 1613b that has identifiability as a pattern by the number "5", and a number "6" as a pattern. and a unique numeric element 1613c.

The pattern 1614 is a pattern displaying the number "1", the number "3", the number "5" and the number "7". The symbol 1614 is a symbol capable of generating four reach that can derive hits ("111", "333", "555", and "777") for shifting to a high probability state.

The pattern 1614 is composed of a base 1614a which has a distinctive appearance as a pattern by means of a figure (for example, solid color), a numeral element 1614b which is distinguished as a pattern by the number "1", and a number "3" which is distinguished as a pattern. a numeric element 1614c having a gender, a numeric element 1614d having a distinctiveness as a design with the number "5", and a numeric element 1614e having a distinctiveness as a design with the number "7".

The decorative design C is a decorative design (multi-design) displaying two or more characters (numbers). The decorative symbol C is a symbol for generating a reach that leads to a win (a win of relatively high value) that shifts to a high-probability state. The decorative pattern C includes patterns 1621, 1622, 1623, 1624, and 1614. The patterns 1621, 1622, 1623, 1624, and 1614 are distinguishable from other patterns due to their different display modes.

A pattern 1621 is a pattern that displays two numbers "1". The symbol 1621 is a symbol that generates a reach that can lead to a hit ("111") that shifts to a high probability state. That is, the pattern 1621 is a ready-to-win derivation pattern (ready-to-win advance notice pattern) for deriving (to advance notice) the ready-to-win with the ready-to-win pattern of “1”.

The pattern 1621 is composed of a base 1621a which has a distinctive appearance as a pattern by a figure (for example, a diagonal line pattern), a numeral element 1621b which has a distinctiveness as a pattern by the number "1", and a number "1" as a pattern. and a unique numeric element 1621c.

A pattern 1622 is a pattern that displays two numbers "3". The pattern 1622 is a pattern that generates a reach that can lead to a hit ("333") that shifts to a high probability state. That is, the symbol 1622 is a ready-to-win derivation symbol (pre-announcement of reach-to-win symbol) that derives (announces to announcing) a reach to reach symbol "3".

The pattern 1622 is composed of a base 1622a which has a distinctive appearance as a pattern by means of a figure (for example, a pattern of crossed diagonal lines), a numeral element 1622b which is distinguished as a pattern by the number "3", and a number "3" as a pattern. and a numeric element 1622c having the identity of .

A pattern 1623 is a pattern displaying two numbers "5". A symbol 1623 is a symbol that generates a reach that can lead to a win ("555") to shift to a high probability state, and when the game is temporarily stopped at the symbol 1623, a reach with a reach symbol of "5" is generated. That is, the pattern 1623 is a ready-to-win derivation pattern (ready-to-win notice symbol) for deriving (to advance notice) the ready-to-win with the ready-to-win pattern of “5”.

The pattern 1623 is composed of a base 1623a which has a distinctive appearance as a pattern with a figure (for example, a horizontal line pattern), a numeral element 1623b which has a distinctiveness as a pattern with the number "5", and a number "5" as a pattern. and a unique numeric element 1623c.

A pattern 1624 is a pattern that displays two numbers "7". The symbol 1624 is a symbol that generates a reach that can lead to a hit ("777") that shifts to a high probability state. . That is, the pattern 1624 is a ready-to-win derivation pattern (ready-to-win advance notice pattern) for deriving (to advance notice) the ready-to-win with the ready-to-win pattern of “7”.

The pattern 1624 is composed of a base 1624a which has a distinctive appearance as a pattern by a figure (for example, a vertical line pattern), a numeral element 1624b which has a distinctiveness as a pattern by the number "7", and a figure "7" as a pattern. and a numeric element 1624c having the identity of .

The gaming machine 10 can simultaneously or exclusively use the decorative symbols A, B, and C according to the game state.
By the way, since the player generally desires to continue the high-probability state, it is considered unfavorable (to the player's disadvantage) to switch to the normal-probability state in the high-probability state. there is

Therefore, among the decorative symbols B, the multi symbols (symbols 1611, 1612, 1613) that generate a reach that can lead to a hit that shifts to the normal probability state are advantageous to the player in the high probability state. I didn't. That is, in the high-probability state, the multi-symbols (symbols 1611, 1612, 1613) do not contribute to the improvement of expectations. Therefore, in a high-probability state, for example, even if a pattern arrangement is composed of the decorative pattern B and the decorative pattern A, the expectation cannot be improved so much as compared with the case of forming the pattern arrangement only with the decorative pattern A. - 特許庁

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 newly prepares decorative symbols C consisting of multi-symbols (symbols 1621, 1622, 1623, 1624, 1614) that work advantageously for the player even in a high-probability state.

Next, the symbol arrangement in each probability state will be described with reference to FIGS. 170, 171 and 172. FIG. FIG. 170 is a diagram showing an example of the pattern arrangement in the high probability state of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 171 is a diagram showing an example of the symbol array in the normal probability state of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 172 is a diagram showing an example (part 2) of the pattern array in the normal probability state of the fifth embodiment.

In the symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 170, the symbol to be temporarily stopped first (first temporarily stopped symbol) is the left symbol, the symbol to be temporarily stopped second (second temporarily stopped symbol) is the middle symbol, and the symbol to be temporarily stopped second is the middle symbol. The pattern to be temporarily stopped (third temporarily stopped pattern) is the right pattern (three patterns constituting the large pattern group are temporarily stopped in the order of left, middle and right). The pattern arrangement shown in FIG. 170 is composed of decorative patterns A and decorative patterns C. As shown in FIG.

The pattern arrangement of the left pattern includes the decorative pattern A and the decorative pattern C. More specifically, the pattern arrangement of the left pattern includes a pattern 1614 displaying the number "1", the number "3", the number "5" and the number "7", a pattern 1624 displaying two numbers "7", A pattern 1607 displaying the number "7", a pattern 1606 displaying the number "6", a pattern 1623 displaying two numbers "5", a pattern 1605 displaying the number "5", and a pattern displaying the number "4". 1604, a pattern 1622 displaying two numbers "3", a pattern 1603 displaying a number "3", a pattern 1602 displaying a number "2", a pattern 1621 displaying two numbers "1", a number "1" is composed of 12 patterns of a pattern 1601 displaying , and the 12 patterns are arranged in the above order.

The pattern arrangement of the middle pattern includes the decorative pattern A and a part of the decorative pattern C ("pattern 1614 displaying the number '1', the number '3', the number '5' and the number '7'"). More specifically, the pattern arrangement of the middle pattern includes a pattern 1614 displaying the number "1", the number "3", the number "5" and the number "7", a pattern 1607 displaying the number "7", and the number " Symbol 1606 displaying the number "6", symbol 1605 displaying the number "5", symbol 1604 displaying the number "4", symbol 1603 displaying the number "3", symbol 1602 displaying the number "2", symbol " 1” is composed of 8 symbols 1601, and the 8 symbols are arranged in the above order.

The pattern arrangement of the right pattern includes the decorative pattern A. More specifically, the pattern array of the right pattern displays a pattern 1607 displaying the number "7", a pattern 1606 displaying the number "6", a pattern 1605 displaying the number "5", and a number "4". 1604, a pattern 1603 displaying the number "3", a pattern 1602 displaying the number "2", and a pattern 1601 displaying the number "1". are arranged in

In this way, the gaming machine 10 includes the multi symbols (symbols 1621, 1622, 1623, 1624, 1614) in addition to the decorative symbol A as the symbol array of the high probability state, thereby forming the symbol array only with the decorative symbol A. It is possible to improve the expectation that a reach that leads to a hit that transitions to a high probability state will occur than in the case. As a result, the game machine 10 can perform an effect display with a higher sense of expectation than when the symbol array is composed only of the decorative symbols A in the high-probability state.

Next, the pattern arrangement shown in FIG. 171 will be described. In the symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 171, the first temporarily stopped symbol is the left symbol, the second temporarily stopped symbol is the right symbol, and the third temporarily stopped symbol is the middle symbol (three symbols constituting the large symbol group is temporarily stopped in the order of left, right, and middle). The pattern arrangement shown in FIG. 171 is composed of decorative patterns A and decorative patterns B. As shown in FIG.

The pattern arrangement of the left pattern includes the decorative pattern A and the decorative pattern B. More specifically, the pattern arrangement of the left pattern includes a pattern 1614 displaying the number "1", the number "3", the number "5" and the number "7", a pattern 1607 displaying the number "7", and the number " 6”, a pattern 1613 displaying the number “5” and the number “6”, a pattern 1605 displaying the number “5”, a pattern 1604 displaying the number “4”, a number “3” and a number “ A pattern 1612 displaying the number "4", a pattern 1603 displaying the number "3", a pattern 1602 displaying the number "2", a pattern 1611 displaying the number "1" and the number "2", and the number "1" are displayed. The pattern 1601 consists of 11 patterns, and the 11 patterns are arranged in the above order.

The pattern arrangement of the middle pattern includes the decorative pattern A. More specifically, the pattern array of the middle pattern displays a pattern 1607 displaying the number "7", a pattern 1606 displaying the number "6", a pattern 1605 displaying the number "5", and a number "4". 1604, a pattern 1603 displaying the number "3", a pattern 1602 displaying the number "2", and a pattern 1601 displaying the number "1". are arranged in

The pattern arrangement of the right pattern includes the decorative pattern A and the decorative pattern B. More specifically, the pattern arrangement of the right pattern includes a pattern 1614 displaying the number "1", the number "3", the number "5" and the number "7", a pattern 1607 displaying the number "7", and the number " 6”, a pattern 1613 displaying the number “5” and the number “6”, a pattern 1605 displaying the number “5”, a pattern 1604 displaying the number “4”, a number “3” and a number “ A pattern 1612 displaying the number "4", a pattern 1603 displaying the number "3", a pattern 1602 displaying the number "2", a pattern 1611 displaying the number "1" and the number "2", and the number "1" are displayed. The pattern 1601 consists of 11 patterns, and the 11 patterns are arranged in the above order.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 generates multi-reach with a higher expectation than single reach by including multi-patterns (patterns 1611, 1612, 1613, 1614) in addition to the decorative pattern A as the pattern arrangement of the normal probability state. can be made As a result, the game machine 10 can perform an effect display with a higher expectation than when only a single reach occurs (when the pattern arrangement is composed only of the decorative pattern A).

Next, the pattern arrangement shown in FIG. 172 will be described. In the symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 172, the first temporarily stopped symbol is the left symbol, the second temporarily stopped symbol is the middle symbol, and the third temporarily stopped symbol is the right symbol (three symbols constituting the large symbol group is temporarily stopped in the order of left, middle and right). The pattern arrangement shown in FIG. 172 is composed of decorative patterns A and decorative patterns B. As shown in FIG.

The pattern arrangement of the left pattern is composed of a decorative pattern A and a decorative pattern B. More specifically, the pattern arrangement of the left pattern includes a pattern 1614 displaying the number "1", the number "3", the number "5" and the number "7", a pattern 1607 displaying the number "7", and the number " 6”, a pattern 1613 displaying the number “5” and the number “6”, a pattern 1605 displaying the number “5”, a pattern 1604 displaying the number “4”, a number “3” and a number “ A pattern 1612 displaying the number "4", a pattern 1603 displaying the number "3", a pattern 1602 displaying the number "2", a pattern 1611 displaying the number "1" and the number "2", and the number "1" are displayed. The pattern 1601 consists of 11 patterns, and the 11 patterns are arranged in the above order.

The pattern arrangement of the middle pattern is composed of a decorative pattern A and a decorative pattern B. - 特許庁More specifically, the pattern arrangement of the middle pattern includes a pattern 1614 displaying the number "1", the number "3", the number "5" and the number "7", a pattern 1607 displaying the number "7", and the number " 6”, a pattern 1613 displaying the number “5” and the number “6”, a pattern 1605 displaying the number “5”, a pattern 1604 displaying the number “4”, a number “3” and a number “ A pattern 1612 displaying the number "4", a pattern 1603 displaying the number "3", a pattern 1602 displaying the number "2", a pattern 1611 displaying the number "1" and the number "2", and the number "1" are displayed. The pattern 1601 consists of 11 patterns, and the 11 patterns are arranged in the above order.

The pattern arrangement of the right pattern is composed of decorative patterns A. More specifically, the pattern array of the middle pattern displays a pattern 1607 displaying the number "7", a pattern 1606 displaying the number "6", a pattern 1605 displaying the number "5", and a number "4". 1604, a pattern 1603 displaying the number "3", a pattern 1602 displaying the number "2", and a pattern 1601 displaying the number "1". are arranged in

In this way, the gaming machine 10 generates multi-reach with a higher expectation than single reach by including multi-patterns (patterns 1611, 1612, 1613, 1614) in addition to the decorative pattern A as the pattern arrangement of the normal probability state. can be made As a result, the game machine 10 can perform an effect display with a higher expectation than when only a single reach occurs (when the pattern arrangement is composed only of the decorative pattern A).

The above is an example of the pattern arrangement in the normal probability state and the high probability state. In this way, the gaming machine 10 performs a performance display with a heightened sense of expectation that a win will occur in a state in which the possibility of a win is relatively low (normal probability state), and the possibility of a win is relatively high. In the state (high-probability state), an effect display is performed to heighten the expectation that a win (hit of relatively high value) will occur that shifts to the high-probability state. In other words, the gaming machine 10 can enhance different expectations depending on the game state.

In the above description, the symbol array in the normal probability state and the symbol array in the high probability state are added to the decorative symbol A and the multi-symbol (decorative symbol B or decorative symbol C) is added, but the pattern array is not limited to this. For example, the pattern array in the normal probability state can be a pattern array of only the decorative pattern A, and the pattern array in the high probability state can be a pattern array of only the decorative pattern A.

For example, the game machine 10 arranges only the decorative pattern A in a mode other than the specific mode, and sets the pattern arrangement (FIG. 170 or 171) in which a multi-design is added to the decorative pattern A in the specific mode. It is possible to perform an effect display with a high sense of anticipation in a specific mode.

Next, the privilege value per multi-symbol derived according to the game state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 173 is a diagram showing benefits given to the player when a win occurs according to the fifth embodiment.

In FIG. 173, the symbol (symbol 1614) displaying the number "1", the number "3", the number "5" and the number "7" is temporarily stopped at two positions, the first temporary stop symbol and the second temporary stop symbol. After that, the privilege to be given to the player when the winning is derived is shown.

The game machine 10 is temporarily stopped at two positions, ie, a first temporarily stopped pattern and a second temporarily stopped pattern, and then wins. is derived, different benefits are given to the player in the normal-probability state and the high-probability state.

Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, in the normal probability state, the symbols displaying the number "1", the number "3", the number "5", and the number "7" are the first temporary stop symbol and the second temporary stop symbol. After temporarily stopping at two places, when a hit is derived, a shift to a high probability state and a number of game balls determined by lottery are given as a privilege.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10, in the high-probability state, the symbols displaying the number "1", the number "3", the number "5" and the number "7" are the first temporary stop symbol and the second temporary stop symbol. After temporarily stopping at a point, when a hit is derived, the high probability state continues and 2000 game balls are given as a privilege.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 varies the benefit value per hit derived by the multi-symbols according to the game state, thereby varying the effect (improvement range) of the sense of expectation due to the multi-symbols according to the game state ( control). That is, the gaming machine 10 can vary the value of the multi-symbol depending on the game state.

Next, the display effects of the gaming machine 10 in the normal probability state will be described with reference to FIGS. 174, 175 and 176. FIG. As a representative example, the normal probability state in which the three symbols forming the large symbol group temporarily stop in the order of left, right, and middle will be described.

FIG. 174 is a diagram showing an example of the effect flow of the display effect in the normal probability state of the fifth embodiment. 175 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. 176 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 2) of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the fifth embodiment; FIG.

[Effect flow F11] The symbols are stopped and displayed before the start of variation in the variation display game. A display screen 1630 in FIG. 175(1) shows an example of the screen display before the fluctuation starts.
A display screen 1630 shows a screen during symbol stoppage. The display screen 1630 displays a large symbol group 1631, a small symbol group 1632, a special figure 1 reserved number display 1633, a special figure 2 reserved number display 1634, a reserved display 1635, and a reserved digestion display 1636.

The large pattern group 1631 is in charge of game production for the purpose of improving interest. Therefore, the large pattern group 1631 is displayed in a large size by setting a variable display area in the approximate center of the display device 41 . The large symbol group 1631 includes a left symbol 1631L, a medium symbol 1631C and a right symbol 1631R.

On the display screen 1630, the left symbol 1631L indicates that the symbol is "3" and is stopped, the middle symbol 1631C indicates that the symbol is "5" and is stopped, and the right symbol 1631R indicates that the symbol is "5". "7" indicates that it is stopped. That is, on the display screen 1630, the large symbol group 1631 (left symbol 1631L, medium symbol 1631C and right symbol 1631R) indicates that the special symbol variation display game is in a stopped state (symbols are stopped).

The small symbol group 1632 is in charge of notifying the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the small pattern group 1632 is displayed in a small size on the periphery of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without interfering with the display performance by the large pattern group 1631 . The small symbol group 1632 includes left symbols, medium symbols and right symbols. On the display screen 1630, the left pattern, the medium pattern, and the right pattern that constitute the small pattern group 1632 all indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in a stopped state.

In general, the large pattern group 1631 is displayed larger than the small pattern group 1632, has a high degree of freedom in display position, and can be greatly changed in its display mode. On the contrary, the small pattern group 1632 is displayed smaller than the large pattern group 1631, and the degree of freedom of the display position is low (for example, the position is fixed).

The special figure 1 reserved number display 1633 displays the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game. On the display screen 1630, the special figure 1 reserved number display 1633 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game is "4". The special figure 2 reservation number display 1634 displays the number of reservation memories of the special figure 2 game. On the display screen 1630, the special figure 2 reserved number display 1634 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 game is "4". The number of pending storage that the pending display 1635 displays corresponds to the sum of the number of pending storage that the special figure 1 pending number display 1633 displays and the number of pending storage that the special figure 2 pending number display 1634 displays.

For example, when the special figure 1 pending number display 1633 displays "4" and the special figure 2 pending number display 1634 displays "4" as shown in the display screen 1630, the pending display 1635 is 8 pending storage display indicates that the number of reserved memories is "8".

Reservation display 1635, by its display mode (reservation memory display displayed in reservation display 1635), can indicate the number of reservation memories of the special figure variation display game, and can notify the degree of expectation for the game result for each reservation memory. In display screen 1630, pending display 1635 displays eight pending storage displays, indicating that the number of pending storage is "8".

The pending digestion display 1636 can indicate whether or not the special figure variation display game is in the variation display state by its display mode, and can notify the degree of expectation for the game result. On the display screen 1630, the pending digestion display 1636 has a blank (blank) inside the frame to indicate that the special figure variation display game is in a stopped state.

When the symbols are stopped and displayed, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the production flow F12.
[Effect flow F12] The gaming machine 10 starts variable display. A display screen 1640 in FIG. 175(2) shows an example of screen display after the start of the variable display.

A display screen 1640 is a screen subsequent to the display screen 1630 and shows a screen during variable display (during three-symbol variation). On the display screen 1640, the left symbol 1631L, the medium symbol 1631C and the right symbol 1631R of the large symbol group 1631 are fluctuating, indicating that the special figure fluctuation display game is being fluctuated. Also, on the display screen 1640, the left pattern, the medium pattern and the right pattern of the small pattern group 1632 are fluctuating, indicating that the special figure fluctuation display game is being fluctuated.

On the display screen 1640, the special figure 1 reserved number display 1633 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game is "4", and the special figure 2 reserved number display 1634 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 game is It shows that it is "3", and the pending display 1635 shows that the pending memory number of the special figure fluctuation display game is "7". In addition, on the display screen 1640, a pending digestion display 1636 displays a pending memory display that is being digested, indicating that the special figure variation display game is in the process of variation display.

After starting the variable display, the game machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F13.
[Effect flow F13] The gaming machine 10 performs a temporary stop effect of the first temporary stop symbol (left symbol). A display screen 1645 in FIG. 176(1) shows a screen display example in the temporary stop effect of the first temporary stop symbol.

A display screen 1645 is a screen after the display screen 1640, and shows a screen after the first temporarily stopped symbol is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop effect of the first temporarily stopped symbol (left symbol 1631L). On the display screen 1645, the left symbol 1631L of the large symbol group 1631 is a symbol displaying the number "3" and the number "4", indicating that the game is temporarily stopped. On the display screen 1645, the middle pattern 1631C and the right pattern 1631R of the large pattern group 1631 indicate that they are fluctuating.

After completing the temporary stop effect of the first temporary stop symbol (left symbol), the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F14.
[Effect flow F14] The gaming machine 10 performs a temporary stop effect of the second temporary stop symbol (right symbol). A display screen 1650 in FIG. 176(2) and a display screen 1655 in FIG. 176(3) show screen display examples in the temporary stop effect of the second temporary stop symbol.

A display screen 1650 is a screen after the display screen 1645, and shows a screen in a state where the second temporary stop symbol is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop effect of the second temporary stop symbol and multi-reach has occurred. On the display screen 1650, the left symbol 1631L of the large symbol group 1631 is a symbol displaying the number "3" and the number "4", indicating that the game is temporarily stopped. On the display screen 1650, the right symbol 1631R of the large symbol group 1631 is a symbol displaying the number "3" and the number "4", indicating that the game is temporarily stopped. On the display screen 1650, the middle pattern 1631C of the large pattern group 1631 indicates that it is fluctuating. In other words, the display screen 1650 indicates that a multi-reach that leads to a win is occurring when the middle symbol 1631C temporarily stops at the number "3" or the number "4" due to the temporary stop of the second temporary stop symbol.

A display screen 1655 is a screen subsequent to the display screen 1645, and shows a screen in a state in which the second temporary stop symbol is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop effect of the second temporary stop symbol and no reach has occurred. On the display screen 1655, the left symbol 1631L of the large symbol group 1631 is a symbol displaying the number "3" and the number "4", indicating that the game is temporarily stopped. On the display screen 1655, the right symbol 1631R of the large symbol group 1631 is a symbol displaying the number "5" and is temporarily stopped. On the display screen 1655, the middle pattern 1631C of the large pattern group 1631 indicates that it is fluctuating. That is, the display screen 1655 indicates that the ready-to-win has not occurred due to the temporary stop of the second temporary stop symbol.

The game machine 10 advances to ready-to-win and performs a ready-to-win effect when ready-to-win occurs due to the temporary stop of the second temporary stop symbol (FIG. 176 (2)). On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 advances to a loss and displays a loss screen when reach does not occur by temporarily stopping the second temporarily stopped symbol ((3) in FIG. 176). The above is an example of the display effect in the normal probability state.

Next, the display effects of the gaming machine 10 in the high probability state will be described with reference to FIGS. 177, 178, 179 and 180. FIG. FIG. 177 is a diagram showing an example of the effect flow of the display effect in the high probability state of the fifth embodiment. 178 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 3) of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. 179 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 4) of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. 180 is a diagram illustrating an example (No. 5) of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the fifth embodiment; FIG.

[Effect flow F21] The symbols are stopped and displayed before the start of variation in the variation display game. A display screen 1660 in FIG. 178(1) shows an example of the screen display before the fluctuation starts.
A display screen 1660 shows a screen during symbol stoppage. On the display screen 1660, the left symbol 1631L indicates that the symbol is "3" and is stopped, the middle symbol 1631C indicates that the symbol is "5" and is stopped, and the right symbol 1631R indicates that the symbol is "5". "7" indicates that it is stopped. That is, on the display screen 1660, the large symbol group 1631 (left symbol 1631L, medium symbol 1631C and right symbol 1631R) indicates that the special symbol variation display game is in a stopped state (symbols are stopped).

In addition, on the display screen 1660, the left, medium and right symbols forming the small symbol group 1632 all indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in a stopped state.
On the display screen 1660, the special figure 1 reserved number display 1633 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game is "4". On the display screen 1660, the special figure 2 reserved number display 1634 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 game is "4". On display screen 1660, pending display 1635 indicates that the pending storage count is "8". On the display screen 1660, the pending digestion display 1636 has a blank (blank) inside the frame to indicate that the special figure variation display game is in a stopped state.

After stopping and displaying the symbols, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the production flow F22.
[Effect flow F22] The gaming machine 10 starts variable display. A display screen 1665 in FIG. 178(2) shows an example of screen display after the start of the variable display.

A display screen 1665 is a screen after the display screen 1660, and shows a screen during variable display (during three-pattern variation). On the display screen 1665, the left symbol 1631L, the medium symbol 1631C and the right symbol 1631R of the large symbol group 1631 are fluctuating, indicating that the special figure fluctuation display game is being fluctuated. In addition, on the display screen 1665, the left, medium and right symbols of the small symbol group 1632 are fluctuating, indicating that the special figure fluctuation display game is being variably displayed.

On the display screen 1665, the special figure 1 reserved number display 1633 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game is "4", and the special figure 2 reserved number display 1634 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 game is It shows that it is "3", and the pending display 1635 shows that the pending memory number of the special figure fluctuation display game is "7". In addition, on the display screen 1665, a pending digestion display 1636 displays a pending memory display that is being digested, indicating that the special figure variation display game is in the process of variation display.

After starting the variable display, the game machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F23.
[Effect flow F23] The gaming machine 10 performs a temporary stop effect of the first temporary stop symbol (left symbol). Display screen 1670 in FIG. 178(3), display screen 1675 in FIG. 179(1), and display screen 1675 in FIG. A display screen 1685 in FIG. 180(1) shows a screen display example when symbols other than the ready-to-reach derivation symbols are temporarily stopped on the display screen 1680 .

A display screen 1670 is a screen after the display screen 1665, and shows a screen after the ready-to-win derivation symbol is temporarily stopped on the first temporary stop symbol (left symbol 1631L) by the temporary stop effect of the first temporary stop symbol (left symbol 1631L). On the display screen 1670, the left symbol 1631L of the large symbol group 1631 is a symbol displaying the number "3" and the number "3", indicating that the game is temporarily stopped. On the display screen 1670, the medium symbol 1631C and the right symbol 1631R of the large symbol group 1631 indicate that they are fluctuating.

A display screen 1675 is a screen after the display screen 1670, and shows a screen after the ready-to-win derivation symbol is temporarily stopped on the first temporary stop symbol (left symbol 1631L) by the temporary stop effect of the first temporary stop symbol (left symbol 1631L). On the display screen 1675, the large symbol group 1631 separates the two numbers "3" from the base, which are the number "3" temporarily stopped in the first temporarily stopped symbol on the display screen 1670 and the symbol displaying the number "3" ( pops up) to indicate that it is in an enlarged (highlighted) state.

A display screen 1680 is a screen after the display screen 1675, and shows a screen after the ready-to-win derivation symbol is temporarily stopped on the first temporary stop symbol (left symbol 1631L) by the temporary stop effect of the first temporary stop symbol (left symbol 1631L). On the display screen 1680, the large pattern group 1631 shows that the two numerals "3" separated from the base and enlarged and displayed on the display screen 1675 are moved to the upper left and upper right of the screen. On the display screen 1680, the large symbol group 1631 displays the third temporarily stopped symbol (right symbol 1631R) in the center of the screen to indicate that the third temporarily stopped symbol (right symbol 1631R) is fluctuating. In other words, the display screen 1680 indicates that a win is generated when the third temporarily stopped symbol (right symbol 1631R) temporarily stops at the number "3" due to the temporary stop of the first temporarily stopped symbol.

A display screen 1685 is a screen subsequent to the display screen 1665, and shows a screen after the first temporary stop symbol (left symbol 1631L) temporarily stops symbols other than the ready-to-win derivation symbols by the temporary stop effect. . On the display screen 1685, the left symbol 1631L of the large symbol group 1631 is a symbol displaying the number "4" and is temporarily stopped. On the display screen 1685, the middle pattern 1631C and the right pattern 1631R of the large pattern group 1631 indicate that they are fluctuating.

The game machine 10 temporarily stops the ready-to-win derivation symbol by the temporary stop effect of the first temporary stop symbol (display screen 1670 in FIG. 178(3), display screen 1675 in FIG. 179(1), and FIG. 179(2) On the display screen 1680), go to reach and perform reach production. On the other hand, when the game machine 10 temporarily stops symbols other than the ready-to-win derivation symbol by the temporary stop effect of the first temporary stop symbol (display screen 1685 in FIG. 180(1)), the game machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F24.

[Effect flow F24] The gaming machine 10 performs a temporary stop effect of the second temporary stop symbol (medium symbol). A display screen 1690 in FIG. 180(2) and a display screen 1695 in FIG. 180(3) show screen display examples in the temporary stop effect of the second temporary stop symbol.

A display screen 1690 is a screen subsequent to the display screen 1685, and shows a screen in a state where the second temporary stop symbol is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop effect of the second temporary stop symbol and a reach has occurred. On the display screen 1690, the left symbol 1631L of the large symbol group 1631 is a symbol displaying the number "4" and is temporarily stopped. On the display screen 1690, the medium symbol 1631C of the large symbol group 1631 is a symbol displaying the number "4" and indicates that the game is temporarily stopped. On the display screen 1690, the right symbol 1631R of the large symbol group 1631 shows that it is fluctuating. In other words, the display screen 1690 indicates that the ready-to-win is generated when the right symbol 1631R temporarily stops at the number "4" due to the temporary stop of the second temporary stop symbol.

A display screen 1695 is a screen after the display screen 1685, and shows a screen in a state in which the second temporary stop symbol is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop effect of the second temporary stop symbol and no reach has occurred. On the display screen 1695, the left symbol 1631L of the large symbol group 1631 is a symbol displaying the number "4" and is temporarily stopped. On the display screen 1695, the middle symbol 1631C of the large symbol group 1631 is a symbol displaying the number "1", the number "3", the number "5" and the number "7", indicating that the game is temporarily stopped. The display screen 1695 shows that the right symbol 1631R of the large symbol group 1631 is fluctuating. That is, the display screen 1695 shows that the ready-to-win has not occurred due to the temporary stop of the second temporary stop symbol.

The game machine 10 advances to ready-to-win and performs a ready-to-win effect when ready-to-win occurs due to the temporary stop of the second temporary stop symbol ((2) in FIG. 180). On the other hand, the game machine 10 advances to a loss and displays a loss screen when reach does not occur by temporarily stopping the second temporarily stopped symbol ((3) in FIG. 180). The above is an example of the display effects in the high-probability state.

Next, in a high-probability state, a case where the ready-to-win derivation pattern is temporarily stopped on the first temporary stop symbol and develops into a ready-to-win state, and a case where a symbol other than the ready-to-win derivation symbol is temporarily stopped on the first temporary stop symbol and develops to a ready-to-win state. I will explain the flow until it develops to the reach of

FIG. 181 shows the case where the ready-to-win derivation pattern is temporarily stopped at the first temporary stop symbol of the fifth embodiment and develops into the ready-to-win state, and the case where the symbols other than the ready-to-win derivation symbol are temporarily stopped at the first temporary stop symbol and become the ready-to-win state. It is a timing chart which shows the timing when it develops.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 181(1) shows the timing when the ready-to-win derivation symbol temporarily stops at the first temporary stop symbol to develop into a ready-to-win.
The game machine 10 starts the fluctuation from the fluctuation stop state (display screen 1660 in FIG. 178(1)) at the timing t11 and changes the three patterns to the three-symbol fluctuation state (display screen 1665 in FIG. 178(2)). 178(3), display screen 1675 in FIG. 179(1), and display screen 1680 in FIG. 179(2). At timing t13, the temporary stop effect of the first temporary stop symbol is finished, and the ready-to-win effect is started.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 181(2) shows the timing when symbols other than the ready-to-win deriving symbols temporarily stop on the first temporarily stopped symbol to develop into a ready-to-win state.
The game machine 10 starts the fluctuation from the fluctuation stop state (display screen 1660 in FIG. 178(1)) at the timing t11 and changes the three patterns to the three-symbol fluctuation state (display screen 1665 in FIG. 178(2)). At timing t12, the temporary stop effect of the first temporary stop symbol is performed (display screen 1685 in FIG. 180(1)), and the temporary stop effect of the first temporary stop symbol is completed at timing t13, and the second temporary stop symbol is displayed. A temporary stop effect is started (display screen 1690 in FIG. 180 (2)), the temporary stop effect of the second temporary stop pattern is finished at timing t14, and the ready-to-win effect is started.

Thus, the gaming machine 10 can omit the temporary stop effect of the second temporary stop symbol when the ready-to-win derivation symbol is temporarily stopped at the first temporary stop symbol. That is, the gaming machine 10 can shorten the performance time by the ready-to-win derivation symbol.

In the above description, when the ready-to-win derivation symbol temporarily stops at the first temporary stop symbol and develops into a ready-to-win, the first temporary stop symbol is displayed between timing t12 and timing t13 as the first temporary stop symbol temporary stop effect. Temporary stop (display screen 1670 in FIG. 178(3)) and separation effect (display screen 1675 in FIG. 179(1) and display screen 1680 in FIG. 179(2)) are performed, but the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, a temporary stop of the first temporary stop symbol (display screen 1670 in FIG. 178(3)) is performed between timing t12 and timing t13, and a separation effect (display of FIG. 179(1)) is performed between timing t13 and timing t14. The screen 1675 and the display screen 1680 of FIG. 179 (2) are performed, and the ready-to-win effect is performed at the timing t14 in the same manner as when the symbols other than the ready-to-win deriving symbols temporarily stop on the first temporarily stopped symbol to develop to the ready-to-win. You can also start from In this way, the gaming machine 10 develops into a ready-win state by temporarily stopping the ready-to-win derivation symbols on the first temporary stop symbol and developing into a ready-to-win state, and by temporarily stopping symbols other than the ready-to-win derivation symbols on the first temporary stop symbol and developing into a ready-win state. The performance time can be the same in the case of

[Modification 1 of the fifth embodiment]
In the fifth embodiment, in the high-probability state symbol arrangement, the ready-to-reach derivation symbol is arranged only in the first temporary stop symbol. On the other hand, in the modified example 1 of the fifth embodiment, the ready-to-reach derivation symbol is arranged also in the second temporary stop symbol in the symbol arrangement in the high probability state.

The pattern arrangement in the high probability state of Modification 1 of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 182 is a diagram showing an example of the symbol array in the normal probability state of Modification 1 of the fifth embodiment.
In the symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 182, the first temporarily stopped symbol is the left symbol, the second temporarily stopped symbol is the middle symbol, and the third temporarily stopped symbol is the right symbol (three symbols constituting the large symbol group is stopped in order of left, middle and right) is a pattern arrangement in a high probability state. The pattern arrangement shown in FIG. 182 is composed of decorative patterns A and decorative patterns C. As shown in FIG.

The pattern arrangement of the left pattern includes the decorative pattern A and the decorative pattern C. More specifically, the pattern arrangement of the left pattern includes a pattern 1614 displaying the number "1", the number "3", the number "5" and the number "7", a pattern 1624 displaying two numbers "7", A pattern 1607 displaying the number "7", a pattern 1606 displaying the number "6", a pattern 1623 displaying two numbers "5", a pattern 1605 displaying the number "5", and a pattern displaying the number "4". 1604, a pattern 1622 displaying two numbers "3", a pattern 1603 displaying a number "3", a pattern 1602 displaying a number "2", a pattern 1621 displaying two numbers "1", a number "1" is composed of 12 patterns of a pattern 1601 displaying , and the 12 patterns are arranged in the above order.

The pattern arrangement of the middle pattern includes the decorative pattern A and the decorative pattern C. - 特許庁More specifically, the pattern arrangement of the middle pattern includes a pattern 1614 displaying the number "1", the number "3", the number "5" and the number "7", a pattern 1624 displaying two numbers "7", A pattern 1607 displaying the number "7", a pattern 1606 displaying the number "6", a pattern 1623 displaying two numbers "5", a pattern 1605 displaying the number "5", and a pattern displaying the number "4". 1604, a pattern 1622 displaying two numbers "3", a pattern 1603 displaying a number "3", a pattern 1602 displaying a number "2", a pattern 1621 displaying two numbers "1", a number "1" is composed of 12 patterns of a pattern 1601 displaying , and the 12 patterns are arranged in the above order.

The pattern arrangement of the right pattern includes the decorative pattern A. More specifically, the pattern array of the right pattern displays a pattern 1607 displaying the number "7", a pattern 1606 displaying the number "6", a pattern 1605 displaying the number "5", and a number "4". 1604, a pattern 1603 displaying the number "3", a pattern 1602 displaying the number "2", and a pattern 1601 displaying the number "1". are arranged in

Next, the effect when the ready-to-win derivation symbol temporarily stops at the second temporary stop symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 183 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen displayed by a display device according to modification 1 of the fifth embodiment; FIG.

A display screen 1700 of FIG. 183(1) is a screen subsequent to the display screen 1685, and shows a screen after the ready-to-win derivation symbol is temporarily stopped on the second temporary stop symbol by the temporary stop effect of the second temporary stop symbol. .

On the display screen 1700, the left symbol 1631L of the large symbol group 1631 is a symbol displaying the number "4", indicating that the game is temporarily stopped. In the display screen 1700, the medium symbol 1631C of the large symbol group 1631 is a symbol displaying the number "3" and the number "3", indicating that the game is temporarily stopped. On the display screen 1700, the right symbol 1631R indicates that it is fluctuating.

A display screen 1705 in FIG. 183(2) is a screen subsequent to the display screen 1700, and shows a screen after the ready-to-win derivation symbol is temporarily stopped on the second temporary stop symbol by the temporary stop effect of the second temporary stop symbol. .

On the display screen 1705, the large symbol group 1631 separates the two numbers "3" from the base of the symbols displaying the number "3" temporarily stopped in the second temporarily stopped symbol on the display screen 1700 and the number "3" ( pops up) to indicate that it is in an enlarged (highlighted) state.

A display screen 1710 in FIG. 183(3) is a screen after the display screen 1705, and shows a screen after the ready-to-win derivation symbol is temporarily stopped on the second temporary stop symbol by the temporary stop effect of the second temporary stop symbol. .

On the display screen 1710, a large pattern group 1631 indicates that the two numerals "3" separated from the base and enlarged and displayed on the display screen 1705 are moved to the upper left and upper right of the screen. On the display screen 1710, the large symbol group 1631 displays the third temporarily stopped symbol (right symbol 1631R) in the center of the screen to indicate that the third temporarily stopped symbol (right symbol 1631R) is fluctuating. In other words, the display screen 1710 indicates that a win is generated when the third temporary stop symbol (right symbol 1631R) temporarily stops at the number "3" due to the temporary stop of the second temporary stop symbol.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 arranges the ready-to-win derivation symbol also in the second temporary stop symbol, so that even when the symbol displaying an even number is temporarily stopped in the first temporary stop symbol, the second temporary stop symbol This temporary stop can give the player a sense of anticipation that will develop into a reach that will lead to a winning that continues the high probability state. That is, the gaming machine 10 can perform an effect display with a higher sense of expectation.

[Modification 2 of the fifth embodiment]
In the fifth embodiment, the pattern arrangement in the normal probability state is composed of the decorative pattern A and the decorative pattern B. As shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the modification 2 of the fifth embodiment, the symbol array (FIG. 170) composed of the decorative symbol A and the decorative symbol C is used even in the symbol array in the normal probability state.

The symbol array setting process in the normal probability state of Modification 2 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 184 is a diagram showing an example of a flow chart of the symbol arrangement setting process in the normal probability state of Modification 2 of the fifth embodiment.

The pattern array setting process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 in the effect display editing process of step D22 of the main process.
[Step D111] The control unit determines whether or not the number of pending memories is 6 or more. The control unit proceeds to step D112 when the number of reserved memories is less than 6, and proceeds to step D113 when the number of reserved memories is 6 or more.

[Step D112] The control unit sets a pattern array (Fig. 171 or Fig. 172) composed of decorative patterns A and B.
[Step D113] The control section sets a pattern array (FIG. 170) composed of decorative patterns A and C. FIG.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can speed up the processing speed of the reserved memory by setting the symbol array including the ready-to-win derivation pattern when the number of reserved memories is large. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the reserved storage number from becoming full ("8").

The gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment described above (including modified examples 1 to 2) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The control means causes the display means to display the variable display game using the symbol array (FIGS. 170, 171, 172, and 182) including multi-symbols having two or more pieces of identification information (numbers). The control means sets the combination of the identification information of the multi-symbols in the first game state (high probability state) as the first combination, and the combination of the identification information of the multi-symbols in the second game state (normal probability state). A second combination different from the first combination is selected.

(2) The control means of (1) causes at least one of the first combination and the second combination to include the same identification information.
(3) The control means of (1) sets at least one of the first combination and the second combination as a combination of identification information capable of forming the reach mode, and sets the identification information capable of forming the reach mode. A ready-to-win advance notice is performed by temporarily stopping and displaying multi-symbols having a combination during variable display.

Moreover, the gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment described above (including modified examples 1 to 2) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The control means causes the display means to display the variable display game using a symbol array including multi-symbols having two or more pieces of identification information (numbers). The control means sets a combination of identification information possessed by the multi-symbols as a combination of identification information capable of forming a ready-to-win state, and performs a ready-to-win advance notice by performing a temporary stop display during variable display of the multi-symbols.

Moreover, the gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment described above (including modified examples 1 to 2) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The control means causes the display means to display the variable display game using a symbol array including multi-symbols having two or more pieces of identification information (numbers). The control means provides a privilege to the player based on the winning derived from the multi-symbols in the first game state (high probability state), and rewards the player based on the winning derived from the multi-symbols in the second gaming state (normal probability state). (Fig. 173).

Note that the processing functions described above can be realized by a computer. In that case, a program describing the processing contents of the functions that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have is provided. By executing the program on a computer, the above processing functions are realized on the computer. A program describing the processing content can be recorded in a computer-readable recording medium. Computer-readable recording media include magnetic storage devices, optical disks, magneto-optical recording media, semiconductor memories, and the like. Magnetic storage devices include hard disk devices (HDD), flexible disks (FD), magnetic tapes, and the like. Optical disks include DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), DVD-RAM, CD (Compact Disk)-ROM/RW (ReWritable), and the like. Magneto-optical recording media include MO (Magneto-Optical disk) and the like.

When distributing a program, for example, portable recording media such as DVDs and CD-ROMs on which the program is recorded are sold. It is also possible to store the program in the storage device of the server computer and transfer the program from the server computer to another computer via the network.

A computer that executes a program stores, for example, a program recorded on a portable recording medium or a program transferred from a server computer in its own storage device. The computer then reads the program from its own storage device and executes processing according to the program. The computer can also read the program directly from the portable recording medium and execute processing according to the program. Also, the computer can execute processing according to the received program every time the program is transferred from a server computer connected via a network.

At least part of the above processing functions can also be implemented by electronic circuits such as DSPs (Digital Signal Processors), ASICs (Application Specific Integrated Circuits), and PLDs (Programmable Logic Devices).

It should be noted that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the disclosed embodiment as a gaming machine. It can be applied to all game machines using game balls and slot machines which are game machines using medals.

Also, the disclosed embodiments should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. Also, the configurations of the above-described embodiment and modifications may be combined and applied. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

10 Game Machine 41 Display Device 100 Game Control Device 300 Effect Control Device

Claims (1)

It is possible to execute a variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole, and to give a game value to a player when the variable display game derives a special result. A gaming machine comprising: game control means for controlling a game state; and display control means for displaying an effect display related to the variable display game in a display area of a display device,
The game control means is
start memory means capable of storing start memories up to a predetermined upper limit number as the right to execute the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball into the start winning opening;
a variable display game control means capable of executing the variable display game based on the start memory;
with
The identification information can be variably displayed in a reach mode, which is a variable display mode corresponding to the reach effect display,
The display control means is
displaying a first effect display in the variable display game and a second effect display in the special game state in the display area of the display device;
A numerical display indicating the number of the starting memories and an image display corresponding to the number of the starting memories can be displayed in the display area of the display device,
The variable display of the identification information that can be variably displayed in the reach state and the first effect display are displayed in the first variable display area, and the image display and the numerical value display are displayed at predetermined positions corresponding to each of them. a first control;
Two or more second variable display areas having a size smaller than that of the first variable display area and having no area for displaying the numerical display can be set within the first variable display area so as not to overlap with the predetermined position . displaying, in the set second variable display area, the variable display of the identification information that can be variably displayed in the reach mode and the first effect display, and the display outside the set second variable display area ; second control for not displaying the variable display of the identification information that can be variably displayed in the reach mode in the first variable display area, displaying the numerical value display at the predetermined position, and not displaying the image display; is executable to
game machine.

Images